Download - konica minolta 7020

KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

SERVICE MANUAL

Models7020/7022/7025/7030

7035/7130/7135

CSM-7135

OCTOBER 2002

7020/7022/7025/7030

7035/7130/7135

SERVICE MANUAL

OCTOBER 2002

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Because of the possible hazards to an inexperiencedperson servicing this equipment, as well as the risk ofdamage to the equipment, Konica Business Technolo-gies strongly recommends that all servicing be per-formed by Konica-trained service technicians only.

Changes may have been made to this equipment toimprove its performance after this service manual wasprinted. Accordingly, Konica Business Technologies,Inc., makes no representations or warranties, eitherexpressed or implied, that the information contained inthis service manual is complete or accurate. It is under-stood that the user of this manual must assume all risksor personal injury and/or damage to the equipment whileservicing the equipment for which this service manualis intended.

© 2002, KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.All rights reserved.Printed in U.S.A.

Corporate Publications Department

CONTENTS

iii

CONTENTS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS.......... vii

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................. vii

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION ............................................................ vii

SAFETY WARNINGS.................................................. vii

SAFETY INFORMATION ........................................... xvi

IMPORTANT INFORMATION .................................... xvi

SAFETY CIRCUITS ................................................... xvii

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE ..... xix

7020 SERIES LIST OF DIFFERENCE ................... xxiLIST OF OPTIONS THAT CAN BE USED WITH THE7020 SERIES ......................................................... xxii7020 SERIES PRODUCT CONFIGURATORS .... xxiii

1. OUTLINEOUTLINE OF SYSTEM .......................................... 1-17020 SERIES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ....... 1-2CENTER CROSS SECTION ................................. 1-5DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................. 1-6

[1] Main Drive .............................................. 1-6[2] Developing Drive .................................... 1-7[3] Paper feed Drive .................................... 1-8[4] ADU Drive ............................................ 1-10[5] Reading Drive ....................................... 1-11[6] Toner supply Drive ............................... 1-12

2. UNIT EXPLANATIONEXTERNAL SECTION ....................................... 2-A-1

[1] Composition ....................................... 2-A-1DRIVE SECTION ............................................... 2-B-1

[1] Composition ....................................... 2-B-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-B-1[3] M1 (Main Motor) Control .................... 2-B-2

READ SECTION ................................................ 2-C-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-C-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-C-1[3] M2 (Optical Motor) Control ................ 2-C-2[4] Exposure Control ............................... 2-C-5[5] Original Reading Control .................... 2-C-6[6] APS Control ........................................ 2-C-7[7] AE Control .......................................... 2-C-9

WRITE UNIT ...................................................... 2-D-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-D-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-D-1[3] M5 (Polygon Motor) Control ............... 2-D-2[4] Image Write Control ........................... 2-D-3

DRUM UNIT ....................................................... 2-E-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-E-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-E-1[3] PCL/TSL Control ................................ 2-E-2[4] Separation Claws Control .................. 2-E-2[5] Paper Entrance Guide Plate Control . 2-E-3

CORONA UNIT .................................................. 2-F-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-F-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-F-1[3] Charging Control ................................ 2-F-2[4] Transfer/Separation Control ............... 2-F-3

DEVELOPING UNIT ..........................................2-G-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-G-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-G-1[3] M3 (Developing Motor) Control .......... 2-G-2[4] Developing Bias Control ..................... 2-G-2[5] Toner Density Control ........................2-G-3

TONER SUPPLY UNIT ...................................... 2-H-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-H-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-H-1[3] Toner Level Detection Control ........... 2-H-2[4] Toner Bottle Detection Control .......... 2-H-2

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT................. 2-I-1[1] Composition ........................................ 2-I-1[2] Mechanisms ........................................ 2-I-1

PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................ 2-J-1[1] Composition ........................................ 2-J-1[2] Mechanisms ........................................ 2-J-1[3] Paper Feed Control ............................. 2-J-2[4] Paper Up Down Control ...................... 2-J-3[5] Paper Size Detection Control .............. 2-J-4[6] No Paper Detection Control ................ 2-J-6[7] Control of Paper Level Detection ........ 2-J-6[8] Intermediate Conveyance Control

(7030/7130/7035/7135 Only) .............. 2-J-7FIXING UNIT ...................................................... 2-K-1

[1] Composition ....................................... 2-K-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-K-1[3] Fixing Temperature Control ............... 2-K-2[4] SD4 (Cleaning Web SD) Control ....... 2-K-4

ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION ............................ 2-L-1[1] Composition ....................................... 2-L-1[2] Mechanisms ....................................... 2-L-2[3] Paper Exit/ADU Conveyance

Switching Control ............................... 2-L-2[4] ADU Conveyance Control .................. 2-L-3

OTHER CONTROLS......................................... 2-M-1[1] Parts Energized When the Main Power

Switch is OFF .................................... 2-M-1[2] Components Operated by Power

Switches SW1 and SW2 ................... 2-M-1[3] Fan Control ........................................ 2-M-2[4] Operation Unit Control ...................... 2-M-4[5] Counter Control ................................. 2-M-5[6] Option Control ................................... 2-M-6

3. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLYEXTERNAL SECTION ....................................... 3-A-1

[1] Replacing the Ozone Filter ................ 3-A-1

CONTENTS

iv

[2] Replacing the Filter Cover Assembly andSuction Filter/A (Other Than 7020/25/30)............................................................ 3-A-2

DRIVE SECTION ............................................... 3-B-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Motor

Units (Main, Paper Feed, Developing)3-B-1[2] Replacing the Registration Clutch ...... 3-B-2[3] Replacing the Loop Clutch ................. 3-B-3[4] Removing the Ribbon Cable

(Other than 7135) ............................... 3-B-4[5] Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable

(Other Than 7135) ............................. 3-B-4[6] Removing the Ribbon Cable

(7135 Only) ........................................ 3-B-5[7] Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable

(7135 Only) ........................................ 3-B-5READ SECTION ................................................ 3-C-1

[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed .. 3-C-1[2] Removing the Original Glass ............. 3-C-1[3] Removing and Reinstalling the CCD Unit 3-C-2[4] Replacing the Exposure Lamp ........... 3-C-3[5] Removing and Reinstalling the

Exposure Unit ..................................... 3-C-4[6] Removing and Reinstalling the

Optics Drive Motor ............................. 3-C-5[7] Removing the Optics Wire ................. 3-C-5[8] Installing the Optics Wire ................... 3-C-6

WRITE UNIT ...................................................... 3-D-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Write Unit 3-D-1

DRUM UNIT ....................................................... 3-E-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Drum Unit ........................................... 3-E-1[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Drum 3-E-1[3] Removing and Reinstalling the

Separation Claw ................................. 3-E-3CORONA UNIT SECTION ................................. 3-F-1

[1] Removing and Reinstalling theCharging Corona Unit ........................ 3-F-1

[2] Removing and Reinstalling the ChargeControl Plate ....................................... 3-F-1

[3] Replacing the charging wire ............... 3-F-2[4] Removing and Reinstalling the

Transfer and Separation Corona Unit 3-F-2[5] Replacing the Transfer and Separation

Wires .................................................. 3-F-3DEVELOPING UNIT ..........................................3-G-1

[1] Screws That Must not be Removed ..3-G-1[2] Removing and Reinstalling the

Developing Unit .................................. 3-G-1[3] Replacing the Developer ....................3-G-2

TONER SUPPLY UNIT ...................................... 3-H-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner

Bottle .................................................. 3-H-1[2] Removing and Reinstalling the Toner

Supply Unit ......................................... 3-H-1

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT................. 3-I-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Cleaning Blade .................................... 3-I-1PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................ 3-J-1

[1] Replacing the Bypass PickupRoller/Bypass Conveyance Roller ...... 3-J-1

[2] Replacing the Bypass Reversal Roller 3-J-2[3] Replacing the Feed Rubber and the

Double Feed Prevention Upper Rubber(Upper Tray) ........................................ 3-J-2

[4] Replacing the Double Feed PreventionLower Rubber (Upper Tray) ................ 3-J-3

[5] Replacing the Feed Rubber and DoubleFeed Prevention Upper Rubber (LowerTray) ..................................................... 3-J-4

[6] Replacing the Double Feed PreventionLower Rubber (Lower Tray) ................ 3-J-6

[7] Replacing the Registration Rollers1 and 2 ................................................. 3-J-6

[8] Cleaning the Paper Dust RemovingBrush .................................................... 3-J-7

FIXING UNIT ...................................................... 3-K-1[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Fixing Unit .......................................... 3-K-1[2] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps

(Main Lamp and Sub Lamp) .............. 3-K-1[3] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing

Claw .................................................... 3-K-2[4] Replacing the Fixing Web/Fixing Cleaning

Roller .................................................. 3-K-3[5] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing

Heat Roller/Fixing Pressure Roller ..... 3-K-4[6] Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing

Temperature Sensors ........................ 3-K-5[7] Removing and Reinstalling the Fuse

Mounting Plate assembly ................... 3-K-5ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION ............................ 3-L-1

[1] Removing and Reinstalling the ExitSensor Unit (7020/25/30/35 Only) ..... 3-L-1

CONTENTS

v

4. AdjustmentHOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION ..... 4-1

[1] Construction ........................................... 4-1ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS...... 4-1LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS ............................ 4-2MODE CHANGE MENU ........................................ 4-3

[1] Setting Method ....................................... 4-3CHECK OF COUNT VALUE WITH P FUNCTION .... 4-4

[1] How to Use P Function .......................... 4-425 MODE ............................................................... 4-5

[1] Setting Method ....................................... 4-6[2] Setting Software DIP SW ....................... 4-6[3] PM Count Setting ................................. 4-20[4] Data Collection ..................................... 4-21[5] Copy Count for Each Part to be

Replaced .................................................. 4-27[6] Password Setting ................................. 4-31[7] Setting Phone Number of the Service

Center ................................................... 4-32[8] Setting the Serial Number .................... 4-33[9] Displaying the ROM Version ................ 4-34[10] KRDS Setting ....................................... 4-34[11] ISW Setting .......................................... 4-34[12] Root counter display ............................ 4-34[13] Setting Date ......................................... 4-34[14] Counter Clear

(Other Than 7020/25/30/35) ................ 4-3436 MODE ............................................................. 4-35

[1] Setting Method ..................................... 4-39[2] High Voltage Adjustment ..................... 4-39[3] Timing Adjustment ............................... 4-40[4] Running Test Mode .............................. 4-51[5] Test Pattern Output ............................. 4-52[6] Test Pattern Density Adjustment ......... 4-56[7] Image Quality Adjustment .................... 4-56[8] List Print ............................................... 4-58[9] Counter Clear ....................................... 4-59[10] Adjustment of RADF ............................ 4-60[11] FNS Adjustment ................................... 4-64

47 MODE ............................................................. 4-79[1] 47 Mode Setting Method ...................... 4-79[2] Initial Setting in the Field ...................... 4-80[3] RADF Original Size Detection

Adjustment .............................................. 4-80[4] ERDH Memory Check .......................... 4-81[4-1] Bypass Size Detection Adjustment ......... 4-81[5] Input Check List ................................... 4-82[6] Output Check List ................................ 4-85

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS ..................................... 4-90[1] RADF Mounting Position Adjustment .. 4-90[2] RADF Distortion Adjustment ................ 4-90[3] RADF Original Skew Adjustment ......... 4-91[4] DB-409/410 Paper centering

Adjustment ........................................... 4-91[5] DB-409/410 Tray Tilt Adjustment ......... 4-92

5. ISWISW......................................................................... 5-1

[1] Description of the ISW ........................... 5-1[2] Operating Method .................................. 5-1

6. KRDSKRDS ..................................................................... 6-1

[1] Outline .................................................... 6-1[2] Specifications ......................................... 6-1[3] KRDS Setting ......................................... 6-1[4] KRDS Set Up ......................................... 6-2[5] Calling Time Set Menu Mode (Arbitrary) . 6-13[6] KRDS Host Call .................................... 6-16[7] Data to be Processed .......................... 6-17[8] FAX KRDS Auto ON Function ............. 6-17[9] A Point to Notice for Operation ............ 6-17[10] ASCII Code Table ................................ 6-18[11] Error Code Table .................................. 6-19

7. SERVICESERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................... 7-1

[1] Service Schedule ................................... 7-1[2] Maintenance Items ................................. 7-2[3] Periodic Check Items (Main Body) ........ 7-5[4] Periodic Check Items (Options) ............. 7-7[5] List of Actual Durable Counters for

Replacement Parts ................................. 7-8[6] Important Maintenance Parts ................ 7-9

COPY MATERIALS.............................................. 7-10[1] PM Parts Kit ......................................... 7-10[2] Consumables (Single Unit Supply) ...... 7-11

SERVICE MATERIALS LIST ............................... 7-12[1] Maintenance Kit Composition .............. 7-12

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST ........................................ 7-13

8. DiagramsMAIN BODY ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUTDRAWING .............................................................. 8-1

[1] Switches and Sensors ............................ 8-1[2] Loads ...................................................... 8-4[3] PCBs and Others ................................... 8-7

DF-314 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUTDRAWING .............................................................. 8-9FS-107 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUTDRAWING ............................................................ 8-10DB-209/210 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUTDRAWING ............................................................ 8-12DB-409/410 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUTDRAWING ............................................................ 8-13IT-101 ELECTRICAL PARTS/CONNECTORLAYOUT DRAWING ............................................. 8-14MAIN BODY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .. 8-15DF-314 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ....... 8-22

CONTENTS

vi

FS-107 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ....... 8-23DB-209/210 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ... 8-25DB-409/410 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ... 8-26LIST OF JAM CODES ......................................... 8-27LIST OF WARNING (ERROR) CODES .............. 8-317020 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES,FEED FROM TRAY 1) ......................................... 8-447030 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES,FEED FROM TRAY 1) ......................................... 8-457035 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES,FEED FROM TRAY 1) ......................................... 8-467020ADU TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE,3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1) ...................... 8-477035ADU TIME CHART (A4, LIFE SIZE,3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1) ...................... 8-48DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SINGLE SIDEORIGINAL, 3 SHEETS) ....................................... 8-497035/DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SINGLESIDE ORIGINAL, 3 SHEETS) .............................. 8-50DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, DOUBLE SIDEORIGINALS, 2 SHEETS) ..................................... 8-517035/DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, DOUBLE SIDE ORIGINALS, 2 SHEETS) .................................... 8-52FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SORT MODE,2 SHEETS, 2 SETS) ............................................ 8-537035/FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SORT MODE,2 SHEETS, 2 SETS) ............................................ 8-54FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, STAPLE MODE,2 SHEETS, 1 POSITION) .................................... 8-557035/FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, STAPLEMODE, 2 SHEETS, 1 POSITION) ....................... 8-56DB-209/DB409 TIME CHART (8,5X11, LIFE SIZE,3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 3) ...................... 8-577020 SERIES WIRING DIAGRAM ...................... 8-59DF-314 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ............... 8-63FS-107 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ............... 8-64DB-209/210/DB-409/410 OVERALL WIRINGDIAGRAM ............................................................ 8-65

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

vii

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMSRead carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing servicework.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to thecopier, Konica Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Konica-trained servicetechnicians.Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Handbook was printed.Accordingly, Konica Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained inthis Service Handbook is complete and accurate.The user of this Service Handbook must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier whileservicing the copier for which this Service Handbook is intended.Therefore, this Service Handbook must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technicaltraining and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.Keep this Service Handbook also for future service.When it is impossible to read the description about safety and warning (due to contamination or tear), the relevantpage should be replaced.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING ANDCAUTION

In this Service Handbook, each of three expressions, “ DANGER,” “ WARNING,” and “ CAUTION” isdefined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

DANGER : Actions having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING : Actions having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION : Actions having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, andproperty damage

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

: Precaution when using the copier.

: Prohibition when using the copier.

: Direction when using the copier.

General precaution Electric hazard High temperature

General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth


viii

SAFETY WARNINGS

[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICAKonica copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solidservice network.Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have

to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorizedmodifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictlyprohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by Konica.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Konica. Safety will not beassured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips,solder or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will notbe assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Konica

• Using parts not specified by Konica


ix

kw

[2] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICEKonica copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to

protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, anyelectrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CEmust perform regular safety checks.

1. Power Supply

WARNING: Wall Outlet

• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into thededicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum powerconsumption.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total loadmust not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, andthe risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath isdamaged.

If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new powercord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Konica. Using the damagedpower cord may result in fire or electric shock.

• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sureto observe the following precautions:a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket

on the rear panel of the copier.Secure the cord with a fixture properly.

b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord(with plugs on both ends) specified by Konica.If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, acontact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, andrisk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table andso on.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.


x

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may resultin fire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

WARNING: Wiring

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the sameoutlet.

If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too longextension cord may result in fire.Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire mayresult.

WARNING: Ground Lead

• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may sufferelectric shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead toone of the following points:a. Ground terminal of wall outletb. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done


xi

WARNING: Ground Lead

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the pointslisted below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the

case of lightning.)d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)

2.Installation Requirements

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains orvolatile materials that may catch fire.

A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays,etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord.

Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heatsource such as a heater.

A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:Temperature: 10°C to 30°CHumidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)Avoid other environments as much as possible.

CAUTION: Ventilation

• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarettesmoke, or ammonia gas.

Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problemsand image faults.


xii

CAUTION: Ventilation

• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient tobe harmful to the human body.

If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated roomb. When taking a lot of copiesc. When using multiple copiers at the same time

CAUTION: Vibration

• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sureto install the copier in a level and sturdy place.

Constant vibration will cause problems.

• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading toa injury.

CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (servicehandbook, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspectionfollowing the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do notmake any adjustment not described in the documentation.

If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break anda risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugsfrom the copier and options.

When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are stillpowered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electricshock exists.

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.You may get burnt.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operationcheck with the copier powered.

If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the externalcover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may becaught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.


xiii

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.The user or CE may be injured.

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into thecopier.

They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts andelectrode units such as a charging corona unit.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration andsign of leakage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser,make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with thewrite unit shifted from the specified mounting position.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium batteryspecified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium batteryusing the method specified by local authority.

Improper replacement can cause explosion.


xiv

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp andfixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.


• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whetherthe interlock functions properly.

If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock orbe injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearingpaper jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, orother pointed parts.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that wereremoved for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in theoriginal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinchedcables, forgotten screws, etc.)

A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

DANGER: Handling of Service Materials

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) arehighly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnantson the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.


• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill anyliquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.


• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.


xv

DANGER: Handling of Service Materials

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be takennot to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contactwith eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.

If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.You may be burned due to dust explosion.

[3] MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to

provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly andKonica Corporation must be notified.

3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in

accordance with instructions issued by Konica Corporation.4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident Report/

Follow-up Procedures."

[4] CONCLUSION1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore, safety

can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer.2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the

safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.


xvi

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implementedregulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for productsmarketed in the United States.

This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the RadiationControl for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined withinprotective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal useroperation.


xvii

SAFETY CIRCUITS

This machine is provided with the following safetycircuits to prevent machine faults from resulting inserious accidents.

[1] Overall safety circuit[2] L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamps) overheating

prevention circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide theservice engineer with a renewed awareness of them inorder to prevent servicing errors that may impair their

functions.

[1] Overall safety circuit protector

NF

CBR1

CBR2

1. Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuitbreakers)CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneouslywhen an excessive current flows due to a short in theAC line.

CAUTION:The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not bedeactivated under any circumstances.

[2] Protection by L2 and L3 (fixing heaterlamps) overheating prevention circuit

DCPS

PRDB

L3

L2AC driversection

RL1

Controlsection

TH

1T

H2

RL1 TS

1. Protection by softwareThe output voltage from TH1 and TH2 (fixingtemperature sensors 1 and 2) is read by the CPU. If

this voltage is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater lamp 1), L3(fixing heater lamp 2) and RL1 (main relay) areturned OFF.

CAUTION:Do not change the gap between the rollerand TH1, between the roller and TH2. Whenreplacing TH1, check the specified mountingdimensions. The RL1 function must not bedeactivated under any circumstances.


xviii

2. Protection by the hardware circuitThe output voltages from TH1 and TH2 (fixingtemperature sensors) are compared with the

abnormality judgment reference value in thecomparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1 orTH2 exceeds the reference value, L2 (fixing heater

lamp 1), L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) and RL1 (mainrelay) are turned OFF in hardware means.

CAUTION:Periodically check the TH1 and TH2 facecontacting the roller, and replace TH1 andTH2 if any abnormality is detected.Since TH1 and TH2 face does not contactthe roller, check the distance from the rollerand the sensor orientation if any abnormalityis detected.The RL1 function must not be deactivatedunder any circumstances.

3. Protection by TS (thermostat)When the temperature of the upper fixing roller

exceeds the specified value, TS are turned OFF, thusinterrupting the power to L2 (fixing heater lamp 1)and L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) directly.

CAUTION:Do not use any other electrical conductor inplace of TS. Do not change the distancebetween the roller and TS (thermostat).


xix

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electricshock.

CAUTION:

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourselfaway from.Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot beread, contact our Service Office.

DB-209/210 DB-409/410

WARNINGThis area generates high voltage. If touched, electrical shock may occur. DO NOT TOUCH!

CAUTIONThe fixing unit is very hot.To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH.

CAUTIONThis area is very hot.To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH.

Caution: The internal heater of the 7022/7130 is an option, so this label isnot provided.


xx

CAUTION:

You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourselfaway from.Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot beread, contact our Service Office.

LIST OF DIFFERENCE

xxi

7020 SERIES LIST OF DIFFERENCE4

Cla

ssif

icat

ion

Specification ControlRead section

Write section

Toner supply section

Fixing section

Electricalsection

Externalsection

With

in 3

0 se

cond

sA

pplo

x. 5

sec

onds

20 c

opie

s28

8 M

BC

orre

spon

d1,

200,

000

Cop

ies

or 5

yea

rs

Com

mon

to 7

020/

25/3

0

Com

mon

to 7

020/

7022

/702

5/70

30/7

130/

7035

/713

5N

o

140m

m/s

ec

241m

m/s

ec

3307

0.9r

pm

Tone

r sup

ply

mot

or 1

sw

itche

d ac

ross

to th

e to

ner c

onve

yanc

e dr

ive w

ith to

nor b

ottle

SD

6 pi

eces

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Exc

lusi

vely

for

7020

Spe

cific

atio

nC

hang

e

CP

Mch

ange

Spe

cific

atio

nch

ange

22 c

opie

s

Comm

on to

7022

/7130

/7135

Yes

Drive

n in

depe

nden

tlywi

th to

ner s

uppl

y m

otor

1 a

nd to

ner

supp

ly m

otor

24

piec

es

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

(Trea

ted as

spare

parts

)

Excl

usiv

ely

for 7

022

25 c

opie

s

Com

mon

to 7

020/

25/3

0

No

Tone

r sup

ply

mot

or 1

swi

tche

d ac

ross

to th

e to

ner c

onve

yanc

e dr

ive w

ith to

nor b

ottle

SD

6 pi

eces

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

025

30 c

opie

s

Yes

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

030

Comm

on to

7022

/7130

/7135

Yes

Drive

n in

depe

nden

tly w

ith to

ner s

uppl

y m

otor

1 a

nd to

ner s

uppl

y m

otor

2

4 pi

eces

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

(Trea

ted as

spare

parts

)

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

130

With

in 4

5 se

cond

sA

pplo

x. 4

.2 s

econ

ds

35 c

opie

s

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

035

180m

m/s

ec

310m

m/s

ec

4251

9.6r

pm

6 pi

eces

Yes

Yes

Yes

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

035

Comm

on to

7022

/7130

/7135

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

135

Rea

son

7020

7025

7030

7130

7035

7135

7022

War

m-u

p tim

eF

irst c

opy

out t

ime

(A4)

Cont

inuou

s cop

y spe

ed(A

4)M

axim

um E

-RDH

mem

ory

ADU

Mac

hine

Ser

vice

life

To

ner

D

evel

oper

D

rum

Suc

tion

filte

r/A

Filt

er c

over

ass

embl

y

Fow

ard

(L

ife s

ize)

R

ever

se

(Max

)P

olyg

on m

otor

rota

tiona

l spe

ed

Tone

r co

nvey

ance

/sup

ply

driv

e

Fix

ing

claw

Interm

ediat

e con

veya

nce s

enso

rTo

ner

bottl

e so

leno

idTo

ner

supp

ly m

otor

2D

evel

opin

g su

ctio

n fa

nA

PS

sen

sor

1P

aper

exi

t sen

sor

PT

C h

eart

erO

vera

ll co

ntro

lIm

age

cont

rol

Mat

e-ria

ls

Scan

Spee

d

Exc

lusi

vely

for 7

135

no

LIST OF DIFFERENCE

xxii

Op

tio

n

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

7020

7022

7025

7030

7130

7035

7135

RA

DF

[ D

F-3

14 ]

Fin

ishe

r [ F

S-1

07 ]

Fin

ishe

r tr

ays

[ FT-

107]

Inne

r tr

ay [

IT-1

01]

Pla

ten

cove

r [ C

V-1

09 ]

Ped

esta

l [ D

K-1

09 ]

DB

-209

/409

DB

-210

/410

Key

cou

nter

Tota

l cou

nter

Prin

ter

cont

rolle

r [ I

P-0

11 ]

Net

wor

k bo

ard

[ KN

-304

]

E

xpan

sion

mem

ory

[ MU

-403

: 32

MB

]

[ MU

-404

: 64

MB

]P

rinte

r co

ntro

ller

[ IP

-421

]

N

etw

ork

boar

d [ K

N-3

03 ]

Har

d di

sk [

HD

-103

]

E

xpan

sion

mem

ory

[ MU

-403

: 32

MB

]

[ MU

-404

: 64

MB

]

[ MU-

405

: 128

MB

]

P

osts

crip

t [ P

S-3

41 ]

Prin

ter

cont

rolle

r [ I

P-4

22 ]

Har

d di

sk [

Fie

ld o

ptio

n ]

Exp

ansi

on m

emor

y [ M

U-4

11 :

64M

B ]

Pos

tscr

ipt [

PS

-343

]P

rinte

r co

ntro

ller

[ IP

-423

]

H

ard

disk

[ F

ield

opt

ion

]

E

xpan

sion

mem

ory[

MU

-404

: 64

MB

]

[ MU-

405

: 128

MB

]

P

osts

crip

t [ P

S-3

45 ]

FAX

con

trol

boa

rd

F

K-1

01

F

K-1

02

F

L-10

2E-

RDH/

FAX

expa

nsion

mem

ory [

MU

-403

: 32

MB]

[ M

U-4

04 :

64M

B]

[

MU

-405

: 12

8MB]

Not

cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

Cor

resp

ond

Not

cor

resp

ond

LIST OF OPTIONS THAT CAN BE USED WITH THE 7020 SERIES4

MU

-413

: 25

6MB

/ Not

cor

resp

ond

/

Cor

resp

ond

/

Not

cor

resp

ond

/ C

orre

spon

d

/ N

ot c

orre

spon

d

/ Cor

resp

ond

7020 Copier/Printer System Configurator

Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description Item Number

7020 Copier 950220 Toner 950236Platen Cover (CV-109) 950233 Developer * 950237RADF (DF-314) 950234 Drum Unit * 950253Finisher (FS-107) (2-bin) 950222 Staples FS-107 950764

Optional Finisher Output Tray (FT-107) 950226Drawer Base w/ PFU (DB-210) 950351 * Supplied with copier

Drawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) (1,500) 950352Plain Base 950225Fax Kit (FK-101) 950227 Maintenance Kit 950239

Windows Print Controller (IP-011) 950228 Fixing Heat Roller Fixing Cleaning RollerEthernet Network Card (KN-304) 1 950235 Fixing Pressure Roller Memory 32 MB (MU-403) 2, 3 950217 Fixing Web Memory 64 MB (MU-404) 2, 3 950218 Heat Insulating Sleeve A Memory 128 MB (MU-405) 3 950219 Heat Insulating Sleeve B

IP-421 Print Controller 950229Ethernet Network Card KN-3034 950230 Power Requirements:

Hard Disk Drive (HD-103) w/Scanning 4 950231 NEMA-6-15R

Post Script Kit (PS-341) 4, 5 950232

Internal Exit Tray (IT-101) 2 Trays 950255 115V/60Hz (15 AMP Outlet)

Dedicated Line Advised1 For IP-011 only2 Memory for IP-011 print controller 3 Memory for ERDH (copier engine) and IP-421 print controller Revised 12/18/014 For IP-421 only5 Post Script requires Hard Drive (HD-103), and additional 32MB memory (MU-403)

Note: Post Script Kit PS-341 available 4th quarter.


Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description Item Number

7025 Copier 950250 Toner 950236Platen Cover (CV-109) 950233 Developer * 950237RADF (DF-314) 950234 Drum Unit * 950253Finisher (FS-107) (2-bin) 950222 Staples FS-107 950764

Optional Finisher Output Tray (FT-107) 950226Drawer Base w/PFU (DB-210) 950351 * Supplied with copier

Drawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) (1,500) 950352Plain Base 950225Fax Kit (FK-101) 950227 Maintenance Kit 950239

Windows Print Controller (IP-011) 950228 Fixing Heat Roller Fixing Cleaning RollerEthernet Network Card (KN-304) 1 950235 Fixing Pressure Roller Memory 32 MB (MU-403) 2, 3 950217 Fixing Web Memory 64 MB (MU-404) 2, 3 950218 Heat Insulating Sleeve AMemory 128 MB (MU-405) 3 950219 Heat Insulating Sleeve B

IP-421 Print Controller 950229Ethernet Network Card KN-3034 950230 Power Requirements:

Hard Disk Drive (HD-103) w/Scanning 4 950231 NEMA-6-15R

Post Script Kit (PS-341) 4, 5 950232 115V/60Hz (15 AMP Outlet)

Internal Exit Tray (IT-101) 2 Trays 950255 Dedicated Line Advised

1 For IP-011 only2 Memory for IP-011 print controller 3 Memory for ERDH (copier engine) and IP-421 print controller Revised 12/18/014 For IP-421 only5 Post Script requires Hard Drive (HD-103), and additional 32MB memory (MU-403)



Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description

7030 Copier 950300 TonerPlaten Cover (CV-109) 950233 Developer *RADF (DF-314) 950234 Drum Unit *Finisher (FS-107) (2-bin) 950222 Staples FS-107

Finisher Output Tray for FS-107(FT-107) 950226Drawer Base w/PFU (DB-210) 950351 * Supplied with copierDrawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) (1,500) 950352Plain Base 950225Fax Kit (FK-101) 950227 Maintenance Kit 950239

Windows Print Controller (IP-011) 950228 Fixing Heat Roller Fixing Cleaning RollerEthernet Network Card (KN-304) 1 950235 Fixing Pressure Roller Memory 32 MB (MU-403) 2, 3 950217 Fixing Web Memory 64 MB (MU-404) 2, 3 950218 Heat Insulating Sleeve A Memory 128 MB (MU-405) 3 950219 Heat Insulating Sleeve B

IP-421 Print Controller 950229Ethernet Network Card KN-303 4 950230Hard Disk Drive (HD-103) w/Scanning 4 950231Post Script Kit (PS-341) 4, 5 950232Internal Exit tray (IT-101) 2 Trays 950255

Power Requirements:1 For IP-011 only NEMA-5-20R2 Memory for IP-011 print controller 115V/60Hz (15 AMP Outlet)3 Memory for ERDH (copier engine) and IP-421 print controller Dedicated Line Advised4 For IP-421 only5 Post Script requires Hard Drive (HD-103), and additional 32MB memory (MU-403)

Revised 12/18/01


950764

Item Number

950236950237950253


Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description

7035 Copier 950350 TonerPlaten Cover (CV-109) 950233 Developer *RADF (DF-314) 950234 Drum Unit *Finisher (FS-107) (2-bin) 950222 Staples FS-107

Finisher Output Tray for FS-107(FT-107) 9502262 Trays * Supplied with copierDrawer Base (DB-210) (2x500 PFU) 950351Drawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) (1,500) 950352Plain Base 950225 Maintenance Kit 950353

Internal Exit Tray (IT-101) 2 Trays 950255 Fixing Heater Roller Fixing Cleaning RollerFax Kit (FK-101) 950227 Fixing Pressure RollerWindows Print Controller (IP-011) 950228 Fixing Web Ethernet Network Card (KN-304) 1 950235 Heating Insulating Sleeve/A Memory 32 MB (MU-403) 2, 3

950217 Heating Insulating Sleeve/B

Memory 64 MB (MU-404) 2, 3 950218Memory 128 MB (MU-405) 3 950219IP-421 Print Controller 950229

Ethernet Network Card KN-303 4 950230

Hard Disk Drive (HD-103) w/Scanning 4 950231 Power Requirements:

Post Script Kit (PS-341) 4, 5950232 NEMA-5-20R

115V/60Hz (15 AMP Outlet)1 For IP-011 only Dedicated Line Advised2 Memory for IP-011 print controller3 Memory for ERDH (copier engine) and IP-421 print controller 4 For IP-421 only 3/7/015 Post Script requires Hard Drive (HD-103), and additional 32MB memory (MU-403)

950764

Item Number

950251950252950253

7022 & 7130 Copier/Printer System Configurator

Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description Item Number7022 Copier 950240 Toner 9502467130 Copier 950241 Developer 5 950254Platen Cover (CV-109) 950233 Drum 5 950253RADF (DF-314) 950234 Staples FS-107 950764Finisher (FS-107) 950222Optional Finisher Output Tray (FT-107)8 950226Internal Exit Tray (IT-101) 950255Drawer Base w/PFU (DB-210) 950351Drawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) 950352 Maintenance Kit 950256Plain Base 950225 Fixing Heat Roller Memory 256 MB (MU-413) 1 950257 Fixing Pressure Roller IP-422 Print Controller6 950242 Heat Insulation Sleeve/A PS Kit (PS-343) 950243 Heat Insulation Sleeve/BMemory 64 MB (MU-411) 2 9502492 GB Hard Disk Drive (HD-107) 3 950258Fax Kit (FK-102) 950244Dual Fax Line Option (FL-102)7 950245Windows Print Controller IP-011 950228Ethernet Network I/F Card (KN-304)4 9502351 Memory for ERDH Power Requirements: 120 V AC - ±10%2 Memory for Print Controller3 Required for Scanning, and 64MB memory upgrade (MU-411) is recommended.4 For IP-0115 Supplied with copier6 Network Card is standard 7 Available late 2nd Quarter 2-Apr-028 Up to 2 can be added


Machine and Accessories SuppliesItem Description Item Number Item Description Item Number7135 Copier 950360 Toner 950367Platen Cover (CV-109) 950233 Developer 4 950254RADF (DF-314) 950234 Drum 4 950253Finisher (FS-107) 950222 Staples FS-107 950764Optional Finisher Output Tray (FT-107)6 950226Internal Exit Tray (IT-101) 950255 Maintenance Kit 950368Drawer Base w/PFU (DB-210) 950351 Fixing Heat Roller Drawer Base w/LCT (DB-410) 950352 Fixing Pressure Roller Plain Base 950225 Heat Insulation Sleeve/A Memory 256 MB (MU-413) 1 950257 Heat Insulation Sleeve/BIP-423 Print Controller 5 950365PS Kit (PS-345) 950366Memory 64 MB (MU-404) 2 950218 Service PartsMemory 128 MB (MU-405) 2 950219 Standard Receptacle Wire Adapter

2 GB Hard Disk Drive (HD-107) 3 950258 Part No Part No Part NoFax Kit (FK-102) 950244 U181-1010 U021-0020 1206K0010Dual Fax Line Option (FL-102) 950245

1 Memory for ERDH2 Memory for Print Controller Power Requirements: 120 V AC - ±10%3 Required for Scanning, and 64MB memory upgrade (MU-411) is recommended.4 Supplied with copier5 Network Card is standard6 Up to 2 can be added

26-Sep-02

OUTLINE

1

1-1

OUTLINE OF SYSTEM

OUTLINE OF SYSTEMRADF [DF-314]

Finisher [FS-107]

2-Tray DB [DB-209/210]*1 1-Tray LCT DB [DB-409/410]*1

E-RDH/FAX expansion memory [MU-403/404/405]

Fax control board[FK-101/102/FL-102]*2

Network board[KN-304]

Platen Cover [CV-109]

Total counter

Key counter

Finisher Trays [FT-107]

Pedestal [DK-109]

Main body

Front

Right Side Rear

Postscript [PS-341]

Inner Tray Unit [IT-101]

Printer controller [IP-011]


Expansion memory[MU-403/404]

Expansion memory[MU-403/404/405]Network board [KN-303]

Hard disk [HD-103]

4

*1 The DB-209 and DB-409 are not compatible with the 7022/7130/7035/7135. The DB-210 and DB-410 arecompatible with all models.

*2 The FK-101 is not compatible with the 7022/7130/7135. The FK-102 and FL-102 are compatible with allmodels.

Hard disk [Field option]


Postscript [PS-343]

Expansion memory[MU-411]


Hard disk [Field option]

Postscript [PS-345]Expansion memory

[MU-404/405]

1-2

7020 SERIES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

7020 SERIES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS1. Type

Type: Semi-console type

Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method

Original table method:

Fixed

Original alignment: Left rear standard

Photosensitive material:

OPC

Sensitizing method:

Laser writing

Paper feed trays: Two trays(500 sheets per tray; 22 lb.)

Multisheet bypass tray(50 sheets; 22 lb.)

DB-209/210 (Two trays; 500sheets/tray; 22 lb.)*

DB-409/410 (One tray; 1500sheets; 22 lb.)*

*Option

2. FunctionsOriginals: Sheets; book; solid object

Original size: A3, 11x17 maximum

Copy sizes: A3 to A5, 11x17 to 5.5x8.5

Tray1

Tray2

By-passtray

8.5 × 14, 8.5 × 11,8.5 × 11R, 5.5 × 8.5,F4, B4, A4, A4R,B5R, A5R11 × 17, 8.5 × 14, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, 5.5 × 8.5, A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, F411 × 17, 8.5 × 14, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, 5.5 × 8.5, A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, F4

B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, F4, 8.5 × 14, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, 5.5 × 8.5,A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 × 17, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, F4

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 × 17, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, F4

U.S.A. Europe and others

ADU usable paper size:

11 × 17, 8.5 × 14, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, 5.5 × 8.5, A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, F4

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 × 17, 8.5 × 11, 8.5 × 11R, F4

U.S.A. Europe and others

Magnification:

Fixed magnifications:

x0.50, x0.65, x0.77, x1.00,x1.29, x1.55, x2.00

Special ratio: Three kinds.

Zoom magnifications:

x0.25 to x4.00 (1% steps)

Vertical magnifications:

x0.25 to x4.00 (1% steps)

Horizontal magnifications:

x0.25 to x4.00 (1% steps)

Warmup time (at 68 F, at rated voltage):

Other than 7035/7135

Within 30 seconds

7035/7135 Within 45 seconds

First copy out time:


Approximately 5 seconds

7035/7135 Approximately 4.2 seconds

Continuous copy speed (life size copies/min):

7020 20copies/minute



7030/7130 30copies/minute

7035/7135 35copies/minute

Continuous copy count:

1 to 999

Copy density selections: manual (9 steps), AE

Arbitrary density (2 modes)

Resolution: 600 dpi x 600 dpi

ERDH memory: Standard 32 MB

Maximum 288 MB

3. Applicable Copy PaperPlain paper: 16 to 24 lb. high-quality

paper

Special paper: Label paper

(bypass feed only) OHP film

Blueprint master paper

Recycled paper

14 to 16 lb. high quality paper

24 to 36 lb. high quality paper

o

1-3


4. Options

Caution: For details of the correspondence between eachof the following options and the main body, refer

to the “LIST OF OPTIONS THAT CAN BE

USED WITH THE 7020 SERIES”.

RADF: DF-314

Finisher: FS-107

Drawer base unit: DB-209*/210 (2-tray)

DB-409*/410 (1-LCT)

*Not applicable to machinesother than the 7020/25/30.

Inner tray unit: IT-101

Finisher trays: FT-107

Install up to two trays into FS-107

Pedestal: DK-109

Platen cover: CV-109

Key counter

Total counter

Expansion memory unit:

For ERDH/FAX memory explanion

MU-403 : 32MB DIMM

MU-404 : 64MB DIMM

MU-405 : 128MB DIMM

Expansion memory for IP-011 printer

MU-403 : 32MB DIMM

MU-404 : 64MB DIMM


MU-403 : 32MB DIMM

MU-404 : 64MB DIMM

MU-405 : 128MB DIMM


MU-411 : 64MB DIMM


MU-404 : 64MB DIMM

MU-405 : 128MB DIMM

Printer controller: IP-011/421/422

Fax control board: FK-101/102

Network board: KN-303

Ethernet network for IP-421

Network board: KN-304

Ethernet network for IP-011

Hard disk: HD-103

Hard disk for the IP-421

Postscript: PS-341

PostScript for the IP-421

Postscript: PS-343


Postscript: PS-345


5. Machine DataPower supply: 120 VAC ±10% (for U.S.A.)

220 to 240 VAC 10%(for Europe)

Power consumption: Maximum 1170W

(only main body)

Weight: Approximately 158 lb.

Machine dimensions:

Width: 23.4 in.

Depth: 23.4 in.

Height: 32.7 in. (With DF)

6. MaintenancePeriodic maintenance: Per 100,000 copies

7. ConsumablesFor 7020/25/30

Developer: Exclusively for Konica 7020/25/30

Toner: Exclusively for Konica 7020/25/30

Drum: Exclusively for Konica 7020/25/30 (φ60)

For 7035

Developer: Exclusively for Konica 7035

Toner: Exclusively for Konica 7035

Drum (Note): Common to Konica 7020 (φ60)

For 7022/7130

Developer: Exclusively for Konica 7022/7130

Toner: Exclusively for Konica 7022/7130

Drum (Note): Common to 7020 (φ60)

Note: Common with the 7020/25/30. However,items which do not have 7022,7130,7035listed on the package box should not be used.

For 7135

Developer: Common to Konica 7022/7130

Toner: Exclusively for Konica 7135

Drum (Note): Common to Konica 7022/7130(φ60)

Note: Common with the 7020/25/30. However,items which do not have 7022,7130,7035listed on the package box should not be used.

1-4


8. Environmental ConditionsTemperature: 50 to 86 F

Humidity: 10 to 80% RH

Note: Specifications are subject to change withoutnotice.

o

1-5

CENTER CROSS SECTION

CENTER CROSS SECTION

Exposure unit

Fixing unit

Drum unit

Separationcorona unit

Transfercorona unit

Bypass unit

Upper tray

Lower tray

Developing unit

Image write unit

Cleaning/toner-recycling unit

Chargingcorona unit

ADU unit(ADU door)

Toner bottle

DB

Paper path when DB isinstalled.

V mirror unit CCD unit

1

Tray 3/tray 4 paperfeed path

Path of the paper formaking a two-sided copy

1-6

DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM1

OU

TL

INE

DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM[1] Main Drive

<Drum Drive>

< Fixing/Cleaning/IT-101 drive>

Developer agitationdrive

Paper exit drive

Main motor (M1)

Drum drive shaft

Main motor (M1)

Fixing unitdrive

Cleaning/toner-recycling unit drive

2

IT drive coupling

[IT-101]

1-7

DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

[2] Developing Drive

Developing unit

Developingmotor (M3)

Developingsleeve

Drum driveshaft

1

1-8


OU

TL

INE

[3] Paper Feed Drive

Paper feedmotor (M9)

SD1 (upper) driveswhen ON.

Loop clutch (MC2)

Paper feed SD(upper) (SD1)

Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch

Drive from loop clutcha. Upper tray drive

b. Lower tray drive

Loop roller (upper)

Loop clutch (MC2)

Loop clutch (MC2)

Paper feed solenoid (lower) (SD2)

SD2 (lower)drives whenON.

Loop roller(lower)

1

1-9


c. Bypass feed drive

Registration clutch drive

Driven by SD3 ON.

Bypasspaper feedSD (SD3) Loop roller (Bypass)

Loop clutch (MC2)

Paper feed motor (M9)

Registration clutch(MC1)

1

1-10


OU

TL

INE

[4] ADU Drive

ADU conveyance roller(Driven by M1)

ADU conveyance rollers(Driven by M9)

ADU motor (M6)

ADU roller

1

1-11


[5] Reading Drive

Exposure unit

Optics wire (rear)

Optical motor (M2)

Optics wire (front)

V mirror unit

2

Exposure unit

Optics wire (rear)

Optical motor (M2)

Optics wire (front)

V mirror unit

Old type

New type2

1-12


OU

TL

INE

[6] Toner Supply Drive

Toner supply motor 1 (M4)

Toner conveyance screw

Toner bottle SD (SD6)

Toner agitation plate

7020/25/30

Other than 7020/25/303




Toner agitation plate

UNIT EXPLANATION

2

EXTERNAL SECTION

2-A-1

EXTERNAL SECTION[1] Composition

Sub power switch(SW2)

Operation panel

Platen cover (Option)

Front door

Upper tray

Lower tray

Exit tray

By-pass tray

ADU door

KRDS interface (serial)

Rear cover

Main power switch(SW1)

ISW interface (parallel)3

EXTERNAL SECTION

2-A-2

Blank

DRIVE SECTION

2-B-1

DRIVE SECTION[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism MethodDrum, Conveyance, Gear drive (M1)Developer agitation, Fixing, and exit drive,ADU conveyance drive, IT conveyance/exitdrive (when installing IT)Developing sleeve drive Gear drive (M3)Paper feed drive, ADU Gear drive (M9)conveyance driveToner supply drive Gear drive (M4)Toner bottle rotation drive Gear drive (M10)(Other than 7020/25/30)ADU drive Gear drive (M6) *1

Developing motor (M3)

Main motor (M1)

Paper feed drivemotor (M9)

ADU motor (M6)


Toner supply motor 2 (M10)* Other than 7020/25/30

3

3

DRIVE SECTION

2-B-2

[3] M1 (Main Motor) Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M1

PS3

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

LOCK SIGM1 CLK

M1 CONT5VDCSGND

PRDB

SGNDPS3

5VDC

PS25VDC

PS2SGND

7020/25/30/35

M1 (main motor) is controlled by the PRDB (printer driveboard).

1. Operation

M1 is a brushless motor running on 24 VDC. It drivesthe 2nd paper feed, fixing, drum, toner conveyancescrew and toner recycle screw, and also drives partof the developer agitation screw, IT drive couplingand the ADU conveyance section.

When IT is installed, M1 drives IT conveyance sec-tion and also drives the paper exit section via the ITdrive coupling.

M1 includes an internal speed sensor, and utilizesPLL control to maintain constant speed. Rotationalspeed is controlled by a reference clock signal outputby PRDB.

M1 comes ON when the START button is pressed, andgoes OFF at a predetermined time interval after PS3(paper exit PS) (PS2 (fixing exit PS) in the case ofmachines other than 7020/25/30/35) goes OFF forthe final copy.

At warmup start, M1 comes ON. only during initialdrum charging.

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) LOCK SIG (M1 −> PRDB)

A monitoring signal for the rotation of M1.

Goes [L] when M1 rotation reaches the rated speed.

[H]: Stopped, or rotating at other than rated speed.

[L]: Rotating at rated speed. (PLL: stable)

(2) PS2 (PS2 −> PRDB)

Paper fixing unit exit passage detection signal

[H] when paper is detected.

(3) PS3 (PS3 −> PRDB)(Only for 7020/25/30/35)

Paper exit passage detect signal

b. Output signals

(1) M1 CONT (PRDB −> M1)

M1 drive control signal.

[L]: M1 ON

[H]: M1 OFF

(2) M1 CLK (PRDB −> M1)

Reference clock for M1 rotation control.

3

3

3

3

READ SECTION

2-C-1

READ SECTION[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Light source Xenon lamp

Exposure Light source slit exposure

Scanning * Platen original scanning: Movement of 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors.

RADF original scanning: Original is moved with light source held stationary.

Lamp power supply Lamp cord

* Platen and RADF scans operate as follows.

a. Platen original: The original is placed on the platenglass, and reading is accomplished by movementof the exposure unit and V mirror unit.

b. RADF original: The exposure unit and V mirror unitare shifted under slit glass, and the original isscanned as it passes over the exposure unit.

CCD unit (AD converterboard (ADB))

Scanner driveboard (SCDB)

APS sensors 1 and 2 *(PS17, PS18)

Exposure unit

Optics wires

V mirror unit

1st mirror

V mirror unit2nd mirror

3rd mirror

Platen originalSlit glass Exposure unit

CCD unitV mirror unit

RADF original

Home-positionsensor (PS14)

Exposure-lampinverter (INV1)

Optical motor (M2)

4 * : APS sensor 1 (PS17) is not installed on the 7022/7130/7135.

READ SECTION

2-C-2

[3] M2 (Optical Motor) Control

24VDC24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDPGND5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

M2

PS14

DCPS

UVW

SGNDOPT_HOME

5VDC

SCDB

M2 (optical motor) is controlled by the SCDB (scannerdrive board). A related signal is provided by PS14 (opticshome position PS).

1. Operation

a. Operation of M2

M2 is a 3 phase stepping motor running on 24VDC.This motor drives the exposure unit so as toimplement scanning. Forward rotation, reverserotation, and rotation speed are switched asnecessary to carry out each scan cycle.

The exposure unit's home position is detected byPS14. M2 operation (drive time span and drivedirection) is controlled by time count after PS14 ONor PS14 OFF.

b. Exposure unit’s scan speed

Scan Speed

Scan SpeedForward <Other than 7035/7135>

140mm/sec (1:1 magnification)<7035/7135>180mm/sec (1:1 magnification)

Reverse <Other than 7035/7135>241mm/sec (max)<7035/7135>310mm/sec (max)

c. Initial operation when power is turned ON

When SW2 (sub power switch) comes ON, theexposure unit starts a home position search. Thesearch procedure differs according to whether PS14is ON or OFF. Upon completing the search, theexposure unit stands by at the platen mode's APSreading position.

(1) When PS14 is turned ON

(2) When PS14 is goes OFF

d. Shading correction reading

Shading correction read out is implemented using thewhite reference plate attached beneath the glassstopper plate. Shading correction is executed whenSW2 comes ON.In the case of the 7035/7135, shading correction isperformed when SW2 is turned ON, and also duringeach scanning job.

e. Exposure scanning modes

Two modes are implemented: platen mode and DF mode.

In platen mode, the exposure unit moves as necessaryto scan the original. In DF mode, the RADF sidemoves the original while the exposure unit stays fixedin a specified position (the DF reading position).

Shading correctionreading

Reference pointPS14

Platen APSreading position

7020/25/30

Other than 7020/25/30Shading correctionreading

Reference point PS14



Reference pointPS14


7020/25/30



Reference pointPS14


4

4

READ SECTION

2-C-3

f. Operation in DF mode

The read position in the DF mode is on the paper exit sideof PS14, and the exposure unit moves from the standbyposition (platen APS read position) to the DF readposition. In the case of the 7035/7135, shadingcorrection takes place while the exposure unit is movingto the DF read position.

It then returns to the platen APS reading position aftercompleting the original scan and again enters standby.

g. Operation in platen mode

In this mode, the scan sequence depends on thecopy density selection (either AE or manual).

When the start button is pressed

When the AE mode is selected, the AE scan takesplace. When the AE mode is not selected, anexposure scan takes place immediately. In the caseof the 7035/7135, shading correction is performedbefore the commencement of scanning, for alloperations.After completing the scan, exposure unit turns to theplaten APS reading position.

(1) AE mode

(2) Manual copy mode

DF readingposition

Reference point PS14

AE scan

PS14

Exposure scan

Reference point



4

4


DF readingposition

Reference point

PS14


7035/7135

Shading correction reading


AE scan

PS14

Exposure scan

Referencepoint


7035/7135

Exposure scan

Reference point


PS14



Exposure scan

Referencepoint


PS147035/7135


4

4

4

READ SECTION

2-C-4

(4) Dual page (Manual mode, Left binding) mode(3) Dual page (AE mode, Left binding) mode

AE scan

Reference point


PS14

Exposure scan (Latter half)

Exposure scan (First half)

Reference point


PS14




AE scan

Referencepoint


PS14



7035/7135



Referencepoint


PS14



7035/7135


4 4

READ SECTION

2-C-5

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) OPT_HOME (PS14 −> SCDB)

Exposure unit's home position detect signal.

[L]: Exposure unit is in home position.

[H]: Exposure unit out of home position.

b. Output signal

(1) M2 U, V, W (SCDB −> M2)

M2 (Optical motor) ON/OFF drive signals.

0V

24V

[4] Exposure Control

24VDC24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDPGND5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

INV1 L1INVBSCDB

L1 EMPGND

LAMP_ON/OFF24VDC

LVHV

DCPS

L1

Power for L1 (exposure lamp) is supplied by INV1(exposure lamp inverter). This action is controlled by theSCDB (scanner drive board).

1. Operation

L1 is a xenon lamp, and is driven by an invertercircuit. Since the xenon lamp provides a stable lightintensity with low heat generation, it does not requirelight intensity control circuit or overheat protectioncircuit.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) L1 EM (INV1 −> SCDB)

1NV1 error detect signalEnabled only when LAMP_ON/OFF is ON [L].

[L]: L1 ON

[H]: L1 OFF

* L1 EM is always High when LAMP_ON/OFF is OFF [H].

b. Output signal

(1) LAMP_ON/OFF (SCDB −> INV1)

L1 ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: L1 ON

[H]: L1 OFF

2

2

READ SECTION

2-C-6

[5] Original Reading Control

SGNDYCK 1SGNDRCKSGNDYGSGNDCLAMPSGNDSCKSINSLDMD0MD1MD2SGNDOD0OD1OD2OD3SGNDOD4OD5OD6OD7SGNDED0ED1ED2ED3SGNDED4ED5ED6ED7APR12VDC12VDC12VDC12VDCSGND5VDC5VDC5VDC5VDCSGND-5VDC-5VDC-5VDC-5VDC

ADB

CCD

5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

12VDCSGND

-12VDCSGND

12VDC

DCPS CB

Original reading is carried out by the CCD sensor on theADB (A/D conversion board).

1. Operation

The light from the exposure lamp reflects back fromthe original, passes through a lens, and hits the CCDsensor. The CCD sensor generates an analogelectrical signal corresponding to the light intensity.The ADB (A/D conversion board) then converts thissignal into a digital signal.

a. Original reading

The reading timing is as follows.

(1) Platen mode

Reading starts at a predetermined time interval afterthe START button is pressed and when the exposureunit has moved 6mm in the paper feed direction afterPS14 (optics home position) goes OFF.

(2) DF mode

When the leading edge of the original turns ONPS311 (original registration PS) then moves a further24.1 mm.

1

READ SECTION

2-C-7

[6] APS Control

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS18

ADB

CCD

5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

12VDCSGND

-12VDCSGND

12VDC

5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

SGNDOPT_HOME

5VDC

SGNDTIMING 1

5VDC

SGNDAPS_DATA 1

5VDC

SGNDAPS_DATA 2

5VDCDCPS SCDB

CB

7020/25/30/35

APS detection is carried out at opening or closing of theRADF cover or original cover, and is controlled by theSCDB (scanner drive board) based on signals from theAPS sensors and CCD sensor. Related signals areprovided by PS14 (optics home position PS), PS15 (APStiming PS) and by PS304 (DF open/close PS) on theRADF.

1. Operation

a. APS detect operation

APS detection operation differs according to whetheroperation is in platen mode or DF mode.

(1) Platen mode

Caution : In the case of machines other than7020/25/30/35, the PS17 (APS sensor 1)is not installed.

Size is detected by the combination of the ON/OFFaction of PS17 and PS18 (APS sensor 2) and thedetect signal from the CCD sensor on the ADB (A/Dconversion board).

PS17 and PS18 detect the original size in the subscanning direction, while the CCD sensor detects thesize in the main scanning direction.

L1 is ON during APS detection, so that the illumina-tion level (light or dark level) in the main scanning dif-fers according to whether the original is present orabsent. To detect line width (main scanning width),the CCD sensor detects the difference from sky shotblack level to paper edge white level at each side. Ifthe RADF is installed, original size detection in themain scanning is reexecuted when PS304 (DF open/close PS) comes ON, so as to confirm the originalsize.

The two APS sensors (PS17 and PS18) each consistof a photosensor and a LED. If the original is presentat the sensor position, the light generated by the LEDreflects from the original and is detected by thephotosensor

(2) DF mode

Original size detection is carried out by ON/OFFaction of PS306 (original size detect PS 1), andPS307 (original size detect PS 2), and by theresistance level of VR301 (original size detect VR)located in the RADF paper feed tray.

: Photosensor : LED

Exitside

PS17 PS18

3

3

Exitside

7020/25/30/35

Other than 7020/25/30/35

3

PS18

READ SECTION

2-C-8

The following table shows the relation between thePS sensors and detected original sizes.

Sensor PS17

PS306

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

A3

11 × 17

B4

8.5 × 14

F4(8.5 × 13R)

8.5 × 11R

A4R

A4

8.5 × 11

B5

A5

B5R

A5R

B6R

ON : Original detected

OFF : Original not detected

PS18

PS307

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Original Size

Caution : In the case of machines other than the7020/25/30/35, read PS17 in the abovetable as PS18. Also, note that the ON/OFF operation due to PS18 in the tabledoes not take place.

b. APS detection timing

APS detection timing differs according to whetheroperation is in platen mode or DF mode.

(1) Platen mode

Detection is carried out when PS15 (APS timing PS)comes ON.

• If the RADF is installed, detection is carried outagain when PS304 (DF open/close PS) comesON.

• If the platen cover or RADF is open, detection iscarried out when the START button comes ON.

(2) DF mode

If DF mode has been selected or if an original is set inthe RADF paper feed tray, detection is carried outusing PS306 (original size detect PS 1), PS307(original size detect PS 2), and VR301 (original sizedetect VR).

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) TIMING1 (PS15 −> SCDB)

RADF cover or platen cover open/close detect signal.

[L]: ON (Execute APS)

[H]: OFF (Cancel APS)

(2) APS_DATA1 (PS17 −> SCDB)

(7020/25/30/35 only)

Original size detect signal.

[L]: Original detected.

[H]: Original not detected.

(3) ASP_DATA2 (PS18 −> SCDB)

Original size detect signal.

[L]: Original detected.

[H]: Original not detected.

3

3

READ SECTION

2-C-9

[7] AE Control

SGNDYCK 1SGNDRCKSGNDYGSGNDCLAMPSGNDSCKSINSLDMD0MD1MD2SGNDOD0OD1OD2OD3SGNDOD4OD5OD6OD7SGNDED0ED1ED2ED3SGNDED4ED5ED6ED7APR12VDC12VDC12VDC12VDCSGND5VDC5VDC5VDC5VDCSGND-5VDC-5VDC-5VDC-5VDC

ADB

CCD

5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

12VDCSGND

-12VDCSGND

12VDC

DCPS CB

During AE scan, the CCD sensor on the ADB (A/Dconversion board) reads the density level of the original.The CPU on the CB (overall control board) processes thedata and, based on the results, selects the gammacorrection curve that will best reproduce the original.

1. Operation

a. AE detect operation

(1) Platen copy

AE scanning is carried out when the START button ispressed. The operation measures density over therange described below.

<AE sampling range>

1) If the platen cover or RADF cover is open,sampling is carried out to the boundaries of thenon image area erase or within the area detectedby APS.

2) If the platen cover or RADF cover is closed,scanning is carried out over the range from thecenter to 20mm away from each edge of theoriginal, as detected by APS.

• If APS is unable to detect the size, sampling iscarried out up to 20mm short of the minimumsupported original size in each direction.

(2) DF mode (1-1)

Pressing the START button causes the original tofeed. The leading area of the original is read, anddensity is measured based on the read data. Thesampling range is as follows.

<AE sampling range>

1) In the main scanning direction

Sampling is carried out to the boundaries of thenon image area erase or within the area detectedby APS.

• Sampling is carried out over the range from thecenter to 20mm away from each edge of theoriginal, as detected by APS.

• If APS is unable to detect the size, scanning iscarried out up to 20mm short of the minimumsuppoted original size in each direction.

2) In the sub scanning direction

Sampling starts 1.5mm from the leading edge andends 2.9mm from the leading edge.

READ SECTION

2-C-10

Blank

WRITE UNIT

2-D-1

WRITE UNIT

[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Scan *

Rotational speed

Other than 7035/7135 : 33070.9 rpm

7035/7135 : 42519.6 rpm

Light source Laser diode

• Output: Max. 5mW

• Wavelength: 780nm

Positioning Index sensor

Polygon mirror

* : Path of laser light

The light output from semiconductor laser is radiatedonto the opc drum via the collimater lens, cylindricallens 1, polygon mirror, fθ lens, cylindrical lens 2.

Polygon motor

fθ lens

Index sensor board (INDEX)

Dust-proofglass

Cylindrical lens 2

Index mirror

Collimater lens unit

LD drive board (LDB)

Cylindrical lens 1

Polygon mirror

Cylindrical lens 1

Collimater lens unit

fθ lens

Dust-proof glassPolygon mirrorOPC drum

LD drive board(LDB)

Index mirrorCylindricallens 2

Dust-proof glass

Index sensorboard

fθ lens

Cylindrical lens 2

Index lens

Index lens

4

WRITE UNIT

2-D-2

2

1O

UT

LIN

E2

UN

IT E

XP

LA

NA

TIO

N3

DIS

./AS

SE

MB

LY

2

[3] M5 (Polygon Motor) Control

PGND24VDC

M5

DCPS

POLY LOCKPOLY CLK

POLY CONTPGND

24VDC

PRDB

M5 (polygon motor) is controlled by the PRDB (printerdrive board).

1. Operation

a. M5 is a brushless motor running on 24V DC

power. The motor turns the polygon mirror,

causing the laser beam from the LDB (LD drive

board) to scan along the drum shaft direction.

M5 includes an internal speed sensor, and uti-

lizes PLL control to maintain a constant speed.

b. M5 rotation speed is as follows.

Machine State Rotation Speed

Copying 33070.9 rpm (Other than 7035/7135)

42519.6 rpm (7035/7135)

Idling Any of the following three speeds

can be selected by using "25"

mode.


33070.9 rpm

16000 rpm*

Stop*

7035/7135

42519.6 rpm

25000 rpm*

* If one of these speeds has been selected, M5rotation speed will change at a specified timeupon completion of warm up or completion ofcopy processing. You can select this time period,using "25" mode, to any of the following: 15 sec,30 sec. 60 sec, 120 sec.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) POLY LOCK (M5 → PRDB)

M5 status detect signal.

[L] when M5 rotation reaches the rated speed.

b. Output signals

(1) POLY CONT (PRDB → M5)


[L]: M5 ON

[H]: M5 OFF

(2) POLY CLK (PRDB → M5)


4

WRITE UNIT

2-D-3

[4] Image Write Control

LDB

INDEX

5VDC5VDCSGNDSGND

12VDCSGNDSGND

12VDC

CCD

5VDCSGND

/S/H/ENB

/VIDEOSGND/ALM

NCDACLK

DILD

LDPR+5VDC

5VDCSGND

/INDSGND

INDPR+5VDC

DCPS

ADB

CB

The CCD sensor outputs analog image data. The ADB (A/D conversion board) converts this data to digital form. TheCB (overall control board) processes this data withinmemory, generating a laser recording signal. This signal istransmitted, by means of a CB control signal, to the LDB(LD drive board), and is output as an optical signal by theLDB's laser emitting element. The write start position forthe laser recording signal is detected by the index sensoron the index sensor board.

1. Operation

a. Image processing

The CB carries out the following processing.

(1) AOC (automatic offset correction)

Reading is taken with SW2 (sub power switch) ONand L1 (exposure lamp) OFF, and the analog offsetvoltage for CCD sencer output is automaticallyadjusted such that this level become the lower limitfor the A/D converter (In the case of the other than7035).In the case of the 7035, IC on ADB automaticallyadjusts analog off set voltage of CCD sensor output.

(2) AGC (automatic gain correction)

When SW2 comes ON, the level from the whitereference board is read by turning ON the L1(exposure lamp), and the analog amplification for theCCD sensor output is automatically adjusted suchthat this level becomes the upper limit for the A/Dconverter.

(3) Shading correction

Execution timing

White correction / Black correct

• At SW2 (sub power switch) ON

(4) Brightness/density conversion

(5) AE processing

(6) Text/dot pattern judgment

(7) Filtering

(8) Magnification change processing

(9) Error diffusion processing

(10) Data compression processing

(11) Write density correction

b. Write

CB transmits image data one pixel by one pixel to theLDB. The LDB emits the laser onto the drum incertain time for each pixel determined by the imagedata received from the CB.

(1) MPC (Maximum Power Control)

The CB informs LDB of the maximum laser outputvalue. The LDB keeps and uses this value in APC(automatic power control) to maintain the laserintensity.

<MPC Timing>

(1) After SW2 is set at ON when L detectionadjustment has been completed or the drumcounter has been reset.

(2) When SW is turn ON first thing in the morning.

(3) Every 20th copy during a continuous copyoperation.

(2) APC (Automatic Power Control)

After the CB has set the MPC, it outputs an APC startcommand to the LDB in accordance with the followingtiming.

<APC Timing>

At detection of M5 (polygon motor) PLL lock.Thereafter, LDB automatically monitors the laserdrive current for each line, and controls the laser suchthat the light intensity is always at MPC.

(3) Write timing

The index board's /IND signal determines the starttime for laser writing of each scan in the drum shaftdirection.

3

WRITE UNIT

2-D-4

2

1O

UT

LIN

E2

UN

IT E

XP

LA

NA

TIO

N3

DIS

./AS

SE

MB

LY

2

1O

UT

LIN

E2

UN

IT E

XP

LA

NA

TIO

N3

DIS

./AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) /IND (INDEX → CB)

Index signal for write system.

(2) INDPR + 5VDC (INDEX → CB)

INDEX board detect connection monitor signal.

[H]: Not present

[L]: Present

(3) /ALM (LDB → CB)

Indicates abnormality in laser drive current (APCoperation).

[H]: Normal

[L]: Abnormal

(4) LDPR + 5VDC (LDB → CB)

LDB connection monitoring signal.

[H]: Not present

[L]: Present

b. Output signals

(1) /VIDEO (CB → LDB)

Image signal for / VIDEO laser.

(2) DACLK (CB → LDB)

Clock signal used for transfer of MPC data.

(3) DI (CB → LDB)

MPC data signal.

(4) LD (CB → LDB)

MPC data memorize command signal.

(5) /S/H (CB → LDB)

APC sampling signal (for one line).

(6) /ENB (CB → LDB)

ON/OFF control signal for laser APC function. If OFF,laser output is stopped.

2

DRUM UNIT

2-E-1

DRUM UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Pedestal hold Fixed rail

PCL LED

Auxiliary separation Separation claws *

The drum unit is a single unit consisting of the drum, thecharging corona unit, the cleaning, toner recycle section,and the PCL.

Chargingcorona unit

Cleaning section

Drum

Separationclaws

PCL

Chargingcorona unit

Cleaning/Toner-recycle section

Drum

TSL

Separationcorona unit

Developing unit

Transfercorona unit

Paper entranceguide plate

Separationclaws

* : Operation of the separation claws

When SD7 (separation claw SD) is activated, the rodconnected to it moves such that the cutouts on therod allow the claws to fall into contact with the drumunder their own weight. The contact of the claws aidsin paper separation.

Rod

Separationclaws

Separationclaw SD (SD7)

1

1

DRUM UNIT

2-E-2

[3] PCL/TSL Control

PS3SGND

PS35VDC

7020/25/30/35

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDSGND5VDC

PCL24VDC

PCL CONT

TSL24VDC

TSL DRIVE

MC15VDC

MC1 DRIVE

PS1SGND

PS15VDC

DCPS PRDB

PS2SVDzzc

PS2SGND

The PCL (pre-charging lamp) and TSL (transfer synchro-nization lamp) are LED type lamps, and are controlled bythe PRDB.

1. Operation

PCL lights when the START button is pressed, andgoes OFF after the specified period from when PS3(paper exit PS) (or PS2 (fixing exit PS) for machinesother than the 7020/25/30/35) goes OFF (when thefinal sheet of copy paper is exited). TSL comes ON ata predetermined time interval after MC1 (registrationclutch) comes ON, and goes OFF at a predeterminedtime interval after PS1 (registration PS) goes OFF.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) PS1 (PS1 −> PRDB)

Detection of paper at paper feed temporary stopposition.

[H] when paper is detected.

b. Output signals

(1) PCL DRIVE (PRDB −> PCL)

PCL ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: PCL ON

[H]: PCL OFF

(2) TSL DRIVE (PRDB −> TSL)

TSL ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: TSL ON

[H]: TSL OFF

[4] Separation Claws Control

SD7

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDSGND5VDC

24VDCSD7 DRIVE

MC15VDC

MC1 DRIVE

DCPS PRDB

The separation claws are driven by SD7 (separation clawSD), which is controlled by the PRDB (printer drive board).

1. Operation

SD7 comes ON at a predetermined interval after MC1(registration clutch) comes ON, causing the separa-tion claws to make contact with the drum so as to as-sist in separating the paper from the drum.

2. Signals

a. Output signal

(1) SD7 DRIVE (PRDB −> SD7)

SD7 drive control signal.

[L]: SD7 ON

[H]: SD7 OFF

3

3

DRUM UNIT

2-E-3

[5] Paper Entrance Guide Plate Control

HV

GP

PGND24VDC

GP CONT

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M1

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

M1 LOCK SIGM1 CLK

M1 CONT5VDCSGND

PRDB

A fixed voltage is applied to the paper entrance guide plateso as to prevent toner from sticking to the plate.

1. Operation

a. ON/OFF timing

ON/OFF in sync with M1 (main motor).

b. Applied voltage

–500V DC (constant voltage)

2. Signals

a. Output signal

(1) GP CONT (PRDB −> HV)

Controls application of fixed voltage to the paperentrance guide plate.

[L]: Voltage applied

[H]: No voltage

DRUM UNIT

2-E-4

Blank

CORONA UNIT

2-F-1

CORONA UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Charging Scorotron (DC negative corona discharge)

Discharge wire: Tungsten, φ0.06mm (gold-plated skin path)

Grid control: Stainless-steel platewith manual wire cleaning feature

Transfer DC positive corona discharge

Discharge wire: Oxide-coated tungsten, φ0.06mm with manual wire cleaning feature

Separation AC/DC corona discharge

Discharge wire: Oxide-coated tungsten, φ0.06mm with manual wire cleaning feature

Power supply to the Transfer/Separation coronaunit

Caution: Do not carry out copying with theADU door open by forcibly settingthe interlock ON, as doing so willgenerate high-voltage output at thecontacts (springs) on the main-bodyboard.

Closing of the ADU door establishes the connection to thepower supply.

Spark arresterplate (rear)

PCL

Charging controlplate

Charging wire

Charging-corona unit

Charging-wire cleaningmaterial

Transfer/Separation corona unit

Contact point

Transfer wire

Separation wire

Plungingprevention plate

Spark arresterplate (front)

Paper entrance guide plate

ADU door

CORONA UNIT

2-F-2

[3] Charging Control

SGND5VDC

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

M1

HV

CHARGING

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

M1 LOCK SIGM1 CLK

M1 CONT5VDCSGND

PGND24VDC

C CONTC SHIFTG SHIFTF(C) SIG GRID

PRDB

The HV (high voltage unit) carries out charging byoutputting a high voltage onto the charging wire.

The HV is controlled by analog control signals output fromthe PRDB (printer drive board).

1. Operation

The HV comes ON together with M1 (main motor),and goes OFF at a predetermined time interval aftertransfer output for the final sheet goes OFF.

a. Charging

An inverter boosts the 24VDC power from the DCPS,generating a high negative DC voltage that isdischarged from the charging wire.

b. Grid voltage

The HV applies grid voltage to the charging controlplate.

2. Signal

a. Input signal

(1) F (C) SIG (HV −> PRDB)

[L] if charge output has been forcibly switched OFFowing to detection of spark or occurrence of outputshort.

b. Output signals

(1) C CONT (PRDB −> HV)

Charge voltage and grid voltage ON/OFF controlsignal.

[L]: Charge and grid voltages ON

[H]: Charge and grid voltages OFF

(2) C SHIFT (PRDB −> HV)

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the output levelof the charging corona unit.

C SHIFT output range 4 to 10V

Charging output range –100 to –650µA

(3) G SHIFT (PRDB −> HV)

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the output levelof the grid voltage.

G SHIFT output range 4 to 10V

Grid voltage output –450 to –1090Vrange

1

1

CORONA UNIT

2-F-3

[4] Transfer/Separation Control

SGND5VDC

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

PS1

MC1

TRANSFER

DCPS

SGNDPS1

5VDC

24VDCMC1 DRIVE

PGND24VDC

T CONTT SHIFTS CONT

S SHIFT(AC)S SHIFT(DC)

F(T) SIGF(S) SIG

PRDB

SEPARATION

HV

The transfer/separation corona units are controlled by thePRDB (printer drive board) and the HV (high voltage unit).

1. Operation

Transfer and separation come ON at predeterminedintervals after M1 (main motor) comes ON, and goOFF at predetermined intervals after PS1 (registrationPS) goes OFF.

a. Transfer

Constant current is applied so as to produce a highvoltage DC discharge.

b. Separation

Constant voltage is applied to produce a high voltageAC discharge, and constant current is applied toproduce high voltage DC discharge.

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) F (T) SIG (HV −> PRDB)

[L] if transfer output has been forcibly switched OFFowing to detection of spark or occurrence of outputshort.

(2) F (S) SIG (HV −> PRDB)

[L] if separation output has been forcibly switchedOFF owing to detection of spark or occurrence ofoutput short.

b. Output signals

(1) T CONT (PRDB −> HV)

Transfer corona unit ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: Transfer corona unit ON

(2) T SHIFT (PRDB −> HV)

Transfer corona unit output control signal.

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the output levelof the transfer corona unit.

T SHIFT output range 4 to 10V

Transfer output range 0 to 350µA

(3) S CONT (PRDB −> HV)

Separation corona unit ON/OFF control signal.

[L]: Separation corona unit ON

(4) S SHIFT (AC) (PRDB −> HV)

Separation corona unit output control signal.

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the level of theAC component of the separation corona unit.

S SHIFT (AC) output range 3 to 10V

Separation AC output range 1.5 to 5.0kV

(5) S SHIFT (DC) (PRDB −> HV)

Separation corona unit output control signal.

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the level of theDC component of the separation corona unit.

S SHIFT (DC) output range 4 to 10V

Separation DC output range 0 to –300µA

1

CORONA UNIT

2-F-4

Blank

DEVELOPING UNIT

2-G-1

DEVELOPING UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Developing 2-component developing

Developing bias DC bias

Developer agitation Main and supplemental agitation

Developing unit drive

The developing unit is driven by two different motors.The developing motor (M3) drives the developingsleeve, while the main motor (M1) drives the agitatorsection.

Developingunit cover

Developingsleeve

Developingregulator plate

Developingsleeve

Agitator wheelAgitator screws

1

DEVELOPING UNIT

2-G-2

[3] M3 (Developing Motor) Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M3

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDSGNDM3 LD

M3 CLKM3 CONT

SGND5VDC

PRDB

M3 (developing motor) is controlled by the PRDB (printerdrive board).

1. Operation

M3 runs on 24V DC power, and drives the developingsleeve. M1 drives the agitator wheel and agitatorscrews. (For information about M1, refer to “M1 (Mainmotor) control.”) M3 includes an internal speed sen-sor, and utilizes PLL control to maintain a constantspeed, using a reference clock signal output byPRDB.

M3 goes ON and OFF in sync with M1.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) M3 LD (M3 −> PRDB)

M3 status detect signal.

Goes [L] when M3 rotation reaches the rated speed.

[H]: Stopped, or rotating at other than rated speed.

[L]: Rotating at rated speed. (PLL: stable)

b. Output signals



[L]: M3 ON

[H]: M3 OFF

(2) M3 CLK (PRDB −> M3)


[4] Developing Bias Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

24VDCPGND

M3

PS1

HV

BIAS


M3 CW/CCWM3 CLK

M3 CONTSGND5VDC

SGNDPS1

5VDC

B CONTB SHIFT

DCPS

PRDB

Developing bias is controlled by the PRDB (printer driveboard) and the HV (high voltage unit).

1. Operation

Application of developing bias to the developingsleeve starts a predetermined time interval after M3(developing motor) comes ON, and ends apredetermined time interval after charging goes OFF.

2. Signals

a. Output signals

(1) B CONT (PRDB −> HV)

Developing bias ON/OFF control signal.

[L] sets developing bias ON and outputs highvoltage.

(2) B SHIFT (PRDB −> HV)

Developing bias level control signal.

Analog signal from PRDB; controls the developingbias output level.

B SHIFT output range 2 to 8V

Bias-Voltage output range –350 to –830V

1

DEVELOPING UNIT

2-G-3

[5] Toner Density Control

M10


24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

12VDCSGND

M3

M4

PS1

TDS

DCPS


M3 CW/CCWM3 CLK

M3 CONTSGND5VDC

AABB

24VDC24VDC

TDS CONT12VDC

TONER ANGSGND

SGNDPS1

5VDCPRDB

AABB

24VDC24VDC

Toner density is controlled by the TDS (toner densitysensor), M4 (toner supply motor 1), M10 (toner supplymotor 2: other than 7020/25/30) and the PRDB (printerdriver board).

1. Operation

a. Toner density control

The TDS uses L detection to detect the toner densityin the developing unit, and outputs to the PRDB ananalog signal corresponding to the detected density.

The PRDB determines whether toner supply isnecessary by comparing the detected value againstthe developer's initial density.

b. Supply of toner to the developing unit

M4 and M10 (other than 7020/25/30) are steppingmotor running on 24VDC. Drive time is controlled bythe PRDB.

(1) When the power switched ON

Following power on, M1 (main motor) turns the agitatorscrews, and after a predetermined time interval the TDSreads the toner density. The PRDB compares thedensity detected by TDS with the developer's initialdensity. If the detected density is low, M4 and M10(other than 7020/25/30) comes on and supplies toneruntil the proper density level is restored.

(2) During a copy operation

The following table shows the relation between TDSoutput voltage and toner supply time.

7020/25/30/35

TDS output voltage Replenishment Time

≤ 2.00 (2.01) V 0 sec.

2.01 to 2.05 (2.04) V 0.24 (0.10) sec.

2.06 (2.04) to 2.09 (2.08) V 0.48 (0.20) sec.

2.10 (2.08) to 2.13 (2.12) V 0.72 (0.30) sec.

2.14 (2.12) to 2.17 (2.19) V 0.96 (0.40) sec.

2.18 (2.19) to 2.21 (2.35) V 1.20 (0.50) sec.

≥ 2.22 (2.35) V 1.80 (0.70) sec.

Parenthesized values are for the 7035

7022/7130/7135

TDS output voltage Replenishment Time

≤ 2.00 V 0 sec.

2.01 to 2.07 V 0.10 sec.

2.08 to 2.15 V 0.20 sec.

2.16 to 2.22 V 0.30 sec.

2.23 to 2.30 V 0.40 sec.

2.31 to 2.38 V 0.50 sec.

≥ 2.39 V 0.70 sec.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) TONER ANG (TDS −> PRDB)

Outputs an analog voltage corresponding to the toner density.

b. Output signals

(1) TDS CONT (PRDB −> TDS)

TDS output voltage adjustment signal.

Output range: 3 to 8 V

(2) M4 A, A, B, B (PRDB −> M4)

M4 drive control signals.

(3) M10 A, A, B, B (PRDB −> M10)

M10 drive control signals. (other than 7020/25/30)

4

4

DEVELOPING UNIT

2-G-4

Blank

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

2-H-1

TONER SUPPLY UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Toner supply Screw conveyance

Toner level detection Piezoelectric method:Approx. 30g

Toner agitation *1 Toner agitator plate + screw

Toner bottle *2 Rotation cartridge

Toner leak prevention Toner supply shutter

*1: Toner agitation

The toner agitator plate is powered by the tonersupply motor 1 (M4) via gears.

*2: Toner bottle

<Operation in the case of the 7020/25/30>

The toner bottle rotates while the toner bottle SD(SD6) is ON. This rotation is driven by the tonersupply motor 1 (M4). Rotation causes the toner tomove toward the bottle outlet along the spiralgroove cut into the bottle surface.

<Operation in the case of the other than 7020/25/30>

When toner supply motor 2 (M10) goes ON, thetoner bottle rotates, causing the toner to movealong the spiral groove cut in the surface of thetoner bottle to the outlet of the toner bottle.

<Common Operation>

At the outlet of the toner bottle is a toner supplypaddle which pushes the toner to the agitation/conveyance section of the toner supply unit alongwith the rotation of the toner bottle.

Toner bottleToner supply unit

Toner supply paddle


Toner-cavityprevention plate

Toner supply paddle


Toner cavityprevention plate

3

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

2-H-2

[3] Toner Level Detection Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M10


TLD

DCPS

AABB

24VDC24VDC

M4

AABB

24VDC24VDC

5VDCTLD

SGND

PRDB

Control of toner level detection is carried out by the TLD(toner level detecter) and the PRDB (printer control board).

1. Operation

a. Toner level detection

The TLD uses a piezo element. When TLD detectsthat toner in the cartridge has run low, it outputs atoner supply signal to the PRDB, generating amessage on the LCD (display board).

b. Detection timing

Detection is carried out at the following times.

• During copying

c. Toner supply operation to toner supply unit

<Operation in the case of the 7020/25/30>

When TLD detects that toner is empty, SD6 (toner-bottle SD) goes ON and engages the gear. When M4(toner supply motor 1) goes ON, the bottle turns,sending new toner to the toner supply unit.

<Operating in the case of the other than 7020/25/30>

When the TLD detects that the toner is empty up,M10 (toner supply motor 2) goes ON and rotates thetoner bottle, causing new toner to be supplied to thetoner supply unit.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) TLD (TLD −> PRDB)Goes [L] when the quantity of toner in the tonercartridge runs low. If [L] state continues for apredetermined period, a corresponding message isdisplayed in the LCD.

[4] Toner Bottle Detection Control

SGND5VDC

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

PS5

DCPS

SGNDPS5 SIG

5VDC

PRDB

PS5 (toner bottle PS) detects the presence or absence ofthe toner bottle.

1. Operation

PS5 detects mounting of the toner bottle, and themachine enters copy standby.

2. Signal

a. Input signal

(1) PS5 SIG (PS5 −> PRDB)

Toner bottle detect signal.

[H]: Toner bottle not present.

[L]: Toner bottle is present.

3

3

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT

2-I-1

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Drum cleaning Cleaning blade

(spring load type)

Toner recycle* Toner conveyance by screw

Toner collection Toner collection sheet

*Toner recycle

Toner collected by the cleaning blade is conveyedto the collected toner exit (and returned to thetoner supply unit) by the action of the collectedtoner conveyance screw.

Cleaning blade

Collected toner conveyance screw

Cleaningblade

Collected tonerconveyance screw

Tonercollectionsheet

Collected tonerconveyance screw

1

1


2-I-2

Blank

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-1

PAPER FEED UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Paper stacking Two trays

Paper lift-up Paper lift-up plate

Double feed prevention Torque limiter

Tray loading Front loading

First paper feed Paper feed SD

Paper feed roller

Loop clutch

Loop roller

Second paper feed Registration clutch

Registration rollers

By-pass feed By-pass feed SD

By-pass conveyance rollers

Loop roller

Paper size detection Paper size setting unit

Bypass conveyance roller

Paper feed roller

Double feedpreventionroller

Double feedprevention roller/upper

Paper feed roller

Double feed prevention roller/upper

Loop roller

Loop rollersRegistration rollers

Bypass pick-up roller

Bypass reverse roller

Double feed prevention rollerPaper lift-up plate

Paper lift-up plate

Upper tray

Lower tray

1

1

1

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-2

[3] Paper Feed Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M9

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

M9 CLKM9 CONT

5VDCSGND

SGNDPS1

5VDC

PRDB

PS1

MC1 DRIVE24VDC MC1

24VDCMC2 DRIVE MC2

SD1 DRIVE24VDC

24VDCSD2 DRIVE

SD3 DRIVE24VDC

SD1

SD2

SD3

M9 (paper feed motor) drive power is transmitted to thevarious rollers by means of SD1 (first paper feed SD (uppertray)), SD2 (first paper feed SD (lower tray)), and SD3(bypass SD). When M9 first comes ON, no rollers are incontact with paper; accordingly, SD1, SD2, or SD3 operateto raise or lower the feed rollers or bypass plate so as tomake contact with paper and initiate feeding.

When SD1 (first paper feed SD) comes ON, MC2 (loopclutch) also comes ON at the same time, conveying thepaper up to the registration rollers. PS1 (registration PS)detects the leading edge of the paper, MC2 goes OFF,and the paper is formed into a loop. When the drumcharge stabilizes, MC1 (registration) and MC2 both comeON to drive the second paper feed.

Paper feed operations are controlled by the PRDB (printerdrive board).

1. Operation

a. Timing for first paper feed (bypass)

(1) Start for first sheet

At a predetermined time interval after START buttonON.

(2) Start for second sheet

At a predetermined time interval after first sheet SD3ON.

(3) OFF timing

At a predetermined time interval after SD3 ON.

b. Timing for first paper feed (upper tray)





(3) OFF timing


c. Timing for first paper feed (lower tray)





(3) OFF timing


d. Control for second paper feed (MC1)

(1) ON timing

At a predetermined time interval after PS1 ON.

(2) OFF timing

At a predetermined time interval after PS1 OFF.

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-3

e. Control of paper feed loop formation (MC2)

(1) ON timing

At the same time as SD1 ON, SD2 ON or SD3 ON.

(2) OFF timing

At a predetermined time interval after PS1 ON.

2. Signals

a. Output signals



[L]: M9 ON

[H]: M9 OFF

(2) M9 CLK (PRDB −> M9)



[L]: SD1 ON

[H]: SD1 OFF


[L]: SD2 ON

[H]: SD2 OFF


[L]: SD3 ON

[H]: SD3 OFF

(6) MC1 DRIVE (PRDB −> MC1)

MC1 drive control signal.

[L]: MC1 ON

[H]: MC1 OFF

(7) MC2 DRIVE (PRDB −> MC2)

MC2 drive control signal.

[L]: MC2 ON

[H]: MC2 OFF

[4] Paper Up Down Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

M7

M8

DCPS

SGNDPS9

5VDC

M7 UP M DRIVE24VDC

PRDB

PS9

SGNDPS7

5VDCPS7

SGNDPS125VDC

M8 LOW M DRIVE24VDC

PS12

SGNDPS105VDC

PS10

When a tray is set into the machine, its presence isdetected by PS9 (tray detect PS (upper)) or PS12 (traydetect PS (lower)), which in turn causes M7 (tray motor(upper)) or M8 (tray motor (lower)) to come ON for a fixedinterval so as to raise the tray's bottom plate. Signalsrelated to this operation are PS7 (upper limit detect PS(upper)) and PS10 (upper limit detect PS (lower))

1. Operation

a. ON timing

PS9 ON causes M7 ON. PS12 ON causes M8 ON.

b. OFF timing

PS7 ON causes M7 OFF. PS10 ON causes M8 OFF.

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-4

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) PS9 (PS9 −> PRDB)

Upper tray detect signal.

[L]: tray is present;

[H]: tray is not present.

Detection of the tray causes M7 to raise the paper inthe upper tray.

(2) PS12 (PS12 −> PRDB)

Lower tray detect signal.

[L]: tray is present;

[H]: tray is not present.

Detection of tray causes M8 to raise the paper in thelower tray.

(3) PS7 (PS7 −> PRDB)

Upper limit detect signal for upper tray.

Goes [H] when paper in the upper tray has beenraised to the upper limit, causing M7 to go OFF.

(4) PS10 (PS10 −> PRDB)

Upper limit detect signal for lower tray.

Goes [H] when paper in the lower tray has beenraised to the upper limit, causing M8 to go OFF.

b. Output signals

(1) M7 DRIVE (PRDB −> M7)


[L]: M7 ON

[H]: M7 OFF

(2) M8 DRIVE (PRDB −> M8)


[L]: M8 ON

[H]: M8 OFF

[5] Paper Size Detection Control

PFDB(LOWER)

SW2

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

DCPS

SGNDPS205VDC

PRDB

PS20

5VDCVR1 ANG

SGNDVR1

U SIZE DU SIZE CU SIZE BU SIZE A

U SIZE SELECT

PFDB(UPPER)

SW1

L SIZE DL SIZE CL SIZE BL SIZE A

L SIZE SELECT

Tray paper size is detected by the PRDB (printer driverboard) based on detection signals issued from the PFDBs(paper feed detection boards). Detection of paper size inthe by-pass tray is carried out by PS20 (bypass traypaper size detect PS) and VR1 (bypass tray paper sizeVR).

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-5

1. Operation

a. Paper size detection for upper and lower

trays

Paper size for the upper tray is set by SW1 on PFDB(UPPER), and paper size for the lower tray is set bySW2 on PFDB (LOWER). The PRDB detects theswitch signals output in accordance with position ofeach of these switches. The following table showsthe relation between switch signals and paper size.

For U.S.A.

SIZE A SIZE B SIZE C SIZE D

Switching

Tray1

8.5 x 14

B5R

B4

A5R

A4

A4R

F4

5.5 x 8.5

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

Tray2

11 x 17

A5R

A4

A4R

A3

F4

5.5 x 8.5

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 14

Paper size

For Europe

SIZE A SIZE B SIZE C SIZE D

Switching

Tray1

8.5 x 14

B5

B4

A5R

A4

A4R

F4

5.5 x 8.5

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

Tray2

11 x 17

B5

B4

A5R

A4

A4R

A3

F4

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

Paper size

b. Paper size detection for bypass tray

Paper length in the by-pass tray is detected by PS20ON/OFF. Paper width in the bypass tray is detectedby VR1, whose resistance value changes inaccordance with the tray's guide position.

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) PS20 (PS20 −> PRDB)

Paper length detection signal for bypass tray.

[L]:B4 size or more

[H]: A4R size or less

(2) VR1 ANG (VR1 −> PRDB)

Paper width detection signal for bypass tray.

(3) U SIZE A, B, C, D (PFDB (UPPER) −> PRDB)

Paper size ON/OFF detect signals for upper tray.

(4) L SIZE A, B, C, D (PFDB (LOWER) −> PRDB)

Paper size ON/OFF detect signals for lower tray.

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-6

[6] No Paper Detection Control

SGND5VDC

DCPS

SGNDPS13 SIG

5VDC

PRDB

PS13

SGNDPS8 SIG

5VDCPS8

SGNDPS11 SIG

5VDCPS11

No paper detection is carried out by PS8 (no paper detectPS (upper)), PS11 (no paper detect PS (lower)), and PS13(by-pass no paper detect). Detection is controlled by thePRDB (printer drive board).

1. Operation

a. No paper detection control

When the upper, lower, or bypass tray runs out ofpaper, the corresponding PS comes ON (PS8, PS11,or PS13), causing the LCD (display board) to displaya paper out message.

2. Signals

a. Input signals


No paper detection signal for upper tray.

[H]: Paper does not exist

[L]: Paper exist


No paper detection signal for lower tray.


[L]: Paper exist


No paper detection signal for bypass tray.

[H]: Paper exist

[L]: Paper does not exist

[7] Control of Paper Level Detection

SGND5VDC

DCPS

SGNDPS9 SIG

5VDC

SGNDPS12 SIG

5VDC

PRDB

PS9

PS12

After the trays have been set in the machine, paper level isdetected by PS9 (tray detect sensor (upper)) and PS12(tray detect sensor (lower)).

As the paper level in tray runs low, the actuator at the rearpart of the tray gradually rotates as illustrated below. Thelevel is detected by the number of times the sensor goesON/OFF (the number of slits detected).

Operation

a. Detection of paper level in tray

The following shows the relation between the paperlevel and the number of slit detections by the sensor(PS9 or PS12).

0 slits : Full

1 slit : Medium

2 slits : Low

Direction of rotationwhen the paper liftingplate rises.

Tray detectsensor

Slit 1

Slit 2

Actuator

View looking from rear

2

2

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-7

[8] Intermediate Conveyance Control

(7030/7130/7035/7135 only)

PS21SGND5VDC

SGNDPS21 SIG

5V

PS22SGND

PS22 SIG5V

DCPS PRDB

PS21 (intermediate conveyance PS/upper) and PS22(intermediate conveyance PS/lower) are installed inproximity of the loop rollers of tray 1 and tray 2respectively. As the paper feeding intervals of the 7030,7130, 7035 and 7135 are decreased during continualcopying, there is a chance that a slight increase in thetiming of paper feeding may cause jams. To prevent this,the condition of the paper is monitored by PS21 and PS22immediately after the start of paper feeding.

1. Operation

If PS21 or PS22 detect paper within a predeterminedperiod of time after the start of feeding the second andsubsequent sheets of paper, the MC2 (loop clutch) will bestopped momentarily to ensure a constant intervalbetween paper feeding.

2. Signal

a. Input signals

(1) PS21 SIG (PS21 ∅ PRDB)

PS21 paper detect signal


[L]: Paper exist

(2) PS22 SIG (PS22 ∅ PRDB)

PS22 paper detect signal


[L]: Paper exist

4

PAPER FEED UNIT

2-J-8

Blank

FIXING UNIT

2-K-1

FIXING UNIT[1] Composition

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Fixing Pressure + heat roller

Heat source Heater lamps (2 lamps)

Cleaning Fixing webFixing cleaning roller

Heat roller Aluminum + PFA coating

Pressure roller Silicone rubber + PFA tube

Separation Fixing claws (6 claws)

Temperature Heat rollerdetection contact thermistor

Overheating Heat rollerprevention Contact thermostat

Neutralizing Neutralizing brush

(paper, fixing pressure roller)

Fixing roller presure/release

The pressure on the fixing roller is released byopening of the fixing guide.

Fixing guide

Fixing guide

Fixing exitplate

Cleaner cover

Fixing guide

Fixing claws

Fixing web

Fixing cleaningroller

Fixing heatroller

Fixingpressureroller

Neutralizingbrush

Fixing heaters(Main) (Sub)

Pressure rollerneutralizing brush

1

FIXING UNIT

2-K-2

[3] Fixing Temperature Control

L2 DRIVE

L3 DRIVE

AC

L2 CONTL3 CONTRL CONT

TH1 ANG

SGND

TH2 ANG

SGND

PRDBDCPS

L2

L3TH1

TH2RL TS

The fixing heat roller is heated by lamps L2 (fixing heaterlamp 1) and L3 (fixing heater lamp 2). The PRDB (printerdrive board) detects the temperature on the roller bymeans of TH1 and TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 1 and2), and controls L2 and L3 accordingly via the DCPS (DCpower source).

1. Operation

a. Temperature control

(1) Warm-up

The PRDB turns on the fixing heater lamp circuitwithin the DCPS immediately when power comes on,and holds L2 and L3 on until the fixing heat rollerreaches the specified temperature. L2 and L3 havedifferent light (heat) distribution characteristics (seeillustration below), and control temperature throughTH1 and TH2.

L2 light distribution characteristics

L3 light distribution characteristics

Once warm-up has completed, the PRDB switchesL2 and L3 ON and OFF as necessary to maintain theset temperature.

(Warm up time)

Other than 7035: Within 30 seconds (from roomtemperature of 20°C).

7035/7135: Within 45 seconds (from roomtemperature of 20°C).

(2) Idling

L2 and L3 go ON/OFF repeatedly so as to maintainthe temperature between 191°C and 187°C(U.S.A.)/202°C and 187°C (Europe).

Heat rollerL2

Front

TH2 TH1 L3

Rear

Bright

Dark

Bright

Dark

4

FIXING UNIT

2-K-3

(3) Copying

(When feeding from any trays other than the by-passtray)

Temperature control during copying goes ON/OFFrepeatedly so as to maintain temperature at about194°C. If the selected size is small (B5R, B6R, A5R,or 5.5x8.5R), then although L2 and L3 both go ON/OFF repeatedly control is for the most partimplemented by L2 only (so as to preventoverheating at the ends of the fixing roller).

(When feeding from the bypass tray)

The temperature is held approximately 10°C higherthan the temperature indicated above. Where OHPhas been selected using the application function,control is the same as for normal copying.

(Doble sided copying)

Temperature is held about 5°C lower that thetemperature used when feeding from any tray otherthan the by-pass tray.

(4) Low-power mode

L2 and L3 go ON/OFF repeatedly so as to maintainthe temperature at about 85°C (about 170°C in thecase of the 7035/7135, about 150°C in the case ofthe 7122).

The temperature for low power mode can be changedby 25 mode DIPSW.

b. Protection against abnormality

A thermostat (TS) in contact with the fixing heat rollerprotects against overheating of the roller. Theoperating temperature of TS is shown below.

TS: Approximately 220°C

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) TH1 ANG (TH1 −> PRDB)

TH1 output signal.

Outputs a voltage that varies according to the surfacetemperature at the center of the fixing heat roller. Thissignal is used both for normal temperature controland for detection of heating error (overheating, etc.).

(2) TH2 ANG (TH2 −> PRDB)

TH2 output signal.

Outputs a voltage that varies according to the surfacetemperature at the ends of the fixing heat roller. Thissignal is used both for normal temperature controland for detecting of heating error (overheating, etc.).

b. Output signals

(1) L2 DRIVE (DCPS −> L2)

AC (N) power line for L2.

Sets AC power on and off in accordance with the L2CONT signal.

(2) L3 DRIVE (DCPS −> L3)

AC (N) power line for L3.

Sets AC power on and off in accordance with the L3CONT signal.

(3) L2 CONT (PRDB −> DCPS)


[L]: L2 ON

[H]: L2 OFF

(4) L3 CONT (PRDB −> DCPS)


[L]: L3 ON

[H]: L3 OFF

4

4

FIXING UNIT

2-K-4

[4] SD4 (Cleaning Web SD) Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

M1

DCPS

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

LOCK SIGM1 CLK

M1 CONT5VDCSGND

24VDCSD4 DRIVE

PRDB

SD4

SD4 (cleaning web SD) is controlled by the PRDB (printerdrive board).

1. Operation

SD4 (cleaning web SD) is set ON by PS2 (fixing exitPS), stays ON for 100msec, and then goes OFF.However, that SD4 does not come at all for certaincopy counts.

2. Signals

a. Output signal


[L]: SD4 ON

[H]: SD4 OFF

ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION

2-L-1

ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION[1] Composition

Exit rollers

Switching gate

ADU conveyance rollers

ADU rollers

ADU unit (ADU door)

Switching PET

Without DB

If a DB is installed. Note: The switching guide platemust be removed when theDB is installed.

Switching guide plate

1


2-L-2

[2] Mechanisms

Mechanism Method

Paper path Switching guide,switching (*1) Switching PET

Paper conveyance Roller conveyance

*1:Switching of the paper path

The switching guide directs the paper that exitsfrom the fixing unit to either to the exit area or tothe ADU unit.

• Switching operation

For double sided copies, the switching guidedirects the paper to the rear side of the ADU door.The trailing edge of the sheet reaches the pointjust in front of the ADU rollers, at which point theswitching mylar returns the sheet to the feed path,the ADU rollers reverse direction, and the sheet isconveyed back to the drum unit.

[3] Paper Exit /ADU Conveyance

Switching Control

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

DCPS

M1

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

LOCK SIGM1 CLK

M1 CONT5VDCSGND

MC1MC1 DRIVE

24VDC

SD524VDC

SD5 DRIVE

PRDB

PS1SGND

PS1 SIG5VDC

PS3SGND

EXIT PS5VDC

7020/25/30/35

PS19SGND

FULL PS5VDC

Old type 7020/25/30/35

The paper exit unit's SD5 (ADU gate SD) switches theconveyance path toward either the exit or the ADU unit.

The paper is conveyed by M1 (main motor) and M9 (paperfeed motor), and M1 and SD5 are controlled by PRDB(printer drive board). M1 and SD5 are controlled by thePRDB (printer drive board). Related signals are MC1(registration clutch), PS19 (exit limit detect PS), PS2(fixing exit PS) and PS3 (paper exit PS).

Caution : In the case of a machine other than the 7020/25/30/35, the function normally performed byPS3 is performed by PS2. PS19 is installedonly on old type 7020/25/30/35 machines.

1. Operation

a. Control of paper exit /ADU conveyance

switching

In single sided copy mode, SD5 remains OFF andpaper exits straight to the exit unit. In double sidedcopy mode, SD5 comes ON during copying of thefront side, so that the paper is conveyed into the ADUunit. The ADU unit inverts the paper so that the backside of the paper is copied. When PS2 goes OFF bythe last paper, SD5 goes OFF, so that paper isdirected to the exit.

Switchingguide

SwitchingPET

ADU roller

3

3


2-L-3

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) FULL PS (PS19 −> PRDB)

Paper exit limit detect signal.

(Old type 7020/25/30/35 only)

Goes [H] when the exit section is full, causing displayof message indicating that paper should be removed.It is selectable to stop the machine when PS19 is ONaccording to a setting in 25 mode.

The paper exit limit of a copying machine that doesnot have PS19 (7022/7130 and new type 7020/25/30/35) differs depending upon the setting of the 25 mode.

b. Output signal


SD5 drive control signal.

[L]: SD5 ON (Convey to ADU)

[H]: SD5 OFF (Straight to exit only)

[4] ADU Conveyance Control

M6

AABB

24VDC24VDC

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

SGND5VDC

PS4

MC1

DCPS

MC1 DRIVE24VDC

MC224VDC

MC2 DRIVE

SGNDPS4 SIG

5VDC

PS1SGND

PS1 SIG5VDC

PS2SGND

PS2 SIG5VDC

PRDB

M6 (ADU motor), a 24V DC step motor, drives the ADUrollers that drive the conveyance. When paper directed tothe ADU side by SD5 reaches PS4 (ADU PS), M6 operatesas necessary (forward, stop, reverse) to direct the paper tothe drum unit so that copy can be made to the back side. M6and PS4 are controlled by the PRDB (printer drive board).Related signals are MC1 (registration clutch), MC2 (loopclutch), PS1 (registration PS) and PS2 (fixing exit PS).

1. Operation

a. Feed control

M6 comes ON when paper reaches PS4, so that thepaper is conveyed further by the action of the ADUrollers. M6 goes OFF when PS4 detects the trailingedge of the paper, and at a predetermined timeinterval thereafter M6 comes back ON in reverse soas to convey the paper in the opposite direction. Thereversed paper passes through the switching PETand is conveyed to the registration area, where theloop rollers move it on to the drum.

3


2-L-4

2. Signals

a. Input signals


Detects paper passage through ADU roller area.

Goes [H] when paper is detected.


Detects paper passage through fixing unit's exit.

Goes [H] when paper is detected.

b. Output signal

(1) M6 A, A, B, B

(PRDB −> M6)

M6 drive control signals.

2

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-1

OTHER CONTROLS[1] Parts Energized When the Main

Power Switch is OFF

SW1

CBR1

CBR2

DCPS

The following components are powered regardless ofwhether the SW1 (main power switch) is ON or OFF,provided that the power cord remains plugged in.

a. CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit breakers)

The circuit breakers serve to protect against damagefrom short circuit. If current exceeds 8A, the circuitbreaker(s) will go OFF, cutting the power to thesystem.

b. DCPS (DC power supply)

Supplies power to each unit and also controls theON/OFF state of the fixing lamp.

[2] Components Operated by Power

Switches SW1 and SW2

24VDCPGND HV

PRDB

SW2

PSWB

OB PRNCB

LCD

SW1

PTC

ADB

LDB

OB

CCD

12VDC-12VDC

5VDCSGND

FAXCB NCUCB

12VDC-12VDC

5VDCSGND

12VDC-12VDC

5VDCSGND

AC(H)AC(N)

5VDCSGND

SUB SWSGND

5VDCSGND

INDEX

DF-314

5VDCSGND

24VDCPGND5VDCSGND

24VDCPGND5VDCSGND

24VDCPGND5VDCSGND

24VDCPGND5VDCSGND

12VDC5VDC

-5VDCSGND

12VDC-12VDC

5VDCSGND

24VDC

PGND

24VDC CONT5VDC CONT

24VDC CONTRL CONT

DCPS

SCDB

24VDCPGND

12VDC5VDCSGND

FS-107

DB-209/210DB-409/410

CB

2

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-2

1. Operation

a. Components operated by SW1 (main power

switch)

• DCPS (DC power supply)

• CB (overall control board)

• OB (operation board)

• PTC (PTC heater) : (Treated as spare parts in thecase of machines other thanthe 7020/25/30/35.)

Setting SW1 ON supplies power to the DCPS, whichin turn supplies +12VDC, –12VDC, and +5VDC tosome of the circuits on the CB. The CB supplies+5VDC to the OB.

If printer and/or fax options are installed, +12VDC,–12VDC, and +5VDC are also supplied to theseoptions.

Supply of 24VDC to PTC is set by 25 mode DIPSW.

b. Components operated by SW2 (sub power

switch)

• All others

SW2 (sub power switch) is located on the PSWB(power switch board). At SW2 ON, the CB sends acontrol signal to the DCPS, causing the DCPS tosupply +12VDC, 12VDC, and +5VDC to all CBcircuits and to the PRDB. The PRDB then sends tothe DCPS a control signal that causes the DCPS togenerate 24VDC. This 24VDC power is supplied toall drive boards and options.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) SUB SW (PSWB −> OB)

Goes [L] when SW2 is turned ON.

b. Output signal

(1) RL CONT (PRDB −> DCPS)

Control signal for RL1 on the DCPS.

In the event of abnormality, this signal goes [H] sothat RL1 goes OFF.

[3] Fan Control

FM2

FM3

SGND5VDC

24VDC24VDCPGNDPGND

DCPS

FM2 DRIVEFM2 LOCK SIG

PGND


PGND

FM3FM3 DRIVE

FM3 LOCK SIGPGND

FM3 H/L SIG

FM4FM4 DRIVE

FM4 LOCK SIGPGND


PGND

PRDB

FM1


PGNDFM5


Other than 7035

7035

FM1 (DC power supply cooling fan) and FM5 (developingsuction fan : other than 7020/25/30) are driven by the DCPS(DC power supply), and FM2 (fixing cooling fan), FM3(internal dehumidifying fan) and FM4 (internal cooling fan)are driven by the PRDB (printer drive board).

1. Operation

All fans use 24V DC motors.

a. FM1

Cools the DC power supply unit.FM1 runs only during copy operation.

b. FM2

Cools both edges of the paper immediately after thefixing process, in order to prevent curling of small sizepaper.FM2 comes ON at start of copying if paper size isB5R, B6R, A5R, or 5.5x8.5R. FM2 goes OFF 60seconds after PS3 (paper exit PS) (PS2 (fixing exitPS) in the case of machines other than 7020/25/30/35) detects the trailing edge of the final paper.

c. FM3

Ventilates the inside of the fixing unit in order toremove water vapor generated in the read section byheat from the fixing unit.FM3 comes on only during copying. FM3 goes OFF60 seconds after PS3 (PS2 in the case of machinesother than 7020/25/30/35) detects the trailing edge ofthe final paper.

3

3

3

3

3

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-3

d. Operation of FM4

FM4 cools the inside of the machine in order toprevent toner from sticking when the temperature ishigher than the set value.

If the machine temperature sensor on the TCSB(toner control sensor board) detects a temperature of43°C inside the machine, it judges that thetemperature in the machine has risen, and turns ONFM4. When this sensor subsequently detects atemperature of 38°C, FM4 is turned OFF. If themachine temperature sensor detects a temperatureof 58°C, error code F22-1 is displayed and themachine is stopped.

e. Operation of FM5 (Other than 7020/25/30)

Toner that has been scattered around the developingarea is sucked up by the FM5 and then passedthrough a duct so that it adheres to the suction filter.

FM5 goes ON in synchronism with M3 (developingmotor). FM5 goes OFF after a certain interval fromwhen M3 goes OFF.

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) FM1 LOCK SIG (FM1 −> DCPS)

FM1 status detect signal.

[L]: Running normally.

[H]: Stopped, or running abnormally.

(2) FM2 LOCK SIG (FM2 −> DCPS)




(3) FM3 LOCK SIG (FM3 −> PRDB)




(4) FM4 LOCK SIG (FM4 −> PRDB)


[L]: Normal rotation.

[H]: Stopped or abnormal rotation.

(5) FM5 LOCK SIG (FM5 −> DCPS) (Other than

7020/25/30)


[L]: Normal rotation.

[H]: Stopped or abnormal rotation.

b. Output signals

(1) FM1 DRIVE (DCPS −> FM1)

FM1 drive control signal.

[L]: FM1 OFF

[H]: FM1 ON

(2) FM2 DRIVE (PRDB −> FM2)


[L]: FM2 OFF

[H]: FM2 ON



[L]: FM3 OFF

[H]: FM3 ON

(4) FM3 H/L SIG (PRDB −> FM3) (7035 only)

FM3 rotational speed switching signal.

[L]: Low speed rotation

[H]: High speed rotation



[L]: FM4 OFF

[H]: FM4 ON

(6) FM5 DRIVE (PRDB −> FM5) (Other than 7020/

25/30)


[L]: FM5 OFF

[H]: FM5 ON

3

3

3

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-4

[4] Operation Unit Control

SCAN0SCAN1SCAN2SCAN3SCAN4SCAN5SCAN6SCAN7

RTN3RTN4RTN5

SW2

PSWB

INV2

LCD

UD3UD1

OP TXDOP RTSOP RXDOP CTS

UD2UD0

SGNDSGNDSGND5VDC5VDC

5VDCINV ON (PWM)

SGND

SUB SWSGND

CB OB

PAKB

FAXOB(OPTION)

X2Y2X1Y1

The operation unit consists of the OB (operation board),LCD (display board), PAKB (panel key board), INV2(display inverter), and PSWB (power switch board). TheLCD includes a backlight (driven by INV2) as well as touchswitches that are linked to the display content.

The operation unit is driven by the OB based on serial dataoutput by the CB (overall control board).

1. Operation

a. LED ON/OFF control

The LEDs installed on the OB are driven ON/OFF bythe OB’s internal CPU in accordance with serial datareceived from the CB.

b. LCD display control

(1) LCD display operation

The LCD generates various displays in accordancewith 4 bit parallel data transmitted from the CBthrough the OB.

(2) Backlight ON operation

The backlight (cold cathode tube) is included to makethe display easier to read. The backlight is driven bythe INV2, which is controlled by the OB.

(3) Touch switch control

The LCD includes touch switches that allow the userto make selection by pressing directly on the screen.These switches are controlled by the OB.

c. PSWB (power switch board) control

Switching ON of SW2 on the PSWB (power switchboard) while SW1 (main power switch) is ON causespower to be supplied to all loads. Note that thisswitching operates only if SW1 is already ON.

2. Signals

a. Input signals

(1) OP RXD (OB −> CB)

Serial data informing CB of the OB operating status.

(2) OP CTS (OB −> CB)

Indicates that data transmission from the OB to CB isin progress.

While this signal is [H], the CB will not transmit OPTXD.

b. Output signals

(1) OP TXD (CB −> OB)

Serial data informing OB of the machine operatingstatus.

(2) OP RTS (CB −> OB)

Indicates that data transmission from the CB to OB isin progress.

While this signal is [H], the OB will not transmit OPRXD.

2

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-5

[5] Counter Control

C(T)(OPTION)

C(K)(OPTION)

24VDC24VDC24VDCPGNDPGNDPGND

24VDCC(T) DRIVE

24VDCC(K) SIG

PGNDC(K) DRIVE

SGND5VDC

PS3SGND

EXIT PS5VDC

DCPS

PRDB

SCDB

PS2SGND

PS2 SIG5VDC

7020/25/30/35

This machine supports the following two optionalcounters.

C(T): Total Counter

C(K): Key Counter

This counters are controlled by the SCDB (scanner driveboard).

1. Operation

This machine counts copies using the following twosoftware counters.

(1) Paper feed counter

This counter increments when 1st paper feed for thenext copy comes ON.

(2) Paper exit counter

This counter increments when PS3 (paper exitPS)(PS2 (fixing exit PS) in the case of machinesother than the 7020/25/30/35) goes ON −> OFF.

Counter value shown on OB

Normal Operation

Indicator shows count from the paper feed counter.

Jam

Indicator shows count from the paper exit counter.

2. Signals

a. Input signal

(1) C(K) SIG (C(K) −> SCDB)

Indicates the C(K) connection state.

[H]: Counter not connected.

[L]: Counter present.

b. Output signals

(1) C(T) DRIVE (SCDB −> C(T))

C(T) drive signal.

C(T) increments at [L] −> [H].

(2) C(K) DRIVE (SCDB −> C(K))

C(K) drive signal.

C(K) increments at [L] −> [H].

3

3

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-6

[6] Option Control

FAXOB(OPTION) OB

RADF(DF-314)

FNS(FS-107)

CB

FAXCB(OPTION)

( )OPB PRNCB

(OPTION)

PRDB

DBDB-209DB-409DB-210DB-410

COINVENDER

NCUCB(OPTION)

DIMMMU-403MU-404MU-405

Options are controlled by the CB (overall control board),the PRDB (printer drive board) and the OB (operationboard).

1. Operation

The RADF, FNS, FAXCB and PRNCB each includetheir own internal CPU. Control is implemented bycommunication between these CPUs and the CB onthe main body. The DB does not include a CPU, andis driven by the CB via the PRDB. (For informationabout operation of options, refer to options servicehandbook and the printer and fax service hand-books.)

2

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-7

<Operation of copy vender signals>

35

36

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

DC24V

C(K)SIG

C(K)GND

C(K)DRIVE

P.GND

Vender Copy

Vender FEED

Paper size 0

Paper size 1

Paper size 2

Paper size 3

Vender

duplex

CPF SIG 0

CPF SIG 1

P.GND

Key counter power source

Key counter connection check

Signal ground

Key counter increment

Power ground

Copy-in-progress signal

Paper feed signal

Paper size signal

Double sided copy select signal

CPF mode selection signal

Power ground

Always

—

Goes (L) 100ms after output of paper

—

Output starts at START button ON, and

ends at paper exit completion.

Goes (L) for 100ms in sync with paper

feed from main body tray and DB.

The signal is output when the

paper size is changed.

The signal is output when duplex mode

is selected.

The signal is output when the copy,

printer and fax modes are selected.

—

24V, 300mA

—

Open collector

5V, 200mA

—

Connector No. Pin No. Signal Name Output TimingContents Signal Type

2

OTHER CONTROLS

2-M-8

Blank

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

3

This section explains how to disassemble and reassemble the machine.When disassembling and reassembling the machine, follow theprecautions given below.1. Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet.2. The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the

disassembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified.3. Care should be taken not to lose small parts. Care should also be

taken not to install small parts in wrong places.4. Do not operate the machine before installing all the disassembled

parts completely.5. Removal of some screws is prohibited in this section. Never loosen

them.

3-A-1

EXTERNAL SECTION

EXTERNAL SECTION[1] Replacing the Ozone Filter

Caution: Be sure that the power cord hasbeen unplugged from the outlet.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the five set screws, and remove the readright cover.

Note: If an unusual noise is emitted when you openor close the bypass tray, clean the ADU doorrib with alcohol.

(2) Remove the ozone filter.

Read rightcover

Ozone filter

Set screws

(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removalsteps in reverse.

How to install the ozone filter

Caution: When installing the ozone filter, take carenot to break it.

2

Rib

PET sheet<7020/25/30only>

PET sheet

Ozone filter

Push the PET sheetfirmly against therear.

Insert the front part.

Shift the front part toeliminate clearance.

3-A-2

EXTERNAL SECTION

[2] Replacing the Filter Cover

Assembly and Suction Filter/A

(Other Than 7020/25/30)


a. Procedure

(1) Remove the set screw, then remove the filter coverassembly.

(2) Remove the suction filter/A.

(3) Reinstall the above parts following the removalsteps in reverse.

Caution: For installation of suction filter/A of model7135, white filter face should be facedtoward inside the machine.

Set screw

Filter cover assembly

Suction filter/A

4

3-B-1

DRIVE SECTION

DRIVE SECTION

[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Motor

units (Main, Paper Feed, Developing)


Caution: Be sure to remove the drum unitfrom the main body before removingor reinstalling the main motor unit. Ifthe drum unit is in place at this time,the drum will rotate when you installor remove the drum rotating plate,resulting in possible damage to thecleaning blade.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the developing unit and drum unit from themain body.

(2) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the cordcover A. Then remove the cord cover B.

(3) Remove the 9 set screws, and remove the rearcover.

(4) Remove the 2 set screws holding the left and rightrear covers in place (2 screws each), and removethe covers.

(5) Remove the 3 set screws, and remove the wire-bundle guide plate.

(6) Remove the 16 set screws, and remove the boardcover D.

(7) Remove the 13 set screws, and remove the boardcover A.

Cord cover A

Rear cover

Rear left cover

Rear right cover

Set screws

Cord cover B

Board cover D

Board cover A

Wire bundleguide plate

Wire bundleguide plate

2

2

DRIVE SECTION

2

1O

UT

LIN

E2

UN

IT E

XP

LA

NA

TIO

N3

DIS

./AS

SE

MB

LY

(8) Remove the various wiring connectors from theoverall control board.

Caution: Be very careful when handling theribbon cable connector from the CCD.

Refer to “[4] removing the ribbon cable” and “[5]Installing the ribbon cable”.

(9) Remove the 12 set screws, and remove the overallcontrol board unit.

(10) Disconnect the connectors from each motor unit.

(11) Remove the 4 set screws, then remove each motor unit.

(12) Reinstall in the opposite sequence to removal.

Caution: Be careful to avoid damaging the ribboncable connected to the overall controlboard.

[2] Replacing the Registration Clutch


Caution: Be sure to remove the drum unitfrom the main body before carry outthe following procedure. If the drumunit is in place at this time, the drumwill rotate when you install orremove the drum rotating plate,resulting in possible damage to thecleaning blade.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the rear panel and the overall controlboard unit.

(2) Remove the set screw, and remove the drum rotatingplate.

Connectors

Connector

Set screws

Drum rotatingplate

Set screw

Overall control boardunit

2

2

2

3-B-3

DRIVE SECTION

(3) Remove the clutch connector.

(4) Remove the E-ring. Pull the registration clutchtoward you and rotate it to remove.


Caution: When installing the registration clutch, besure that the clutch's turn-preventiongroove is installed correctly.

[3] Replacing the Loop Clutch


a. Procedure

(1) Remove the rear panel and the overall controlboard unit.

(2) Remove the wire bundle from the clamp on theconveyance drive panel.

(3) Remove the 2 E-rings and 3 set screws, andremove the conveyance drive panel. (Do notremove the rotation prevention screws on theclutch.

(4) Remove the E-ring, then remove the gear and theconnector, remove the gear at the front, and thenremove the clutch.


Registrationclutch

E-ring

E-rings

Set screw

Bearings

Loop clutch

Gears

E-ring

Conveyancedrive panel

Turn-prevention groove

Registration clutch

1

DRIVE SECTION

2

[4] Removing the Ribbon Cable

(Other than 7135)

a. Procedure

(1) Move the lock levers forward to release the lock,then pull out the ribbon cable.

[5] Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable

(Other than 7135)

a. Procedure

(1) Move the lock levers forward, then, while ensuringthat the direction of the conductive face of theribbon cable is correct, push the connector firmly tothe rear.

(2) Firmly push both lock levers, and lock the ribboncable.

Caution: Be sure to push both lock leverstogether.

Lock leversConductive face

Lock levers

4 4

3-B-5

DRIVE SECTION

[6] Removing the Ribbon Cable

(7135 Only)

a. Procedure

(1) Move the lock lever forward to release the lock,then pull out the ribbon cable.

[7] Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable

(7135 Only)

a. Procedure

(1) Move the lock lever forward, then insert the ribboncable firmly into the connector while ensuring thatthe conductive face of the ribbon cable ispositioned on the opposite side of the lock lever.

(2) Push back the lock lever to lock the ribbon cable.

Ribbon cableRibbon cable

Conductive face (back side)

Lock lever

Lock lever

Ribbon cable

Lock lever

Blank page

3-C-1

READ SECTION

READ SECTION[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed

Caution: The paint-locked screws must not beremoved. Be sure that you do notremove these screws.

[2] Removing the Original Glass

Caution: The white color reference plate on therear of the original glass must be keptclean. If dirt gets on the board, cleanthe board using a clean cloth.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the platen cover or the RADF.

(2) Remove the 5 set screws, and remove the readright cover.

(3) Loosen the set screw and slide the glass holdingplate toward the outer exterior.

(4) Raise the original glass and slide it off.


Caution: Be sure that the original glass is pushedflush left against the glass holding platewhen fastening into place.

Screws that must not beremoved Original glass

Readright cover

Set screws

Set screws

Screws that must not be removed


Screws that must notbe removed

Glassholding plate

2

3-C-2

READ SECTION

[3] Removing and Reinstalling the

CCD unit


Caution: Be sure to perform image adjustment afterinstalling the CCD unit. (Refer tothe “Adjustment” section.)

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the original glass.

(2) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the photo-sensor.

(3) Remove the scanner drive board cover while beingcareful not to strike the claw.

(4) Remove the 8 set screws, and remove the lensshield cover.

(5) Remove the 3 set screws, and remove the ribboncable cover.

(6) Remove the ribbon cable from the CCD unit board.

(7) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the CCDunit.


Caution: Be careful to avoid damage to the ribboncable when removing it. When reinstallingit, be sure that it is securely in place.Be sure to install the optics drive board coverin the direction such that the word “REAR”can be read from the front of the machine.

Ribbon cablecover

Ribbon cable

CCD unitboard

Set screws

Lens shield cover

Photosensors2

Claw Scanner drive board cover

Scanner driveboard 2

2

2

3-C-3

READ SECTION

[4] Replacing the Exposure Lamp

Caution: Be sure that the power cord has beenunplugged from the outlet.

Do not touch the exposure lamp'slamp area with bare hands.

Caution: Be sure to clean original glass beforereinstalling it.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the read right cover and the original glass.

(2) Remove the operation panel, the read left cover,and the read rear cover.

(3) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the readfront cover.

(4) Shift the exposure unit to the cutout location at thecenter of the main body frame.

(5) Remove the 2 set screws (through the holes in theframe), and remove the auxiliary reflecting mirror.

(6) Remove the 1 connector and 2 set screws. Tilt andremove the exposure lamp.


Caution: Be careful when reinstalling theoriginal glass. To install: push theglass against the left rear of the readoutrear exterior, then hold the readoutfront cover against with glass holdplate.

And further, hold the glass plate, whilepressing the cut portion of the read leftcover.

(5) Operation panel(1) Read right cover

(3) Read left cover

(6) Readfront cover

(2) Original glass

(4) Read rear cover

Auxiliaryreflecting mirrorSet screws

* Remove above parts inorder of numbers.

Exposure unit

Cutout

Set screws

Exposure lampConnector

2

3-C-4

READ SECTION


Exposure Unit


Caution: Be sure to the use optics positioning jigwhen reinstalling the exposure unit.

Be sure to clean the original glass beforereinstalling it (to prevent degradation ofimage quality).

a. Removal procedure

(1) Remove the read right cover and the original glass.

(2) Remove the operation panel, read left cover, andread rear cover.

(3) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the readfront cover.

(4) Shift the exposure unit to the cutout location at thecenter of the main body frame.

(5) The exposure unit is fixed in place by set screwsfastened to the front and rear exposure unit mountfittings (1 screw in each fitting). Remove the 2screws.

(6) Tilt and slide the exposure unit to remove it fromthe frame.

(7) Disconnect the exposure lamp connector.

b. Installation procedure

(1) Fit the exposure unit into the main body.

(2) Insert the front exposure unit mount fitting andrear exposure unit mount fitting into thecorresponding slits in the exposure unit.

(3) Shift the V mirror unit to the exit side. Through thefront, insert the two optics positioning jigs so thatthey are at the installation location for the exposureunit. Pass the jig through the V mirror unit to fastenit in place.

Position the exposure unit by pushing it against theframe on the right side of the unit.

(4) Fasten the front and rear exposure unit mountfittings into place (1 screw in each fitting).

(5) Remove the optics positioning jigs.

(6) Finish installation by reversing the sequence of theremoval procedure.

Set screwsExposure unit

Exposure unit

V mirror unit

Exposure unitmount fitting(rear)Exposure unit

mount fitting(front)

Opticspositioningjigs

Exposure unitmount fittings

1

3-C-5

READ SECTION


Optics Drive Motor

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the original glass.

(2) Remove the 3 set screws, and remove the opticalmotor.

(3) When reinstalling the optics drive motor, tighten thescrews in sequence while gently applying a load(approximately 1 kg) to the arrow direction.

[7] Removing the Optics Wire

Caution1: There are two types of optics wire inexistence (the old type: with a spring, andthe new type: without a spring), so whenremoving them, reference should be madeto the removal method for each type.

Caution2: When removing or reinstalling optics wires,be sure to the use optics positioning jig.

Be sure to perform image adjustment afterreplacing or reinstalling the wire. (Fordetails, refer to “Adjustment section”.)

Caution3: When removing optics wires, the screwsshown in the figure below should absolutelynot be removed.

a. Procedure (Old Type: With a spring)

(1) Unfasten and remove all externals from the read unit.

(2) Shift the V mirror unit to the left side. Through thefront, insert the optics positioning jig so that it is atthe V mirror attachment location. Pass the jigthrough the V mirror unit to fasten the it in place.

(3) Remove the exposure unit.

(4) Detach the springs and spring axes from the endsof the front and rear optics wires (1 spring on eachwire), and remove the wires.

(5) Remove the set screws holding the two drive pulleybearings in place (two screws on each pulley), andremove the bearings.

(6) Remove the front and rear optics wires from thedrive pulleys.

Caution: Do not change the position of the paint-locked nut on the spring shaft.

Belt

Optics wire (rear)

Optics wire (front)

V mirror unit

Exposure unit

Set screws

Optical motor

Drivepulleys

Bearing

Bearing Springs/Spring axis

(3)

(2)

(1)

Nut

Nut

2

2

2


CCD unit

3-C-6

READ SECTION

[8] Installing the Optics Wire

Caution 1: When winding wire around pulleys, besure that the winds are close. Becareful to avoid overlap.

Caution 2: When changing the wire, be sure touse the optics positioning jigs.

Caution 3: Be sure to perform image adjustment afterinstalling the CCD unit. (Refer to the“Adjustment” section.)

a. Procedure (Old Type: With a spring)

(1) Fit the metal ball (midway along each optics wire)into the mount opening on the drive pulley. Startingfrom this position, wind 6 times around the outsideand 5 times around the inside.

• After winding the wires, fasten them in place (withtape, etc.) so that they cannot come off.

• Use the “F” exposure unit mount fitting (the fittingwith the “F” printed on it) at the front, and use the“R” fitting at the rear.

• The end with the metal ball at the tip winds aroundthe inside of the pulley shaft.

• Wind so that the two ends of the wire come off thetop of the pulley.

6 winds5 winds

Tape

Rear

Front

Drivepulleys

(Front)

(Rear)

Tape

6 winds 5 winds

a. Procedure (New Type: Without a spring)

(1) Unfasten and remove all externals from the readunit.

(2) Shift the V mirror unit to the left side. Through thefront, insert the optics positioning jig so that it is atthe V mirror attachment location. Pass the jigthrough the V mirror unit to fasten the it in place.

(3) Remove the exposure unit.

(4) Detach the nuts and washers from the ends of thefront and rear optics wires, and remove the wires.

(5) Remove the set screws holding the two drive pulleybearings in place (two screws on each pulley), andremove the bearings.

(6) Remove the front and rear optics wires from thedrive pulleys.

2

Optics wire (front)

V mirror unit

Exposure unit

Drive pulleys

Bearing

Bearing Nut

NutOptics wire (rear)

2

3-C-7

READ SECTION

(2) On the metal ball side, pass the optics wire so thatit passes under the V mirror unit, through the leftside pulley, and through the inside pulley on the Vmirror unit. Hook the end of the wire onto the cutouton the frame.

(3) Pass the wire on the round-end side through theright side pulley. Then, pass the wire over thepulley on the outside of the V mirror unit, pass itunder the V mirror unit, and fix it with spring shaft ofthe right side frame. Subsequently, hook thespring, pull the spring shift in the arrow direction,and check whether the tension of the nut departingfrom the read section is kept in 0.5 - 0.8 kg. If thetension is not kept in 0.5 - 0.8 kg, be sure to adjustthe nut.

(4) Fasten the drive pulley bearings into place with theattachment screws (2 screws each).

(5) Using the optics positioning jigs to install theexposure unit.

(6) Remove the jigs.

(7) Slide the exposure unit two or three times to makesure that it works correctly.

a. Procedure (New Type: Without a spring)

(1) Fit the metal ball (midway along each optics wire)into the mount opening on the drive pulley. Startingfrom this position, wind 6 times around the outsideand 5 times around the inside.

• After winding the wires, fasten them in place (withtape, etc.) so that they cannot come off.

• Use the “F” exposure unit mount fitting (the fittingwith the “F” printed on it) at the front, and use the“R” fitting at the rear.

• The end with the metal ball at the tip winds aroundthe inside of the pulley shaft.

• Wind so that the two ends of the wire come off thetop of the pulley.

6 winds5 winds

Tape

Rear

Front

Drivepulleys

(Front)

(Rear)

Tape

6 winds 5 winds

4

Nut

Nut

Metal ball V mirror unit

Pulley

Pulley

To metalball

To metalball

Spring shaft Spring

Optics positioning jigs

V mirror unit

3-C-8

READ SECTION

(2) On the metal ball side, pass the optics wire so thatit passes under the V mirror unit, through the leftside pulley, and through the inside pulley on the Vmirror unit. Hook the end of the wire onto the cutouton the frame.

(3) On the right side, pass the wire so that it passesthrough the right side pulley, passes over the pulleyon the outside of the V mirror unit, and passesunder the V mirror unit. Fasten the end to the rightside frame with the spring.

(4) Pull the front and rear optics wires temporarilyfastened with a spring balancer in the arrowdirection, and fix the nuts with the tension of the nutdeparting from the read section kept in 0.9 - 1.5 kg.

(5) Fasten the drive pulley bearings into place with theattachment screws (2 screws each).

(6) Using the optics positioning jigs to install theexposure unit.

(7) Remove the jigs.

(8) Slide the exposure unit two or three times to makesure that it works correctly.

Nut

Nut

Metal ball V mirror unit

Pulley

Optics positioning jigs

V mirror unit

Pulley

To metalball

To metalball

4

3-D-1

WRITE UNIT

(3) Remove the write cleaning knob from the dustproof glass cleaning rod and then puch the rod toinside of main body.

(4) Remove the 11 set screws, and remove the writecover.


Write Unit

Warning:

(1) Never supply power while the write unit is outof its proper installed position.

(2) Do not open the cover of the write unit whilepower is being supplied. Shining of the laserbeam on the eye may cause blindness.

(3) After turning the main power switch OFF, waitat least two minutes before removing thewrite unit.


Caution: (1) When removing the write unit, takecare to avoid touching with the writemirror and the dust proof glass. (Touching theseareas may leave scratches and smudges.)

(2) When installing the write unit, confirm that thePET sheet at the end is seated correctly in theduct.

a. Procedure

(1) Open the front door and remove the drum unit andthe developing unit.

(2) Remove the exit tray, open the ADU door, andremove the main body front cover. Remove the siderear cover, the main-body upper cover, and themain-body auxiliary cover.

WRITE UNIT

(4) Main body auxiliary cover

(3) Main body upper cover

(2) Side rear cover

*Remove above parts in order of numbers.

Cleaning knob

Write unit coverSet screws

3

(1) Main body front cover

Front door

Filter cover assembly(other than 7020/25/30)

3-D-2

WRITE UNIT

(5) Remove the two write unit mount pieces (each isheld in place by set screw).

(6) Disconnect the 3 connectors.

(7) Remove the 3 set screws (SEMS II: long screws),and remove the write unit by pulling it to the left.Also, remove the air duct connected to the fan.

Setscrews

Write unitSet screws

Write unit mount pieces

2


Note: Reinstall the write unit while inserting the frontedge of the cooling air guide PET into thespecified position.

Connectors

Cooling air guide PET

Airduct Printer drive board

Connector

3-E-1

DRUM UNIT

DRUM UNIT[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Drum Unit


Caution 1: After removing the drum unit, close thedrum cover and store the unit in a darkplace.

Caution 2: During removal and reinstallation work,never rotate the drum in the wrongdirection (in the direction opposite tothe direction it moves during normalcopying). Rotating the drum in thereverse direction may cause scratchesto the cleaning blade.

a. Procedure

(1) Open the front door, loosen the set screw, andgently pull the developing unit out toward you.

(2) Open the ADU door, and open the conveyanceunit.

(3) Loosen the set screw, and gently pull the drum unitout toward you until it stops. Then tilt it slightly andremove it.


Drum unit

ADU doorConveyance unit

Front door


Drum

Caution 1: Take care to avoid scratching thedrum's light sensitive areas and thecleaning blade. Do not touch theseareas with bare hands.

Caution 2: When removing or installing, neverallow the drum to bump against theplate-metal part of the cleaning blade.

Caution 3: If you are going to place the drum instorage, be sure to place a cover onthe drum (to cut off light to it) and storeit in a dark place.

Caution 4: Before installing the drum and cleaningblade (regardless of whether new orused), be sure to coat these withsetting powder. Apply the powderaround the entire drum, and on bothsides of the blade.

Caution 5: If you have coated setting powder ontothe drum: Before installing the drumunit back into the main body, use analcohol-soaked cloth to remove straypowder from the sensor surface on thetoner control sensor board. This isnecessary to ensure that accuratetoner density readings are obtained.

Caution 6: Be sure that the drum is orientedcorrectly before installing it. Theconvex end (bulging end) should befacing the rear.

Caution 7: After installing a new drum, be sure to resetthe drum-related counters in the 36 mode.

Caution 8: When removing the drum unit, do not placeyour hand on the separation claw unit.

<Handling the drum unit>

2

2

* Do not touch the separation claw unit.

3-E-2

DRUM UNIT

(8) Remove the 2 semicircular seal blocks (one oneach end of the drum).

(9) To remove the drum, push it back toward the rearand lift it up and out from the front.

b. Installing procedure

Caution: Be sure that the toner collection sheetmakes contact with the entire span of thedrum, with no gaps.

(1) Coat the entire surface of the drum with settingpowder.

(2) Fit the convex end of the drum into the rear side ofthe unit, then set the drum down into the unit.Reattach the two seal blocks (one at each end ofthe drum).

(3) Reattach the drum bearing. Fasten it into place withthe 2 set screws.

(4) Insert the drum shaft and reattach the stopper.

a. Removing procedure

(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.

(2) Set the unit so the drum is to the top.

(3) Remove the cleaning rod's shaft stopper fitting,and pull out the cleaning rod.

(4) Disconnect the connector from the drum unit.

(5) Remove the two set screws, then disengage the rearof the charging corona unit in the direction of a, andremove the charging corona unit in the direction of b.

(6) Remove the stopper ring, and pull out the drumshaft.

(7) Remove the 2 set screws holding the drum bearingin place, and remove the bearing.

Stopper ring

Drum bearing

Seal blocks

Drum

Seal block 1 (front)

Seal block 2 (rear)

2

22

Charging corona unit

Stopperfitting

Clearning rod

Set screw

Drum shaft

Connector

2

*Scerw that mustnot be removed

3-E-3

DRUM UNIT

(5) Using the jig included on the drum unit cover,rotate the drum clockwise and confirm that thereare no gaps in the setting powder coat, and thatthe toner collection sheet and cleaning blade aresmooth, etc.

(6) Install the charging corona unit. Fasten it intoplace with 2 set screws.


Separation Claw

Caution 1: While removing or installing the claw,be careful to avoid damage to thedrum.

Caution 2: When installing the claw, be sure that itis correctly oriented and positioned.

Caution 3: Do not touch the cleaning blade or thedrum's light sensitive areas with barehands.

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the drum from the drum unit.

(3) Disconnect the relay connector.

(4) Remove the separation rock spring.

(5) Remove the 2 positioning screws and the 2 collars,and then remove the separation claw unit.

(6) Pull out the separation fulcrum shaft while pressingdown the claw and remove the 2 separation claws.


Jig

Positioning screws

Relay Connector

Separation claw unit

Separationrock spring

Separationfulcrum shaft

Separation claw

Collars

2

Claw

2

2

2

3-E-4

DRUM UNIT

Blank

3-F-1

CORONA UNIT SECTION


Charge Control Plate

Caution: When reinstalling, be sure to setthe charge control plate so that thespring held end is toward the frontof the charging corona unit.

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the charging corona unit. Move thecharging cleaning block to its home position (at theright side).

(3) Remove the 2 charge control springs, and removethe charge control plate.

(4) To clean, use: Tap lightly with a cloth soaked indrum cleaner, then use a blower brush to removeremaining debris.


CORONA UNIT SECTION[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Charging Corona Unit


a. Procedure


(2) Remove the cleaning rod's shaft stopper fitting, andpull out the cleaning rod.

(3) Disconnect the connector from the drum unit.

(4) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the chargingcorona unit by pulling it out from the rear.


Charge controlsprings

Charging corona unit

Stopperfitting

Cleaning rod

Connector

Charge control plate

1

Set screw

3-F-2

CORONA UNIT SECTION


Transfer/Separation Corona Unit


a. Procedure

(1) Open the ADU door.

(2) Pull the conveyance unit toward you to open.

(3) Push the left catch of the transfer/separation coronaunit, then remove the unit.


Caution: When installing the Transfer/Separationcorona unit, be sure that the cleaningmaterial is in home position at the right side.

Conveyance unit

Transfer/Separationcorona unit

[3] Replacing the Charging Wire

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the charging corona unit. Move thecharging cleaning block to its home position (at theright side).

(3) Remove the charge control plate.

(4) Remove the 2 charging covers (charging rearcover, and charging front cover).

(5) Remove the spring, and remove the charging wire.

(6) To install the replacement wire: first fasten the rearend of the wire to the unit, then pass the wirethrough the charging cleaning block and fix it inplace with the spring. Then complete theinstallation by reversing the steps above.

Spring

Charging front cover

Charging rear cover

Charging wire

1

1

3-F-3

CORONA UNIT SECTION

(3) Remove the front and rear spark arrestor plates.

(4) Move the cleaning block to home position, andremove the top covers from the cleaning block.

(5) Remove the spring from each wire, and remove thewires.


Caution: When installing the wire, be sure that thecleaning block is in home position at theright side. Stretch the wire so that it fits intothe V holders.

[5] Replacing the Transfer and

Separation Wires

Caution: Do not remove the paper entrance guideplate.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unitfrom the main body.

(2) Use a tweezers to remove the hook from thetransfer and separation corona unit. Then removethe plunging prevention plate.

Plunging preventionplate

Spark arrestor plate(rear)

Top covers

Paper entrance guide plate

Spark arrestor plate(front)

V holder

V holder

Springs

2


3-F-4

CORONA UNIT SECTION

Blank

3-G-1

DEVELOPING UNIT


Developing Unit

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the set screw fastening the developingunit in place.

(2) Pull the developing unit outward to remove.

(3) To reinstall: Fit the rails on the bottom of thedeveloping unit onto the grooves on the main body,and slide the unit into place. Then fasten into placewith the attachment screw.

DEVELOPING UNIT[1] Screws That Must Not be Removed

Caution: The 4 set screws below must not beremoved or adjusted in the field. Please donot interfere with these screws.

Screw that must not be removed

Screw that must notbe removed

Set screwDeveloping unit

2


3-G-2

DEVELOPING UNIT

(3) Release the hooks. Lift the developing cover, andremove it.

(4) Tilt the developing unit so that the agitator screwsare toward the bottom, and rotate the agitator inputgear counterclockwise as necessary to dischargeall developer from within the developing unit andfrom the developing sleeve.

(5) Wipe away any toner remaining on the developingregulator plate.

(6) Pour new developer evenly over the agitator screws.

[3] Replacing the Developer

Caution 1: When carrying out replacement, takecare to prevent dirt and debris fromentering the system.

Caution 2: After installing new developer, do notturn the developer-input gear oragitator input gear in the clockwise(reverse) direction.

Caution 3: After replacing developer, carry out Ldetection adjustment before makingcopies.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the developing unit from the main body.

(2) Remove the 2 set screws holding the developingcover in place.

Caution : The 2 set screws of the developingcover are used only in an old typemachines (7020/25/30/35).

Developing input gear

Developing cover

Hook

Developingregulator plate

Agitator screws

Agitator input gear

Set screw

Developing cover

3

3-G-3

DEVELOPING UNIT

(7) Rotate the agitator input gear 1 counterclockwiseso that the developer moves into the inside of thedeveloping unit.

(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) as necessary to load all ofthe developer.

(9) Rotate the developing input gear counterclockwiseand check the bristle height along the entiresurface of the developing sleeve.

(10) Reinstall the developing cover, and fasten it inplace with the 2 set screws. Be careful to keep thecover clear of the scatter prevention sheet.

Scatter prevention sheet

Developing input gear 1

2

3-G-4

DEVELOPING UNIT

Blank

3-H-1

TONER SUPPLY UNIT


Toner Supply Unit

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the toner bottle.

(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Remove the overall control board unit.

Caution: Note that there are numerous connectorsconnected to the overall control board. Youcan either disconnect the connectors, or keepthe board close to its present location.

(4) Remove the set screw, and remove the drumrotating plate.

(5) Remove the 3 connectors.

(6) Remove the 4 set screws, and remove the toner-supply unit by pulling it toward you.



Toner Bottle

a. Procedure

(1) Open the front cover, and then open the toner-supply cover.

(2) Pull the toner bottle slightly out, and turn itclockwise so that the upper part of the cartridgealigns with the cutout.

(3) Withdraw the toner bottle.


TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Toner bottle Set screws

ConnectorToner supply unit

Front door

Toner supply cover

2

3-H-2

TONER SUPPLY UNIT

Blank

3-I-1


(5) Remove the cleaning blade.


Caution: When installing the cleaning blade, installso that the unit's transparent sheet is ori-ented as shown in the diagram.

CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Cleaning Blade


Caution 1: Be careful of the cleaning blade edge.Do not touch the edge with bare hands,and take care to avoid scratching it.

Caution 2: Before installing the drum and cleaningblade (regardless of whether new orused), be sure to coat these with set-ting powder. Apply the powder aroundthe entire drum, and on both sides ofthe blade.

Caution 3: If you have coated setting powder ontothe drum: Before installing the drumunit rear into the main body, use andrum cleaner cloth to remove straypowder from the sensor surface on thetoner control sensor board. This is nec-essary to ensure that accurate tonerdensity readings are obtained.

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the charging corona unit.

(3) Remove the drum from the drum unit.

(4) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the fitting(suppressor piece) holding the cleaning blade inplace.

Set screws

Suppressorpiece

Cleaning blade

Collected tonerconveyance screw Transparent sheet

Cleaningblade

1

1

3-I-2


Blank

3-J-1

PAPER FEED UNIT

(4) Remove the stopper ring and the bearing.

(5) Remove the 2 set screws, and slide the bypasspaper feed unit left to remove it from the bypassdrive shaft, so that the by-pass pickup roller comesoff.

(6) Remove the 2 stopper rings.

(7) Pull out the bypass conveyance shaft, andremove the bypass conveyance roller.


Caution: When reinstalling rollers, pay attention totheir orientation.

[1] Replacing the Bypass Pickup

Roller/Bypass Conveyance Roller

a. Procedure

(1) Open the bypass tray.

(2) Remove the 3 set screws and remove the plate.

(3) Remove the 2 set screws and the connector, thenremove the bypass sensor.

PAPER FEED UNIT

Set screws

Plate

Set screwsBypass sensor

Bypass paper feed unit Bypass drive shaft

Stopper ring Bearing

Stopper ring

By-passconveyanceshaft

Bypassconveyanceroller

Stopper ring

Painting mark

Painting mark

Bypasspickup roller

1

3-J-2

PAPER FEED UNIT

[2] Replacing the Bypass Reversal

Roller

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the bypass feed roller unit.

(2) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the unit.

(3) Remove the 2 stopper rings, and pull out the shaft.

(4) Remove the 2 stop rings and the E ring, then pullout the shaft to the side where there is no E ring.


Bypass feed roller unit

Set screws

Stopperrings

Shaft

Bypassreversal roller

[3] Replacing the Feed Rubber and the

Double Feed Prevention Upper

Rubber (Upper Tray)

a. Procedure

(1) Open the ADU door, and then open the conveyanceunit.

(2) Remove the developing unit, the drum unit and thewrite unit.

(3) Slide the upper tray out. Remove the 2 set screwsholding the tray in place, and take the tray off.

(4) Remove the paper feed roller cover in the direction ofarrow 1 while pushing it in the direction of arrow 2.

Upper tray

Set screws

Paper feed roller cover

Pulley

Spring

Spring

E-ring

4

Paint mark

3-J-3

PAPER FEED UNIT

(5) Remove the 2 stopper rings, and remove thebearings from the plate.

(6) Lift the left shaft and remove the feed roller unit.

(7) Pull out the feed shaft, and remove the double feedprevention roller (upper).

(8) Remove the stopper ring, pull the guide shaft out ofthe feed roller unit, and remove the feed roller.

(9) Remove the feed rubber from the feed roller.

(10) Remove the feed shaft and then remove the doublefeed prevention roller (upper).

(11) Remove the double feed prevention upper rubber(upper) from the double feed prevention roller (upper).


Caution: Be sure to install the roller rubbers in thecorrect direction.

Install so that the swing shaft goes to theinside of the feed roller unit.

Feed roller unitStopperrings

Feed roller

Feed shaft

Double-feed prevention roller (upper)

Bearings

Swing shaft

Feed rubber Feed roller

Double feed preventionroller (upper)

Feed shaft

Stopper ringPaint mark

[4] Replacing the Double Feed

Prevention Lower Rubber (Upper

Tray)

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the developing unit and the drum unit.


(4) Remove the set screw, and remove the plate. Thenremove the set screw fastening the double feedprevention roller unit in place.

(5) From the inside of the main body, press on the twoends of the roller unit and remove it.

Set screws

Upper tray

Double feed prevention unit

Set screw

Set screw

Plate

Guide shaft

2

Double feed preventionupper rubber (upper)

Stopper rings

2

3-J-4

PAPER FEED UNIT

(6) While pressing on the lever on the lever click shaft,pull out the shaft and then remove the double feedprevention roller.

(7) Remove the double feed prevention lower rubberfrom the roller.


Caution: Be sure to install the roller rubbers in thecorrect orientation.

: When installing the double feed preventionunit into the main body, align the unit withthe center of the marking stamped on themain-body plate.

[5] Replacing the Feed Rubber and

Double Feed Prevention Upper

Rubber (Lower Tray)

a. Procedure



(3) Slide the lower tray out. Remove the 2 set screwsholding the tray in place, and take the tray off.

(4) Remove the set screw, and remove the plate.

Double feedprevention roller

Lever click shaft

Paint mark

Double feedpreventionlower rubber

Lower tray

Set screws

Plate

Set screw

1

1

3-J-5

PAPER FEED UNIT

(5) Remove the 2 stopper rings, and remove thebearings from the plate.

(6) Lift the left shaft and remove the feed roller unit.

(7) Pull out the feed shaft and remove the double feedprevention roller (upper).

(8) Remove the 1 stopper ring, pull the guide shaft outof the feed roller unit, and remove the feed roller.

(9) Remove the feed rubber from the feed roller.

(10) Remove the feed shaft and then remove the doublefeed prevention roller (upper).

(11) Remove the double feed prevention upper rubber(upper) from the double feed prevention roller (upper).


Caution: Be sure to install the roller rubbers in thecorrect direction.

Install so that the swing shaft goes to theinside of the feed roller unit.

Stopper rings

Feed roller unit

Swingshaft

Bearings

Feedshaft

Feed rubber Feed roller

Guide shaft

Double feedpreventionroller (upper)

Feed shaft

Stopper ringPaint mark

Double feedprevention upperrubber (upper)

2

2

3-J-6

PAPER FEED UNIT

[6] Replacing the DF Prevention Lower

Rubber (Lower Tray)

a. Procedure




(4) Open the guide plate, and remove the set screwfastening the double feed prevention roller unit inplace.

(5) From the inside of the main body, press on the twoends of the roller unit and remove it.

(6) While pressing on the lever on the lever click shaft,pull out the shaft and then remove the double feedprevention roller.

(7) Remove the double feed prevention lower rubberfrom the roller.


[7] Replacing the Registration Rollers

1 and 2

a. Procedure





(5) Remove the registration clutch.

(6) Remove the all external cover from the front.

(7) Stretch the 2 registration springs (front and rear)upward and remove them from the flanges on theregistration bearings.

Registrationroller (1)

Registration roller (2)

Registrationbearings

Registration spring

Registration springE-rings

E-rings

Registration bearings

Set screw

Guide plate

Double feed preventionroller unit

Double feedprevention roller

Lever click shaft

Paint mark

Double feed preventionlower rubber

1

11

3-J-7

PAPER FEED UNIT

(8) Remove the E-ring and registration bearing at eachend of each shaft (4 E-rings and 4 bearings intotal).

Caution: Be careful to avoid dropping E-rings andbearings into the main unit.

(9) Remove the registration rollers from the interior ofthe main body.


Caution: Install each registration bearing so that theflat part is flush on the inside.

Leave the registration springs hooked (donot unhook them) when removing andreinstalling them. Install the springs so thatthe hook part is located at the top betweenthe two shafts.

Registration roller (2)Registrationbearings

Registration spring

Registration spring

E-rings

E-rings

Registration bearingsRegistration roller (1)

[8] Cleaning Paper Dust Removing Brush

a. Removal procedure

(1) Open the ADU door, and open the conveyance unit.


(3) Remove the paper dust removing brush.

To remove the brush, raise the A part anddisengage the claw, then pull out the brush in thedirection of the arrow.

Caution: Do not bend the metal plate of the paperdust removing brush.

(4) Clean the PET sheet and the plastic part using acleaning pad and a blower brush.

b. Installation procedure

(1) Insert the paper dust removing brush from the B(rear) side, and confirm that the hole in the brush isengaged with the claw.

(2) After this, install the brush using the reverseprocedure to removal.

Paper dust removing brush Claw

A

PET sheet

Plastic part

Hole

Claw

B

3

3-J-8

PAPER FEED UNIT

Blank

3-K-1

FIXING UNIT

FIXING UNIT[1] Removing and Reinstalling the

Fixing Unit


The fixing unit remains extremely hotimmediately after power is switchedOFF. To avoid injury from burns, do notbegin work until the fixing unit hascooled down sufficiently.

Caution: When installing the fixing unit, besure to firmly tighten the unit's 2 setscrews.

a. Procedure

(1) Open the ADU door and the conveyance unit, andloosen the 2 set screws holding the fixing unit inplace.

(2) Pull the fixing unit out toward you and remove it.

Caution: Do not touch the areas shown in thediagram above when attaching orremoving the fixing unit. Observe care,as force applied to the fixing web mayresult in the rollers being scratched.


Set screws

Conveyanceunit

[2] Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps

(Main Lamp and Sub Lamp)

Caution: Do not touch the lamp area withbare hands.

Caution 1: When installing, be sure that manufac-turer's mark is mounted on the frontside.

Caution 2: Do not allow the heater lamps to makecontact with the inside of the roller.

Caution 3: Install so that the main lamp is at thetop, and the sub lamp is at the bottom.

Heater cords are color-coded asfollows.

Color Positions JAPAN

Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

WhiteBlack

WhiteWhite

RedBlack

RedRed

BlueBlack

BlueBlue

U.S.A.EUROPEOTHERS

Lamp

MainSub

Caution 4: When installing the faston terminal onthe drive gear side, be sure that theinstallation position is correct.

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the fixing unit from the main body.

(2) Remove the set screws, and remove the twocovers (fixing front cover, and fixing rear cover).

Fixing front cover

Fixing rear cover

Set screwsFixing unit

2

<Handling the fixing unit>

FIXING UNIT

3-K-2

(3) Detach the faston terminal at the rear of eachlamp.

(4) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the lampsupport piece (front).

(5) Detach the faston terminal at the front of eachlamp.

(6) Keeping all cord faston terminal wiring straight, pulleach fixing heater lamp toward you to remove.


Fastenterminals

Fasten terminals

Fixing heater lampsSub

Main


Fixing Claw

Caution 1: When installing the fixing claw, besure that it is oriented correctly.

Caution 2: Be sure that the claw is securelyattached to the claw spring.

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the fixingexit plate.

(3) Remove the 4 set screws, and remove the fixingclaw unit.

(4) Unhook the spring, and remove the fixing claw.

Caution: The number of fixing claws installeddiffers according to the particularmodel.

7020/25/30/35 : 6 claws7022/7130/7135 : 4 claws


Fixing exit plate

Fixing claw unit

Set screw

Set screw Set screws

Spring

Fixing claw

Lamp support piece(front)

Set screws

4

3-K-3

FIXING UNIT

[4] Replacing the Fixing Web/Fixing

Cleaning Roller

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the fixing claw unit.

(3) Detach the connectors, remove the set screw atthe bottom and the 2 set screws (Note 1) on thecleaning unit, and then remove the cleaning unit bypulling it out from the fixing unit.

(4) Remove the 3 set screws and remove the 3 fixing-web bearings. Remove the web together with theentire shaft.

Connectors

Set screws

Cleaning unit

Bearing

Bearings

(5) Detach the springs from the bearings for the fixingcleaning roller, and remove the E-ring from theshaft. Move the shaft and take off the bearings. Youcan then remove the fixing cleaning roller.


Note 1: Tighten the setscrews of the cleaning unitwhile pressing down on the cleaning unit.

Note 2:After replacing the fixing web, wind it upuntil the end with the green line is within0~10 mm of the nip of the fixing heat rollerand the fixing cleaning roller.

Fixing cleaning roller

Bearings

Springs

3

Fixing heatroller


Fixing web

Green line

Nip

0~10mm

FIXING UNIT

3-K-4


Fixing Heat Roller/Fixing Pressure

Roller

a. Procedure



(3) Remove the fixing cleaning unit.

(4) Remove the two fixing heater lamps

(5) Remove the 2 set screws and 2 collars for theconnector that was connected to the fastonterminal. Remove the connector.

(6) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the lampsupport piece (rear).

(7) Open the fixing guide to release the pressure.

(8) Remove the ring at the rear of the heat roller, andthen remove the gear and heat insulating sleeve A,B.

(9) Remove another ring, then remove the heatinsulating sleeve A (the sleeve toward the front).Then remove the heat roller.

Ring

Heat insulatingsleeve A

(10) Remove the 2 fixing bearings (one at the front, oneat the rear) from the unit.

(11) Remove the pressure roller.


Caution: Be sure that heat insulating sleeves A andB are oriented and positioned correctly.

When replacing the heating insulatingsleve/A, apply solvest 240 to the insideand outside surfaces of the heat insulationsleeve/A and then install it.

Fixing pressureroller

Connector

Set screws

Fasten terminals

Lamp support piece(rear)


Fixing bearings

Gear

Heat insulatingsleeve B

Gear


Heatinsulatingsleeve B

Heat roller

Set screws

1

1

1

solvest 240

3-K-5

FIXING UNIT


Fixing Temperature Sensors

Caution: After installing the fixing temperaturesensors:

Make sure that the wire bundles arenot in contact with the fixing heatroller.

Make sure that the sensors them-selves (the sensor areas) are incontact with the fixing heat roller.

a. Procedure




(4) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the fixingtemperature sensors.


Caution: When installing the sensors, attach thelonger wire bundle to the center of the unit.Make sure that the sensors are in contactwith the heat roller.

Fixingtemperaturesensors

Set screws


Fuse Mounting Plate Assembly

Caution: This is an important safety part. (P/N:SP00-0110) Be sure to observethe following cautions and stepswhen removing or reinstalling.

Caution: After installing the thermostat:Make sure that the wire bundle isnot in contact with the fixing heatroller.

Make sure that the thermostat itselfis in contact with the fixing heatroller.

a. Procedure


(2) Remove the fixing front and rear cover.

(3) Remove the fixing exit plate.



(6) Remove the heat roller.

(7) Detach the thermostat 2 Faston terminals.

(8) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the Fusemounting plate assembly.


Caution: When installing the Fuse mountingplate assembly, install so that the baseplate fits between the unit's sheetmetal.Make sure that the thermostat is incontact with the heat roller.

3

Set screws

ThermostatFaston terminals

Fuse mounting plateassenbly

FIXING UNIT

3-K-6

Blank

3-L-1


ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION[1] Removing and Reinstalling the Exit

Sensor Unit (7020/25/30/35 only)

a. Procedure

(1) Remove the read right cover.

(2) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the rightside cover (upper).

(3) Remove the 2 set screws, and remove the cover.

(4) Remove the 2 set screws (by inserting the screw-driver through the holes in the sheet metal). Detachthe connector at the side of the sheet metal, andremove the exit sensor unit/1.

Cover

3 3

Set screws

Setscrews

Exit sensor unit/1Connector

Connector

(5) Remove the set screw (again, by inserting thescrewdriver through the hole), and remove the exitlimit detection actuator.(Old type 7020/25/30/35only)


Exit limit detection actuator

Set screw

3-L-2


Blank

ADJUSTMENT

4

ADJUSTMENT

4-1

HOW TO USE THEADJUSTMENT SECTION

[1] Construction

This section details adjusting items and procedures. Usethis section for making adjustments and as a checklistbefore implementing corrective measures in the field.

1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?

2. Is the power supply properly grounded?

3. Is the machine sharing its power source with anotherhigh current consumption machine that draws largecurrents intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air condi-tioner, or other source of electrical consumption)

4. Is the installation environment suitable?

a. The machine must be installed in a well-ventilated place free from high temperature, highhumidity and direct sunlight.

b. The machine must be installed on a level floor.

5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the originalitself?

6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper position?

7. Are the original glass and RADF platen guide clean?

8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?

9. Are the copying materials and parts replaced whenthey reach the end of their usable life? (developer,drum, cleaning blade, etc.)

10. Is there toner in the toner bottle?

The following items should also be observed whenrepairing the machine.

1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnectedwhen the main power of this machine is turned off.Always unplug the machine before beginning work. Ifabsolutely necessary to work with the power on,exercise care to avoid being caught in the scanningrear of the exposure unit.

2. Special care should be taken when handling thefixing unit since it operates at extremely hightemperatures.

3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strongmagnetic field. Keep watches and meteringequipment away from it.

4. Avoid scarring the drum with tools or similar objects.

5. Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.

ADJUSTMENTS WHENREPLACING PARTS

Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not onlyrequired when a defective copy image occurs, but alsoafter replacing or reinstalling certain parts.

[How to use the tables]

The following items are used in the tables throughout thissection.

1. Mode

Indicates the adjustment mode.

[“25”] : 25 mode

[“36”] : 36 mode

[“47”] : 47 mode

2. Codes

Indicates the applicable code and/or Copy QuantitySetting button for each mode.

3. Conditions

New: Indicates adjustment (including check) isrequired when replacing a new part.

Reset: Indicates adjustment (including check) isrequired when a part has been re-installed.

4. Symbols used in the tables

1 2 ................. : Indicates there is a prioritysequence for adjustments(including checks) and settings.

(Empty circle) : Indicates adjustments (includingchecks) and settings that can becarried out independently.

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-2

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

List of adjustment items for 7020 series

Part name

Drum

Developer

Fixing unit-related parts

Writing unit

Parameter memory substrate

Paper feeding-related rubber rollers

RADF

RADF slit glass

E-RDH memory

Mode

Code

New

New

New

New/Re

New

New

New/Re

New

New/Re

25

2-1

25

2-2

36

1

36

2-1

36

2-1

36

2-1

36

2-2

36

2-3

36

2-4

36

2-5

36

2-6

36

6-2

36

8-1

36

8-2

47

198

36

2-2

Adj

ustm

ent s

ettin

g ite

ms

PM

cou

nter

res

et

PM

cyc

le s

et

L de

tect

ion

adju

stm

ent

Ver

tical

mag

nific

atio

n ad

just

men

t (pr

inte

r, p

late

n)

Ver

tical

mag

nific

atio

n ad

just

men

t (R

AD

F)

Hor

izon

tal m

agni

ficat

ion

adju

stm

ent (

plat

en)

Res

tart

tim

ing

adju

stm

ent (

Mai

nbod

y an

d D

B)

Res

tart

tim

ing

adju

stm

ent (

RA

DF

)

Pap

er fe

ed lo

op a

mou

nt a

djus

tmen

t

Lead

ing

edge

orig

inal

era

sure

adj

ustm

ent

Cen

terin

g ad

just

men

t

Imag

e re

ad p

oint

adj

ustm

ent

RA

DF

sca

nnin

g de

nsity

adj

ustm

ent

Dru

m u

nit r

elat

ed c

ount

er c

lear

ing

Fix

ing

unit

rela

ted

coun

ter

clea

ring

E-R

DH

mem

ory

chec

k

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

4

4

3

5

5

3

6

7

5

7

8 9

76

6

42

*2

*1

• "New" means replace with a new part and "Re" means to reinstall the part.

• The circles will appear above a number when there is an adjustment priority.

*1: When the parameter memory board is replaced, remember to replaced the developer before conducting the Ldeection adjustment.

*2: After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first carried out L detectionadjustment.

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-3

Each adjustment mode is selected by conducting specialoperations:

[1] Setting Method

The following modes can be selected on the screenwithout turning OFF/ON the power supply:

1. Normal mode

2. Adjustment mode (36 mode)

3. Memory setting mode (25 mode)

4. Key ope mode (Key operator mode)

5. I/O check mode (47 mode)

6. Exit

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation procedure

Turn on the main and sub power switches.

Keep pressing the * button until the message

“Please enter service password.” appears.

Input 9272 as the password and press the

[Start] key. (The password is fixed and cannot

be changed.)

[Mode Select Menu Screen]

Press the key of the mode to be selected on the

screen. To return to the Mode Change Menu

Screen, keep pressing the * button until the

screen appears.

When the adjustment ends, press

[1. Normal Mode] key and the basic screen will

appear.

MODE CHANGE MENU

ADJUSTMENT

4-4

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

The P function enables to display of the followingparameters by using the * button:

Total count

Total count start date (Note 1)

PM count/PM count limit (Note 2)

PM count start date (Note 2)

Fax send paper count (Note 3)

Fax receive paper count (Note 3)

Printer count (Note 3)

Scanner count (Note 3)

Drum count (Note 2)

Developing count (Note 2)

Fixing unit count (Note 2)

Note 1: Displayed only when address 22-4 of “1.Software switch setting” in the 25 mode isset to ‘1’.

Note 2: Displayed when the ! button on the P modescreen is pressed.

Note 3: Displayed when an option is installed.

CHECK OF COUNT VALUE WITH P FUNCTION[1] How to Use P Function

1. Turn on the SW1 (main power) and SW2(subpower) to display the basic screen.

2. Press the * button.

3. The P mode screen appears, and the total countvalue appears.

When an option is installed, the counter values forthe FAX, printer and scanner also appear.

The counter that appears differs depending uponthe installed option.

4. If you press the ! button on the P mode screen,service-related counters that indicate the PMcount, and so on, appear.

5. To output the count value list, press the [PRINT]key.

6. Press the [OK] key or the stop/clear button to returnto the basic screen.

P

1

1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-5

<List of adjustment items for 25 mode>

Adjustment item menu

1. Software SW

2. PM COUNT/CYCLE

3. Collecting data

4. Parts counter

5. Password setting

6. Service TEL No.

7. Serial number

8. ROM version

9. KRDS setting

10. ISW

11. Root counter

12. Setting date

13. Counter clear (Note)(Other then 7020/25/30/35)

Refer to “List of software DIP SW”.

41 items (7020/25/30 is the 39th item)

30 items

4 digits

8 digits

4 digits

Telephone & Fax. No. of service

center setting.

Sets up the serial number display of the main

body and each option, and the FAX destination.

Indicates the version of the ROM used for

overall control, image control, the operation

panel control, optics control, the RADF, the

finisher, FAX control, and printer.

Rewrites the contents of the flash ROM of

each board including boards used in options

except for a printer.

Displays the root counter (total

counter).

Sets the starting date of the total counter.

Clears the drum counter and the drum drive counter

Clear fixing web counter

1. PM COUNT reset

2. PM CYCLE set

1. Count data

2. Date count data

1. Count of parts (Fixed)

2. Count of parts (Named)

1. Key operator password set

2. E.K.C. master key code set

3. Weekly timer master key set

1. Calling time set

2. Host password set

3. KRDS TEL No. Setting

4. KRDS software SW set

5. KRDS Setup calling

1. Drum unit related counter

2. Fixing unit related counter

Data Collection 1

(by each size)

(RADF paper passage count)

Data Collection 2

(JAM occurrence count by each point)

Data Collection 3

(copy count by each mode)

Data Collection 4

(SC occurrence count : F code)

Remarks

Note: “13. Counter clear mode” is the same as “8. Counter clear” of the 36 mode.

25 MODE25

3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-6

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

[1] Setting Method

A special operating mode called “25 Mode” has beenprovided with this machine. This mode enables rewritingof the non-volatile storage and specify other varioussettings.

1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power) when the SW1(main power) remains ON.

2. Turn the SW2 (sub power) ON while pressing 2 and5 of the copy quantity setting buttons. The 25 modemenu screen will appear.

In the 25 mode normal copy operation becomesunavailable.

25 MODE MENU SCREEN

3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.

Each setting screen will appear.

3 Caution: In the case of a machine other thanthe 7020/25/30/35, the [ ▼ ] key isdisplayed at bottom left of the abovescreen. By pressing the [ ▼ ] key, the[13. Counter Clear] key appears.

4. Enter data in each selected screen.

5. Press the [Return] key to check the data that hasbeen entered.

6. Turn the SW2 (sub power) off to cancel the 25mode.

7. New data will be effective after restarting.

[2] Setting Software DIP SW

1. Setting method

This setting specifies the software DIP switch on thesoftware SW setting screen. (*1)

Caution 1: The bit of the DIP switch is written inthe non-volatile memory every time it ischanged.

Caution 2: The numbers shown in the messagearea are defined as follows:

Software SW

8-bit switch values in indicated inhexadecimals from 00 to FF.

04-7 : 1 A8

Bit data1 : ON0 : OFF

Bit number (0 to 7)

Switch number

2. Setting procedures

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 Mode.

[25 mode menu screen]

Press the [1. Software SW] key.

[Software SW setting screen]

Select DIP switch number.

Use the left [ ▲ ] , [ ▼ ] key.

Select bit number of the DIP switch.

Use the center [ ▲ ] , [ ▼ ] key.

Select ON (=1) or OFF (=0) of the DIP switch.

Use [ON] or [OFF] key.

[ON] : Set bit.

[OFF] : Clear bit.

Press the [Return] key to return to the 25 mode

menu screen.

For each switch function, refer to “List of Software DIPswitches”.

25

ADJUSTMENT

4-7

List of software DIP switches

DIP SW1

DIP SW2

DIP SW3

DIP SW4

DIP SW5

DIP SW6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

34

5

6

7

Operation when key counter is removed

(when using as a copier)

A3 (11 x 17) counting method

–

Selection of maximum number of copies that

can be stapled by FS-107.

–

–

FS107 limit on number of stapled sets

Toner replenish stop timing

–

–

–

–

1-shot message display at automatic staple mode clearing *4

–

Prohibition of non-image area erases, repeat (auto)

and original position correction

Use F4 size for Latin America destination

F34/F35/F36 latch

Toner replenish stop timing 2

Return to EKC screen after copying reservation

–

By-pass feed non-standard size selection

–

–

Toner level detection (”Supply toner” indication)

Number of copies allowed before machine stops

after “Supply Toner” indication.

Non-display of advance/delete buttons for job list

Job stop or nonstop at no toner

Impossibility of coping reservation to coin vender

–

(Destination switchover)

–

–

Detecting method of 8.5 x 11 size on RADF

Toner consumption reduction switch

–

Drum initial rotation first thing in the morning

K size selection switch for Taiwan destination

K size selection switch for Taiwan destination (By pass feed)

–

Polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation start

timing

Polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation

setting

Ignore

Count as 1

–

*1

–

–

None

Decide with DIP SW 3-2

–

–

–

–

Yes

–

No

No

No

When copying ends

No

–

Size detection effective

–

–

*3

*3

Display

Does not stop

Can reserve copying

–

*9

–

–

*37

–

*40

Metric sizes

Metric sizes

–

*10

*11

Instantaneous stop Jam

Count as 2

–

–

–

Temporary stop after 25 sets of copy

Stop after paper exited

–

–

–

–

No

–

Yes

Yes

Yes

Interval between copy set

Yes

–

Non-standard size handling

–

–

Do not display

Stops

Cannot reverse copying

–

–

–

–

K sizes available

K sizes available

–

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DIP SWNo. BIT Functions

Japan10

Inch

Default values

Metric

*3

*5

*3

*6

*7

*8

*3

The size is detects as 8.5 x 11 even if the original reaches to RADF’s PS307 (original detect PS 2).

If original reaches to RADF’s PS307 (original detect PS 2), the size isdetected as 8.5 x 14.

*2

25

4

ADJUSTMENT

4-8

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

DIP SW7

DIP SW8

DIP SW9

DIP SW10

DIP SW11

DIP SW12

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Copy paper priority in image area

Automatic restart after feeding paper (Other than Inch)

8.5x11APS (Japan, Metric), A4APS (Inch)

Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS B6 (Japan) / A5 (Metric) / 5.5 x 8.5 (Inch)

Password request for 25/36/47 mode

Selection of A series size (Metric only)

–

Selection of automatic erasure outside original

(7020/25/30)*16

Changing of key operator fixed magnification setting

Disabling copying when PM count reached

Adjusting of LCD contrast to help screen

Priority tray when APS is released

Data collection (25 Mode)

Selection of copy quantity limit

–

–

P81 messages (Messages displayed on machines installed in convenience stores)

Summer time setting for weekly timer

Selection of magnification mode when APS function is cancelled.

–

Icon display in third line of LCD message display

Displaying of JAM code

Message that appears when the RADF is open

–

–

–

–

–

Tray icon display in LCD size selection area

–

–

–

–

Setting of PM count at which copying is

inhibited

KRDS connection recognition

F/E screen switchover (except for F34, F35 and F36)

Area erasure outside original

Does not restart

Yes

No

No

No

No

–

Rectangular erasure

Permit

Permit

No

*19

No

*21

–

–

*22

*23

Display auto

–

No

No

Yes

–

–

–

–

–

No

–

–

–

–

*18

Not recognize

No

Images on whole page in the platen mode only

Restarts

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

–

Handling of slanted original

Prohibit

Prohibit

Yes

Yes

–

–

Display 1.00

–

Yes (Toner low, PM, etc.)

Yes

No

–

–

–

–

–

Yes

–

–

–

–

Recognize

Yes

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DIP SWNo. BIT 10Functions

Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS A4 (Japan, Metric) / 8.5x11 (Inch) *15

*12

*13

*14

*15

*17

*18

*20

*24

Japan

Default values

Inch Metric

25

3

3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-9

3 Note: Parenthesized bit numbers among the initial values apply to the 7022/7130.

PTC is OFF if OFF mode, if SW2 (sub power) is OFF, or if system is OFF due to WT or auto shutoff.

DIP SW13

DIP SW14

DIP SW15

DIP SW16

DIP SW17

DIP SW18

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

–

–

–

Selection of filter for jagged edges on slanting lines

–

–

Threshold for automatic erasure of outside original

(7020/25/30)

Operation when stapling is not possible

(Other than B6R, post card nonstandard)

–

–

Operation when one position stapling is not

available

Operation when two position stapling is not

available

–

–

–

–

–

–

Full stack stop when FNS not installedOccurrence of overload stop when FNS or IT is not connected Fixing temperature at low power mode

Operation of PTC * In the case of the 7022/7130, the internal

heater is treated as an option.

Copy inhibit flag prior to L detection

Operation when temperature inside machine rises(7020/25/30)

MPC correction control

F4 size setting

Host printing cannot be performed when a

key counter is installed.

–

Shift from by-pass feed in ATS mode is inhibited.

ITU (inner tray), vendor switchover

Separation claw operation OFF mode

(for machines destined for China)

Unit isolation (1)

–

–

–

ON

–

–

*25

*26

–

–

*27

*28

–

–

–

–

–

–

No

Decide with DIP SW15-6

*30

Always ON

Copy enabel

Not indicated

Stop job

*31

*32

Printing takes place.

–

Shift inhibited.

ITU selected.

Normal

Tray 1 (main body upper)

can be used

Tray 2 (main body lower)

can be used

–

–

Tray 3 (DB upper) can be used

Tray 4 (DB lower) can be used

–

DB can be used

–

–

–

OFF

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–Machine pauses after 100 sheets have been exited.Machine pauses after 400 sheets have been exited.

Copy inhibit

Indicated

Stop job, and turn OFF fixing heater

Printer abort processing

–

Shift possible.

Vender selected.

OFF

Tray 1 (main body upper)

is isolated

Tray 2 (main body lower)

is isolated

–

–

Tray 3 (DB upper) is isolated

Tray 4 (DB lower) is isolated

–

DB is isolated

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0Note 3

(1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (1)

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1(0)

0

(1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 (1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1(0)

0

(1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

DIP SWNo. BIT Functions 10

*33

Indication to prepare toner bottle(7020/25/30/35)

Japan

Default values

Inch Metric

Note 1: Initial value for a machine other than the 7020/25/30in the case where ( ) is appended to the bit No. of the initial value

Note 2: Initial value for a machine other than the 7035 in the case where ( ) is appended to the bit No. of the initial value

25

3

3

3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-10

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

DIP SW19

DIP SW20

DIP SW21

DIP SW22

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Unit isolation (2)

Unit isolation (3)

Platen size recognition selector switch 1 for

Latin America (Inch only)





Notice of nonstandard small platen size

(Inch only) *15

Job suspension/end at pulling out key

counter

Notice of small size of platen mode

(8.5x11/A4 or smaller)

Total-counter/key-counter increment

operation

When using an EKC, the password screen appears at the end of each job. (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

Turns ON the sub power switch when the

main power switch is turned ON.

Nonstandard size becomes effective at

automatic platen start

FM4 (internal cooling fan) connection switch

(7020/25/30/35)

–

Indication of total count start day on P mode screen

Platen APS detected size enlargement(7020/25/30/35)

Paper magnification correction according to paper size

Exit limit detect sensor (PS19) (7020/25/30/35)

Printer board can be used

Fax board can be used

–

–

–

Scanner can be used

–

RADF can be used

–

–

–

–

FNS can be used

–

–

–

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 14

Notice of noticed size

If DIP SW1-0:0: Stop paper

feed and terminate

If DIP SW1-0:1 Immediate-

stop jam

Notice size detected by APS.

Normal operation (Both the total

counter and the key counter count

up regardless of the mode.)

No

No

No

Connecting

–

Not indicated

Size detection enlargement

Invalid

Exist

Printer board is isolated

Fax board is isolated

–

–

–

Scanner is isolated

–

RADF is isolated

–

–

–

–

FNS offset mode cannot be used

–

–

–

A4

A4R

F4

Notice as nonstandard size

If DIP SW1-0:0: Stop paper

feed and printing is interrupted

If DIP SW1-0:1 Immediate-

stop jam

Notice size as A4 (Japan, Metric)

or 8.5x11 (Inch)

During a copy mode, both the total

counter and the key counter count

up. During a printer/Fax mode,

only the total counter is counted up.

Yes

Yes (WUT increase)

Yes (only by-pass tray)

Disconnecting

–

Indicated

Detected size at commencementof mass-production

Valid

Not exist

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1


*33

*33

*15

*34

*35

Japan

Default values

Inch Metric

25

3

3

3

3

3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-11

DIP SW23

DIP SW24

DIP SW25

DIP SW26

DIP SW27

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

23456

7

0

1

2345

6

7

0123

45

6

70

123456

7

Automatic tray changeover when FNS tray is full

100 sheets are exited when FNS is not stapled, and tray is detected full

100 sheets are exited when FNS is stapled, and tray is detected full

–

Stopping of the machine when the fixing web counterToner density selection of developer (7020/25/30/35)

Automatic change of printer paper size

Sets tray at commencement of search whenAPS is used.

Changeover of original quantity display duringoperationJob start and changeover without print process stopAutomatic changeover of tray when theIT101 tray is full

– – –

For postcard-to-postcard copying, rotationtakes place even when APS/AMS is not used180 degree rotation takes place even whenthere are no staplesFAX transmission 8K/16K for machines destined for Taiwan

Printer density selection(Patch detection control threshold value change)

Image position reference use for by-pass feed copying on non-standard size paperPrinter EKC mismatch print operationTop & bottom erase mode of the application functions (7020/25/30/35)The timer for canceling a job that was interrupted due to removal of the key counter is valid

No automatic changeover to Tray 1No automatic changeover to Tray 2No automatic changeover to Tray 3No automatic changeover to Tray 4No

No

–

Not stop

No*41

*29

*38

Job No. indication

Without process stop

No automatic changeover toTray 1No automatic changeover toTray 2 – – –

No rotation

No rotation

Image is transmitted in reducedform.

*39

Center

Permit No

Invalid

Use*42

– – – –

*43

Automatic changeover to Tray 1Automatic changeover to Tray 2Automatic changeover to Tray 3Automatic changeover to Tray 4

Yes

Yes

–

Stops

Set. (Note, however that the bit is automatically made 0 after L detection adjustment has ended normally.)

Original quantity indication

Process stop

Automatic changeover to Tray 1Automatic changeover to Tray 2 –

–

–

Rotation takes place.

Rotation takes place.

Image is transmitted with bothedges erased.

Recording paper side

Prohibit Yes

Valid Do not use

– – – –

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

000000

0

0

0

0000

0

0

0010

00

0

00

00000

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

00

0

000100

0

0

0

0000

0

0

0010

00

0

00

00000

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

00

0

000010

0

0

0

0000

0

0

0010

00

0

00

00000

0

0


Japan

Default values

*36

Inch Metric

“No IP scanner function” settingAutomatic copying reservation function (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

– – – –Density setting when the printer toner save function is selected (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

25

3

3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-12

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

*1 : FS107 stapling upper limit

Mode 1-3 1-4

50 sheets

45 sheets

40 sheets

35 sheets

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

The following dipswitch settings are related:

• DIP SW 2 – 5

1-shot message display at automatic staple modeclearing.

*2 : FS107 limit on number of stapled setsIf this bit is set to "1", then if the user specifies morethan 25 stapled sets the copier automatically stopsafter reaching the 25th set, and displays a messageinstructing the user to remove the paper and pressthe START button.

*3 : Toner-replenish stop timingWhen the TLD (toner level detector) detects that thetoner-out condition has persisted for a fixed length oftime, the copier waits an additional number of copies(as specified by DIP SW4 – 0, 4 – 1) and thendisplays a message instructing the user to load newtoner. (The toner-low condition)

• Toner-level detect (message requesting new toner)

Mode 4-0 4-1

After 0 effective copies




0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

Following the message display, the copier allowsprinting of an additional number of copies as set byDIP SW4 – 2, 4 – 3, and will then disable copying.

• Count from appearance of toner supply messageuntil copying is inhibited

Mode 4-2 4-3

After almost 100 copies




0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

However, that the copier will stop only if DIP SW4 – 5("Job stop or nonstop at no toner ") is set to "1".

• The toner-low/toner-out condition is cleared by

insertion of a new toner bottle (toner-bottle detectsensor OFF/ON).

• The toner-out stop conditions vary according tothe settings of DIP SW3 – 2 and DIP SW2 – 0.

*4 : 1-shot message display at automatic staple modeclearingIf 1-shot display is enabled: If the copy limit is exceedduring staple-mode operation, a message indicatingthis appears on the display, and copying continues insort mode.

Note that this setting is related to the “1-SHOTDISPLAY TIME” setting available under key-operatormode. For information about memory switches, referto the Instruction Manual.

*5 : F34/F35/F36 latchIn the event of a fixing-related error, the settingchanges to "1" so that power OFF/ON will not clearthe error condition. After correcting (repairing) theproblem, reset this to "0" to re-enable copying.

*6 : Return to EKC screen after copying reservationIf EKC setup is enabled, then if this bit is set to "1"(return to screen) the copier will immediately displaythe EKC password-request screen following exit ofthe final sheet for the reserved jobs. If copying is notreserved, the copier will wait 1 minute following jobcompletion before displaying the EKC password-request screen.

*7 : Bypass feed nonstandard size selectionThis setting determines whether the system detectsthe size of the paper in the bypass tray. If the settingis "1" (handle as nonstandard size), the size is notdetected and copying is based on the maximumpaper size.

*8 : Non-display of advance/delete buttons for job listUnder default conditions, the job list screen allows fordeletion or priority changing of jobs that have beenstored in E-RDH memory.

If this bit is set to "1"(non-display), however, theadvance and delete buttons will not appear on thedisplay so that it will not be possible to delete orreorder the reserved jobs.

25

1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-13

*9 : Destination switchIt is recommended that the destination is amendedwith the "Destination" setting on the 25 mode serialnumber setting.

Mode 5-0 5-1

Japan

Inch

Metric

Taiwan

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

: Inch

: Metric

*10 : Polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation starttiming

In the polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation settingmarked *11, when low-speed or stop is specified, thepolygon motor operation will shift to low-speed orstop mode after the time specified in DIP SW haspassed.

The start of the passed time shall be from the timingslisted below.

• When the warmup is completed

• When final operations for the operation keys(excluding copy start key), ADF, tray, and so forthduring idling state are completed

• When copy or print jobs are completed

Mode 6-4 6-5

15 seconds (Note)

30 seconds

60 seconds

120 seconds

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

Note: The default setting for 7135 is 60 seconds.

*11 : Polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation settingTo lower the rotating sound of polygon motor duringidling state, the polygon motor rotation can beswitched into low-speed or stop mode.

The switch timing is set in the polygon motor stop/low-speed rotation start timing marked *10.

And, when the polygon motor is in low-speed or stopmode, fast copy out time may be increased.

Mode 6-6 6-7

0

1

0

0

0

1

No stop/low-speed rotation (Note)

Low-speed rotation

Stopped

Note: The default setting for 7135 is low-speedrotation.

*12 : Copy paper size priority in image areaThis setting determines how the copier handlesplaten copying when the original size differs from thecopy paper size when the AMS setting is cleared. Ifthis bit is set to "1" (whole-page image in platen modeonly), then the copier will not erase the area outsideof the original (so that area outside of the APS-detected size is also copied).

If this bit is set to "0", then the copier does erase thearea outside of the original.

Note that in RADF copying, the copier will always erasethe area outside of the original regardless of this setting.

Related settings are DIP SW8 – 0 (Selection ofautomatic erasure outside original), memory switch 4“Non-original area erase function” of Key-operatormode. For information about memory switches, referto the Instruction Manual.

*13 : Automatic restart after paper supplied(Excluding the inch series)

This setting determines how copying is restarted ifthe tray becomes empty while copying is in progress.Under the default setting, the user (after addingpaper and setting the tray back in place) must pressthe START button to resume copying. If this bit is setto "1", however, copying restarts automatically whenthe tray is set back in place.

25

4

4

ADJUSTMENT

4-14

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M25

*14 : 8.5x11 APS (Japan, Metric), A4 APS (Inch)If this bit is to "1" (No), the copier will forcibly copy asA4 in Japan/Metric if it detects an original size of8.5x11, and will forcibly copy as 8.5x11 in Inch. if itdetects an original size of A4). Under the defaultsetting, APS operates for both A4 and 8.5x11.

*15 : Settings related to nonstandard original sizes• SW21– 5 Copy setting of platen small size (A4/8.5

x 11 or smaller)

Selects whether to copy on the APS detected sizewhen APS detected the original as A4 or smaller,or to ignore the APS detected size and copy on A4(Japan, Metric) or 8.5 x 11 (Inch).

• SW21– 3 (Inch only) Copy setting of platen smallsize (8.5 x 11 or smaller)

Selects whether to copy on the APS detected sizewhen APS detected the original as 8.5 x 11 orsmaller, or to ignore the APS detected size andcopy as nonstandard size.

When both SW21– 5 and SW 21– 3 are set to “1”,the setting of 21– 5 has priority over the 21– 3.

• SW7– 3 Nonstandard-size switch for platen APS (1)

Selects whether to copy on B6 (Japan), A5(Metric) or 5.5 x 11 (Inch) when the APS detectedthe original as nonstandard-size, or to copy on theAPS selected nonstandard size.

When both SW7– 4 and SW7– 3 are set to “1”, thesetting of 7– 4 has priority over the 7– 3.

• SW7– 4 Nonstandard-size switch of platen APS (2)

Selects whether to copy on A4 (Japan, Metric) or8.5 x 11 (Inch) when the APS detected the originalas nonstandard-size, or to copy on the APSselected nonstandard size.

ADJUSTMENT

4-15

*16 : DIP SW8 – 0 "Selection of automatic erasureoutside original" (7020/25/30 only)

If this bit is set to "1" (Handling of slanted originals),the copier will automatically erase area outside of theoriginal that have been placed a skew on the platen.Set using the key operator mode in the case of

machines other than the 7020/25/30.

When this setting (bit) is "0" (rectangular original), thearea outside the edges of the original is erased.

(Example)

BIT:0 BIT:1

*17 : Request password for 25, 36, 47 modeIf this bit is set to "1" (Yes), the copier will display apassword-request screen before entering servicemode. The password is "9272".

*18 : Disable of copying when PM count is reachedDIP SW12 – 3, 12 – 4, and 12 – 5 (Setting of PMcount at which copying is disabled) sets the numberof copies at which copying is disabled. Note thatcopying will be disabled only if DIP SW8 – 2 (Disablecopying when PM count is reached) is set to "1".

Mode 12-3 12-5

1000 copies

2000 copies

3000 copies

4000 copies

5000 copies

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

12-4

0

0

1

1

0

*19 : Priority tray when APS is released• This setting sets the tray selection used when

APS is set OFF from key-operator mode.

Priority tray when APS is released

Mode 8-4 8-6

No priority

Main-body upper tray

Main-body lower tray

DB upper tray

DB lower tray

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

8-5

0

0

1

1

0

*20 : Data collection (25 mode)If this bit is set to "1" (Yes), then all 25 mode collecteddata 1 to 4 can be checked. If the setting is "0", thenonly collected data 1 is available for checking.

*21 : Copy quantity limit

Mode 9-0 9-2

No limit

1 sheet

3 sheets

5 sheets

9 sheets

10 sheets

20 sheets

30 sheets

50 sheets

99 sheets

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

9-3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

9-1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

*22 : P81 messages (Messages displayed on machinesinstalled in convenience stores and so on.)

Mode 9-6

Please insert key counter

Please insert copy card

Please insert coin

0

1

0

9-7

0

0

1

3

25

ADJUSTMENT

4-16

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

*27 : Operation when one position stapling is notavailable

Mode 14-4 14-5

Auto cancel

Auto cancel

Inhibit

Forced 1-position stapling

mode operation

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*28 : Operation when two position stapling is notavailable

Mode 14-6 14-7

Auto cancel

Auto cancel

Inhibit


mode operation

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*29 : Printer paper size automatic conversion

Mode 24-2 24-3

No conversion

Inch ➝ Metric

Metric ➝ Inch

Metric ↔ Inch

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*30 : Fixing temperature at low power mode

Mode 16-0 16-1

160˚C (170˚C) [150˚C ]

110˚C (120˚C )

85˚C (65˚C)

85˚C

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

The number in ( ) applies to the 7035/7135, and thenumber in [ ] applies to the 7122.

25

4

*23 : Summer time setting for WT (Weekly Timer)

Mode 10-0 10-2

0 minute

30 minutes

60 minutes

90 minutes

120 minutes

150 minutes

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

10-3

0

0

0

1

1

1

10-1

0

1

1

0

0

1

*24 : F/E screen switchover (except for F34, F35, F36)If this bit is set to "1" (No), all cases except for fixingerrors will simply show a message instructing a userto turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF and ON.If set to "0", all errors will be indicated by error codes.

*25 : Threshold for automatic erasure of outsideoriginal

Accurate detection of the outer boundary of theoriginal may become difficult if the original is dark indensity or if extraneous light (sunlight, roomfluorescent light, etc.) has penetrated the copier.Setting the threshold to lower values facilitatesdetection for dark-density originals but increases the

risk of incorrect detection due to extraneous light. Set

using the key operator mode in the case of machines

other than the 7020/25/30/35.

Mode 13-6 13-7

Dark-density originals

Normal original

External incorrect detection

prevention

None

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

: Initialization of machines other than the

7020/25/30/35

*26 : Operation if stapling is not possibleSizes other than Postcard, A5R, 5.5x8.5R, nonstandard

Mode 14-0 14-1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

Auto cancel

Auto switching to 1-position

stapling

Inhibit


mode operation

4

ADJUSTMENT

4-17

*31 : MPC correction controlThese switches determine whether MPC correctionis carried out when sub power turns on.

MPC (maximum laser power correction) is designedto optimize copy density (mainly to prevent excessdensity), and is generally carried out every 20 copies.

In the copier is left off for a protracted period of time,toner may begin to lose its charge, resulting inexcess density when copying restarts. To preventthis problem, the default setting causes the copier toautomatically execute MPC when power turns ON(from OFF mode or from main power OFF) if thefollowing two conditions hold: (1) the copier has beenoff for a prolonged period (at least 8 hours), and (2)the ambient humidity is 60% or higher.

If you set the switches to "1", "0", then the copier willexecute MPC at power ON if either of the above twoconditions hold. If the switches are set to "0", "1",then MPC will always be carried out at power ON.

Mode 16-6 16-7

Humidity over 60% and

First in the morning

Humidity over 60% or

First in the morning

Always

No control

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*32 : F4 size setting

Mode 17-0 17-2

8.5 x 13

8.25 x 13

8.125 x 13

8 x 13

8.5 x 13.5

0

1

0

1

0

17-1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

*33 : Unit isolationIf a unit is malfunctioning and causing a problem, setthe corresponding bit to isolate the unit from thesystem (software isolation). Copier operation canthen continue without problem until the unit can berepaired, etc.

*34 : SW2 (sub switch) turns ON with SW1 (main switch)Setting this bit to "1" will increase the warm-up time.

Reason:

The CB (overall control board) houses both anengine-control CPU and a system-control CPU.Switching ON of the main power does not start theengine CPU, but does start the power supply to thesystem CPU. The system CPU is initialized, and thenthe OS is initialized, and then memory and otherhardware checks are performed.This initialization sequence takes about 6 seconds(until the fax, printer/scanner, and copy LEDs havegone ON/OFF). When this setting is "0", the enginedoes not start if SW2 is pressed during initialization.

When the printer option is installed, the settingbecomes “1”, and cannot be changed.

*35 : Automatic feed of non-standard size originals inthe platen auto start mode

Included among the memory switch settings in thekey operator mode is “Auto start auto select ON/OFFsetting”. When this setting is ON ("1") and the size ofthe original on the platen glass is detected as a non-standard size, the machine automatically starts paperfeed from the bypass feed tray.

Auto start does not take place.

Auto start takes place when the by-pass

feed tray is selected.

0

1

*36 : Process non-stop, and reserved job start timingsetting

E-RDH memory

Job Job Job Job Job

Printing in progress Reservation

This machine can hold up to 5 print jobs in the E-RDHmemory. When this setting is "1", and a reserved job(copy reservation, printer job or FAX receivingoperation) is generated during a print operation, themachine proceeds to the next job without stoppingafter the end of the ongoing print job.

When this setting is "0", the print operation stops afterthe end of the ongoing print job. However, if any ofconditions 1 to 6 below exists, the print operationstops after the end of the ongoing print job, even if thissetting is "1".

25

2

2

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-18

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M25

3

3

*39 : Patch detection control threshold shift

Mode 26-0 26-2

0

– 6

– 4

– 2

0

+ 2

+ 4

+ 6

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

26-1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

*40 : Drum initial rotation in the morningIf this setting is made “1” when blurry image occursdue to paper dust when the machine is switched ONin the morning, a drum initial rotation will take placefor 30 seconds, thus preventing blurry image.

Mode

No

Yes

6-0

0

1

*41 : Toner density selection of developer (7020/25/30)If gray background image is caused by the increasethe toner density of developer, add correction to the Ldetection adjustment value to prevent gray backgroundimage. Change the setting in 1% steps, and makethree solid black (A4) copies after each change.

Caution: Be sure to change the setting in 1% steps.If you change the setting in steps of 2% ormore, a fault code (F26-2/3) will be displayed.

Mode 24-0 24-1

Standard

1% reduction

2% reduction

3% reduction

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*42 : Automatic copy reservation functionWhen this setting is ‘1’, the copy reservation screenautomatically appears after the end of the originalread operation. Also, the job settings are the sameas the settings for the previous job.

Mode

Do not use

Use

27-0

0

1

3

Conditions under which print operation stops

1. The ongoing print job (current job) and the nextreserved job are of different kinds (reserved copy,fax, printer, interrupt copy).

2. The printer modes are different.

The current job is a two-sided mode job and thenext reserved job is a one-sided mode job.

3. There is no FNS, and the output mode of thecurrent job (non-sort, sort, group) differs from theoutput mode of the next job.

4. When an FNS is installed, the output mode,stapling position (at front, rear and both), andpaper exit tray (tray 1 to tray 4) of the current joband the next reserved job are different.

5. The application functions (booklet, intersheet,memory copy, page insertion, rotation sort) of thenext reserved job are selected.

6. The special original settings (mixed original, Z-fold, non-standard) of the current job and thereserved job are different.

*37 : Toner consumption reduction switchWith this setting, the toner consumption can bereduced by reducing the developing bias and thecharging grid potential by 50V (20 steps). Alternatively,the image density can be raised slightly by raising thepotential by 50V (20 steps).

Mode

No correction

Increased toner consumption (image density becomes darker.)

Reduced toner consumption (image density becomes lighter.)

No correction

5-5 5-6

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

*38 : Tray setting at commencement of search whenAPS is used

Mode 24-4 24-5

Search from upper tray of main body

Search from lower tray of main body

Search from upper tray of DB

Search from lower tray of DB

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

: Inch : Metric

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-19

*43 : Density setting when the toner save function isselected in the printer driver screen

This setting is effective only for the PCL and PSversions.

Mode 27-5 27-7

Standard

– 4 (Lighter)

– 3

– 2

– 1

+ 1

+ 2

+ 3 (Darker)

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

27-6

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

3

25

ADJUSTMENT

4-20

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M25

[3] PM Count Setting

This function resets the PM count and sets the PM cycle.

Care should be taken to reset the PM count properly.PM count / cycle menu

1. PM count resetting

2. PM cycle setting

1. PM count reset

Select whether to reset the count in the PM countreset screen.

Step

1

2

3

4

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 Mode.


Press the [2. PM COUNT/CYCLE] key.

[PM Count/Cycle Menu Screen]

Press the [1. PM count reset] key.

[PM Count Reset Screen]

Press the [YES] key to reset the PM count.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the PM

count is not reset and returns to the PM count/

cycle menu screen.

2. Entering PM count start date

When resetting the PM count, it is necessary to input thestart date, and the screen below will appear automatically.

Step

1

2

3

Operation procedure

[PM Count Starting Date Input Screen]

Enter a PM count start date from the numeric

keys.

Press the [SET] key to enter the data that has

been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM

count/cycle menu screen.

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the PM count startdate is not changed. It is necessary toreset the count again for inputting thecount.

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-21

[4] Data Collection

This function enables viewing of the various datarecorded in the machine.

Also, it is possible for the collected data to be checked byKRDS and management listing.

Data collection menu

1. Count data collection

2. Area data collection start (Date count data)

Data collection list

Classification

Data collection

1

Data collection

2

Data collection

3

Data collection

4

Contents

Count number of

copies by each size

Count RADF original

feed quantities

Count of JAM

occurrence by each

point

Count of copies by

each mode

Count of SC

occurrence

Pre-peration

– (Note 1)

• Enter the 25 mode

• Select [1. Software

SW]

• Set the address to

8-7:1 (Note 2)

↓

↓

Note 1: Only data collection 1 can be checked indefault.

Note 2 : For the setting method, see "[2] Settingsoftware DIP SW" in 25 mode.

3. Setting of PM cycle

Set PM Cycle as follows:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [2. PM COUNT/CYCLE] key.

[PM Count/Cycle menu screen]

Press the [2. PM CYCLE Set] key.

[PM Cycle set screen]

Enter PM cycle from the numeric keys.

Enter upper 3-digit (hundred thousand, ten

thousand, thousand) only.

Press the [SET] key to enter a PM cycle that has

been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM

count/cycle menu screen.

25

ADJUSTMENT

4-22

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

1. Procedures for checking collected data

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [3. Collecting data] key.

[Data collection menu screen]

Press the [1. Count data] key.

[Data collection screen]

Change the data number with the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] key.

Pressing [NEXT] or [FRONT] key enables display

of next data collection screen. (Note 3)

Data collection 1

↓

Data collection 2

↓

Data collection 3

↓

Data collection 4

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the data

collection menu screen.

(1) The data is displayed at the line 2 in the messagedisplay area as “Data number (No.): Count value(00000000)”.

(2) The data number can be changed by pressing the[ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] key.

(3) Press and hold the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] key to display thenext items continuously.

Note 3 : In order to confirm collected data 2 to 4,set DIP SW 8-7 to “1” beforehand.

25

2. Data collection details

(1) Data collection 1

a. Copy count by each size

1 A3 A3 11 x 17

2 B4 B4 8.5 x 14

3 A4 + A4R A4 + A4R 8.5 x 11 + 8.5 x 11R

4 B5 + B5R B5 + B5R 5.5 x 8.5

5 A5 A5 -

6 B6 F4 -

7 8.5 x 14 - -

8 8.5 x 11 +8.5 x 11R - A4 + A4R

9 Metric Metric Inch

Special Special Special

10 Postcard - -

Type

Copy countby each size

Japan Metric Inch

Paper size for destinationSizeNo.

Maximum count number : 99,999,999

b. Count RADF original feed quantities

16 ADF mode original feed counter

17 RADF mode original feed counter

18 ADF mixed original mode original

feed counter

19 RADF mixed original mode original

feed counter

Count RADF

original feed

quantities

Feed modeSizeNo.

Type

Maximum count number : 99,999,999

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-23

38 63-5 DF-314

39 63-6 DF-314

40 63-7 DF-314

41 - -

42 - -

43 72-16 FS-107

44 72-17 FS-107

45 72-19 FS-107

46 72-21 FS-107

47 72-23 FS-107

48 72-81 FS-107

49 - -

50 - -

No. Jam Classification

Maximum count number : 999,999


Jam occurrence count by factor

1 10-0 By-pass

2 11-0 Upper tray (main body)

3 12-0 Lower tray (main body)

4 13-0 DB upper tray

5 14-0 DB lower tray

6 16-0 Paper feed jam

7 - -

8 - -

9 - -

10 30-0 Conveyance jam

11 31-0 Conveyance jam

12 - -

13 - -

14 32-0 Fixing unit conveyance jam



17 75-10 IT-101

18 75-11 IT-101

19 - -

20 97-1 ADU conveyance jam



23 75-12 IT-101

24 75-13 IT-101

25 61-0 DF-314

26 61-1 DF-314

27 62-0 DF-314

28 62-1 DF-314

29 62-2 DF-314

30 62-3 DF-314

31 62-4 DF-314

32 62-5 DF-314

33 63-0 DF-314

34 63-1 DF-314

35 63-2 DF-314

36 63-3 DF-314

37 63-4 DF-314

No. Jam Point

25

2

2

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-24

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M


Copy count by each mode

1 Platen single side → single side

2 -

3 RADF double side → single side

4 RADF double side → double side

5 RADF single side → single side

6 RADF single side → double side

7 Finisher (Staple mode)

8 Finisher (Sort mode)

9 Finisher (Group mode)

10 Finisher (No. of stapling)

11 Life size

12 Fixed ratio (E3: 1.41/2.00)

13 Fixed ratio (E2: 1.22/1.55)

14 Fixed ratio (E1: 1.15/1.29)

15 Fixed ratio (R1: 0.86/0.77)

16 Fixed ratio (R2: 0.82/0.65)

17 Fixed ratio (R3: 0.71/0.50)

18 Arbitrary magnification

19 Zoom

20 Maximum zoom

21 Minimum zoom

22 AMS mode

23 APS mode

24 AE mode

25 Interrupt mode

26 By-pass feed mode

27 Book copy mode

28 Frame erase mode

29 Fold erase mode

30 Image shift mode

31 Reduction image shift mode

32 -

33 -

34 No. of paper feed quantities at intersheet mode

35 -

36 Number of feed in the OHP mode (blank paper interleave)

37 No. of paper feed quantities at mixed original mode

38 Access number of the JOB memory call mode

(Number of pressing the * button)

No. Contents

25

39 Number of times the auto low power mode is used

40 Copy quantity is set to 1.

41 Copy quantity is set between 2 and 5.

42 Copy quantity is set between 6 and 10.

43 Copy quantity is set to 11 or above.

44 Intersheet

45 -

46 Photo mode

47 -

48 Verti./Horiz. zoom mode

49 Memory copy mode

50 Confirmation copy mode

51 Text/Photo mode

52 Text mode

53 Arbitrary density mode

54 Number of feed in the OHP mode (copy interleave)

55 -

56 -

57 Page insertion mode

58 Chapter division mode

59 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1 mode

60 Repeat mode

61 B/W reverse mode

62 Non-image area erase mode

63 Increase contrast mode

64 Original auto layout copy

65 -

66 Number of copies in rotation

67 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 1




71 -

72 -

73 Finisher, Number of stapling (front)

74 Finisher, Number of stapling (rear)

75 Booklet mode copying count

76 OHP mode (without doubled sheet) copying count

77 Z-fold mode copying count

78 Copy quantity in the non-standard size mode

79 Stamping mode copying count

80 Image head correction mode copying count

No. Contents

Maximum count : 99,999,999

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-25

43 56-1 Image control

44 56-2 communication

45 56-3 error

46 56-4

47 56-5

48 56-6 Operation control

49 56-7 section system error

50 56-8

51 56-9

52 56-10

53 56-11 Main body identification error

54 60-1 RADF error

55 60-9

56 60-11

57 67-3

58 70-1 Finisher error

59 70-9

60 70-11

61 77-2

62 77-3

63 77-5

64 77-6

65 77-11

66 77-16

67 80-1 Non-volatile memory

68 80-2 error

69 80-3

70 80-4

71 80-5

72 81-1 Flash ROM error

73 81-2

74 81-3

75 88-1 Image processing system error

76 89-1 Overrall control board

77 89-2 communication error

78 89-3

79 89-4

80 89-5

81 89-6

82 87-1 Print controller error

83 52-5 Fan lock error

84 86-02 Fax board error

85 86-03

86 86-04

No. ClassificationError code (decimal number)

Main code Sub code


Count number of SC occurrence (F Code)

1 10-1 Communication

2 10-2 error

3 10-9

4 18-1 Paper feed error

5 18-2

6 18-3

7 18-4

8 26-1 L detection error

9 28-1 High-voltage power

10 28-2 source error

11 28-3

12 34-1 Fixing high-temperature

13 34-2 error

14 35-1 Fixing low-temperature

15 35-2 error

16 35-3

17 35-4

18 35-5

19 35-6

20 35-7

21 35-8

22 35-9

23 35-10

24 36-1 Broken fixing sensor

25 36-2

26 36-3

27 - -

28 40-1 Scanning system

29 40-9 error

30 41-1

31 46-1 Image processing

32 46-8 system error

33 46-10

34 46-11

35 49-2

36 49-4

37 49-6

38 51-4 Motor speed error

39 51-5

40 51-6


42 52-2


Main code Sub code

25

2

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-26

2 IS

W3

SE

RV

ICE

4 D

IAG

RA

M

87 86-06 Fax error

88 86-88 (Overall control board side)

89 86-89

90 -

91 86-91

92 86-10 Fax error

93 86-20 (Fax board side)

94 22-1 Machine internal temperature

95 23-1 Drum periphery

96 26-2 L detection error

97 26-3

98 28-4 High voltage power

source error

99 43-1 Scanning system error


101 36-4 Broken fixing sensor

102 52-6 Print controller error

103 87-2

104 87-3

105 77-18 Finisher error


(Other than 7020/25/30)

107 86-7 Fax error (Fax board side)

108 86-8 (Other than 7020/25/30)


Main code Sub code

Maximum count : 9,999

3. Starting periodic date collection

Reset the periodic data from the setting periodiccollection start date. Make a date that this operationis performed as a new periodic collection start date.The periodic data can be checked with the KRDS andmanagement list.

Step

1

2

3

4

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [3. Collecting data] key.

[Data collection menu screen]

Press the [2. Date count data] key.

[Starting periodic data collection screen]

Press the [YES] key to start the periodic data collection.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then data collection

start date is not reset and returns to the data

colleciton menu screen.

25

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-27

[5] Copy Count for Each Part to be

Replaced

Perform the copy count display, count clear, limit valuesetting and arbitrarily parts to be replaced setting to thedata of the parts to be replaced (fixed/arbitrarily).

Each count value can be check with the management listof 36 Mode and the KRDS.

Parts counter menu

1. Copy Count for each fixed replacement part

2. Copy Count for each arbitrarily replacement part

1. Copy count display and count reset by

parts to be replaced (fixed)

Set the parts name of the fixed parts to be replaced(fixed), parts No. and copy count display, and countreset.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [4. Parts counter] key.

[Parts counter menu screen]

Press the [1. Count of parts (Fixed)] key.

[Copy count screen by parts to be replaced (fixed)]

Press [ ▲ ] , [ ▼ ] keys to select the data.

Press the [Count reset] key.

[Count reset screen by parts to be replaced (fixed)]

Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy

count is not reset and returns to the copy count

screen by parts to be replaced.

25

List of parts to be replaced (fixed)

Drum

Cleaning blade assembly

Drum unit

Transfer separation corona unit

Developer

Developing unit

Ozone filter

Suction filter/A

Filter cover assembly

Feed rubber

Double feed prevention rubber/Upper

Double feed prevention rubber/Lower

Feed rubber

Double feed prevention rubber/Upper

Double feed prevention rubber/Lower

DB feed rubber

DB double feed prevention rubber/Upper

DB double feed prevention rubber/Lower

DB feed rubber

DB double feed prevention rubber/Upper

DB double feed prevention rubber/Lower

By-pass feed reverse roller

By-pass feed pick up roller

By-pass feed conveyance roller

Fixing heat roller

Fixing pressure roller

Fixing web

Heat insulating sleeve/A

Heat insulating sleeve/B


Cleaner assembly

Fixing claw

Fixing roller holder/Upper

Fixing roller holder/Lower

Fixing sensor

Fuse mounting plate assembly

Fixing heater lamp/1

Fixing heater lamp/2

Paper feed roller/A

Double feed prevention roller/A assembly

Paper exit roller/A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

–

–

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

Drum unit

(including charging

corona unit)

Transfer separation

corona unit

Developing unit

Main body

Main body paper

feed unit

(Tray1)

Main body paper

feed unit

(Tray2)

DB paper feed unit

(Tray3 ro LCT)

DB paper feed unit

(Tray4)

By-pass feed unit

Fixing unit

DF-314

FS-107

Unit7020/25/30


Parts name

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-28

2. Copy count display and count reset by

parts to be replaced (Named; arbitrarily)

Set the limit value for the parts to be replaced, partsNo., parts name setting, copy count display andcount reset.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 Mode.


Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.


Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.

[Copy count screen by parts to be replaced (named)]

Press the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] key to select the data to be

set or changed.

The following items can be set below:

[COUNT RESET] : To clear the copy count.

[LIMIT SET] : To enter the limit value (6-digit).

[P/N SET] : To enter the parts number (9-digit).

[Parts name] : To enter the parts name.

Press the [RETURN] key, then return to copy

count screen by parts to be replaced.

25

List of parts to be replaced (arbitrarily)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)




















When paper is fed from by-pass tray

When paper is fed from tray 1




When paper is fed from ADU

When paper is exited from main body

When original is fed into RADF



Count timingNo.

ADJUSTMENT

4-29

(2) Count limit setting method

Enter the new limit value from the numeric keys onthe screen.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Press the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] to select the data to be set

or changed.

Press the [LIMIT SET] key.

[Copy count limit setting screen by parts to

be replaced (named)]

Enter new value using the numeric keys.

Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value that

has been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy

count screen by parts to be replaced (named).

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete without changing a new limitvalue and returns to the copy count screenby parts to be replaced (Named).

Reference: The right side of the limit value will bemarked “*” if the copy count exceedsits limit value.

(1) Count resetting method

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Press the [ ▲ ] or [▼ ] to select the data.

Press the [COUNT RESET] key.

[Count reset screen by parts to be replaced (named)]

Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count that

has been selected.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy

count is not reset and returns to the copy count

screen by parts to be replaced (named).

25

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-30

(3) Parts No. setting

Enter the new parts No. (9-digit) from the numerickeys and alphabet keys on the screen.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Press the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] to select the data to be set

or changed.

Press the [P/N SET] key.

[Part No. setting screen by parts to be replaced (named)]

Enter new parts No. using the numeric and

alphabet keys.

Press the [SET] key to enter the parts No. that

has been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy

count screen by parts to be replaced (Named).

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete without changing a new partsNo. and returns to the copy count screenby parts to be replaced (Named).

(4) Parts name setting

Enter the new parts name from the keys on thescreen.

There are three screen in the input screen and arechanged with the [ ▼ ] or [ ▲ ] key:

• Alphabet (a capital letter), numeric number

• Alphabet (a small letter), numeric number

• Symbol, numeric number

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Press the [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] to select the data to be

set or changed.

Press the [P/N SET] key.

[Parts name setting screen by parts to be

replaced (named)]

Enter new parts name using the keys on the screen.

Press the [OK] key to enter the parts name that has

been entered and return to the copy count screen

by parts to be replaced (Named).

Note: When pressing the [CANCEL] key withoutpressing the [OK] key, the setting iscompleted without setting a parts nameand returns to the copy count screen byparts to be replaced (Named).

25

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-31

[6] Password Setting

This function sets the password to enter each mode.

In the 25 mode menu screen, select the [5. Passwordsetting], then the password setting menu screen willappear.

Select the password to be adjusted/entered in this screen.

Password setting menu

1. Key operator password set

2. E.K.C. master key code set

3. Weekly timer master key set

1. Setting key operator password

This function sets the password to enter the keyoperator mode.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [5. Password setting] key.

[Password setting menu screen]

Press the [1. Key operator password set] key.

[Key Operator Password Setting Screen]

Enter 4-digit new password from the numeric

keys.

Press the [SET] key to set the password that has

been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the

password setting menu screen.

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete. However the new password willnot be entered and the password settingmenu screen will return.

Reference: When setting a password to “0000”,the key operator mode can be usedwithout a password.

2. Setting of EKC master key code

Set the EKC master key code when entering theEKC setting mode of the key operator mode.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [2. E.K.C. master key code set] key.

[EKC master key code setting screen]

Enter 8-digit new EKC master key code using

the numeric keys.

Press the [SET] key to enter the EKC master

key code that has been entered.



Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete without changing a new EKCmaster key code and returns to thepassword setting menu screen.

Reference: When “00000000” is set as the pass-word, the EKC setting menu screen willbe displayed instead of the passwordentry screen.

25

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-32

3. Setting the weekly timer master key

This function sets the weekly timer master keyrequired for entering the various weekly timer setmode.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [3. Weekly timer master key set] key.

[Weekly timer master key setting screen]

Enter 4-digit new weekly timer master key

using the numeric keys.

Press the [SET] key to enter the weekly timer

master key that has been entered.



Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete without changing a new weeklytimer master key and returns to thepassword setting screen.

Reference: When setting the master key to “0000”,the weekly timer mode can be usedwithout a password.

[7] Setting Phone Number of the

Service Center

This function displays the telephone and fax numbers ofthe service center which is indicated on the screen if aservice call is required.

This function is not related to KRDS functions. It isdesigned only for indicating the data on the screen.

1. Setting phone and fax number of the

service center

Select [6. Service TEL No.] in the 25 mode screen.

Service center number setting screen will appear.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [6. Service TEL No.] key.

[Service center number setting screen]

Press the [TEL] key to set the phone number

and the [FAX] key to set the [FAX] number, and

input the number (Max. 21 digits) using the

numeric keys on the screen.

When input has been mistaken, rewrite it after

moving the cursor with [<<] or [>>] key, or delete

all with the Stop/clear button to input again.

Press the [SET] key to enter the number that has

been entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the 25

mode menu screen.

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete. However the new phonenumber will not be entered and the 25mode menu screen will return.

25

ADJUSTMENT

4-33

[8] Setting the Serial Number

This function is used to display, set and change the serialnumber of the main body and optional units.

The serial numbers can be read from KRDS.

1. Serial number display procedure

Select [7. Serial number] in the 25 mode screen. Theserial number setting screen will appear.

The item name and serial number are displayed onthe serial number setting menu screen. Each serialnumber is displayed at the right side of each unit.

You can set the destination (for FAX) of the machineby pressing the [Destination setting] key.

Press the [RETURN] key to end setting and return tothe 25 mode menu screen.

2. Setting and changing serial number

On the serial number setting screen, select thedesired item, then each serial number setting screenwill appear.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [7. Serial number] key.

[Serial number setting menu screen]

Press the key corresponding to the desired item

on the screen.

[Serial number setting screen]

Enter the 9-digit serial number from the alphabet

and numeric keys on the screen and then press

the [SET] key to enter the number that has been

entered.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the serial

number setting menu screen.

When changing the serial number of other item,

repeat steps 3 to 5.


mode menu screen.

Note: When pressing the [RETURN] key withoutpressing the [SET] key, the setting iscomplete. However the new serial numberwill not be entered and the serial numbersetting menu screen will return.

25

3. Changing the destination setting (for FAX

option)

To change the destination setting, press the"Destination" key on the serial-number setup menu.The procedure is as follows.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [7. Serial No.] key.

[Serial number setting screen]

Press the [Destination] key.

[Destination setting screen]

Use the [▲] or [▼] key to select the destination.

Press the [OK] key to register the setting and to

return to the serial number setting screen.


mode menu screen.

Note: If you press [CANCEL] key, the copier willretain the previous destination setting andreturn you to the serial number settingscreen.

<Destination codes>

Code Destination Code Destination

JP Japan IE Ireland

CA Canada FI Finland

US U.S.A SE Sweden

KR Korea NO Norway

SG Singapore AT Austria

MY Malaysia BE Belgium

CN China NL Netherlands

SA Saudi Arabia CH Switzerland

TW Taiwan FR France

ZA South Africa GB Great Britain

PL Poland DE German

PT Portugal EU Europe

ES Spain NZ New Zealand

IT Italy AU Australia

DK Denmark

2

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-34

[9] Displaying the ROM Version

Display ROM version mounted to the machine.

1. ROM version viewing method

In the 25 mode menu screen, select [8. ROMversion], then the ROM version display screen willappear.

The item name and ROM version are displayed onthe ROM version display screen. Each serial numberis displayed at the right side of each item.

When there is no option not installed, the applicableposition is a blank.

ROM version display

1. System control

2. Image control

3. Panel control

4. Optical control

5. RADF

6. Finisher

When the optional fax and printer are installed, theirROM versions will also be displayed.

Press the [RETURN] key to end this screen andreturn to the 25 mode screen.

[10] KRDS Setting

Refer to the chapter “KRDS.”

[11] ISW Setting

Refer to the chapter “ISW.”

[12] Root Counter Display

The root counter (total counter can be checked in 25mode on the root counter display.

Step

1

2

3

4

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [11. Root counter].

[Root counter display screen]

Values of the root counter (total counter) are

displayed.


25 mode screen.

[13] Setting Date

Set the total count start day.

Step

1

2

3

4

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [12.Setting date] key.

[Setting date screen]

Using the numeric keys, enter the year, month

and day in that sequence

Press the [OK] key to return to the 25 mode screen.

Note: Ends when the [Cancel] key is pressedwithout amending the entered date, andreturns to the 25 mode menu screen.

[14] Counter Clear

(Other than 7020/25/30/35)The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or fixingparts/unit is replaced.

Select the [13. Counter Clear] from the 25 mode menuscreen to display the counter clear screen.

Following menu options are available from this screen.

1. Drum unit related counter (Drum counter).2. Fixing counter (fixing web counter).

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [13. Counter clear] key.

[Counter clear screen]

Press the key corresponding to the item to be

cleared.

Message in the message display area will

confirm if you really want to clear the item.

Press the [YES] key. When the item is cleared,

the counter clear screen will be restored.

When clearing another counter, repeat above

steps 3 and 4.


mode menu screen.

The operation here is the same as [13, Counter clear] ofthe 36 mode menu screen.

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-35

36

List of adjustment items for 36 mode

No.

1

2

Menu

High voltage adjustment

Timing adjustment

No.

—

1

2

Sub menu

None

Vertical/Horizontal

magnification

adjustment

Restart timing

adjustment

Circular menu

Charging voltage adjustment

Transfer current adjustment

Separation (AC) voltage adjustment

Separation (DC) current adjustment

Charging grid voltage adjustment

Developing bias adjustment

L detection adjustment

Automatic toner supply

Printer vertical magnification (drum clock)

adjustment

Printer 2 vertical magnification (drum clock)

adjustment (Other than 7020/25/30)

Platen vertical magnification (drum clock)

adjustment

Platen horizontal magnification adjustment

RADF (50% single side) vertical

magnification (drum clock) adjustment

RADF (100% single side) vertical magnification

(drum clock) adjustment





RADF (50% double side) vertical magnification






RADF (400% double side) vertical

magnification (drum clock) adjustment

Restart timing adjustment (All)

Restart timing adjustment (Main body upper tray)

Restart timing adjustment (Main body lower tray)

Restart timing adjustment (DB upper tray)

Restart timing adjustment (DB lower tray)

Restart timing adjustment (By-pass)

Restart timing adjustment (ADU)

Summary of operation

Adjustment in the field is inhibited.

Performs L detection adjustment for the developer,

and registers the result in the nonvolatile memory.

Display the L detection adjustment value as the result

when it is completed. Reset the developing counter.

Adjustment in the field is inhibited.

The method of adjusting the 7020/25/30

differs from that of the 7022/7130/7035/7135.

After adjustment, print the SGU pattern (No.16).

After making an adjustment, make a copy.

The same as 36 mode 9 RADF Adjustment.

After making an adjustment, print the SGU

pattern (No.16).

36 MODE

4

ADJUSTMENT

4-36

36

No.

2

Menu

Timing adjustment

No.

2

3

4

5

Sub menu

Restart timing

adjustment

Paper feed loop

adjustment

Leading edge original

erasure adjustment

Centering

adjustment

Circular menu

Restart timing adjustment (RADF single side)

Restart timing adjustment (RADF double side (first side))

Restart timing adjustment (RADF double side (second side))

Paper feed loop amount adjustment (All)

Paper feed loop amount adjustment

(Main body upper tray)


(Main body lower tray, small size)


(Main body lower tray, large size)


(DB upper tray, small size)


(DB upper tray, large size)


(DB lower tray, small size)


(DB lower tray, large size)


(By-pass, ordinary paper)


(By-pass, thick paper)


(By-pass, post card)

Paper feed loop amount adjustment (ADU)


(RADF single side)

None

Centering adjustment (All )

Centering adjustment (Main body upper tray, common)

Centering adjustment

(Main body upper tray, small size)


(Main body upper tray, large size)

Centering adjustment (Main body lower tray, common)


(Main body lower tray, small size)


(Main body lower tray, large size)

Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, common)

Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, small size)

Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, large size)

Centering adjustment (DB lower tray, common)

Centering adjustment (DB lower tray, small size)

Centering adjustment ( DB lower tray, large size)



After making an adjustment, print the SGU

pattern (No.16).



After making an adjustment , print the SGU

pattern (No.16).

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-37

36

No.

2

3

4

5

6

Menu

Timing adjustment

Running mode

Test pattern print

Density adjustment

Copy quality adjustment

No.

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

—

—

1

2

Sub menu

Centering

adjustment

Image read point

adjustment

Restoring standard

data

Intermittent copy

mode

No paper intermittent

copy mode

No paper mode

No paper endless

mode

Running mode

None

Test pattern density

adjustment

RADF scanner

density adjustment

Non-original erasure

installation survey

Circular menu

Centering adjustment (ADU, common)

Centering adjustment (ADU, small size)

Centering adjustment (ADU, large size)

Centering adjustment (By-pass, common)

Centering adjustment (By-pass, small size)

Centering adjustment (By-pass, large size)

Centering adjustment (Platen)

Centering adjustment (RADF single side)

Centering adjustment (RADF double side (first side))

Centering adjustment (RADF double side (second side))

Planten adjustment

Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment

Restart timing adjustment


Leading edge original erasure adjustment


Image read point adjustment

None

None

None

None

None


Print the SGU patters (No.16) after making

an adjustment.




Reset the adjustment data in the same

condition as they were when the machine

left the factory.

After making a selection, carry out operation.

Print the SGU pattern according to the

specification No.

After making an adjustment, print

the specified SGU pattern.

Make a density adjustment by letting the

machine read white chart.

Check with RADF opened completely.

(Other than 7020/25/30)3

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-38

36

3

3

3

No.

7

8

9

10

Menu

List print(Note 1)

Counter clear(Note 2)

RADF adjustment

FNS adjustment

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6 7

7 8

8

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

—

Sub menu

Test pattern

Font pattern

Memory dump list

Machine

management list

Adjustment list

Log list (1)

Log list (2)

Analysing list

Drum unit

related counter

Fixing unit related

counter

Vertica/Horizontal

magnification

adjustment

Restart timing

adjustment

Paper loop adjustment


RADF scanner

density adjustment

Circular menu

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Vertical magnification adjustment of RADF

(50% single side)


(100% single side)


(200% single side)


(400% single side)


(50% double side)


(100% double side)


(200% double side)


(400% double side)

RADF (single side)

RADF (double side (first side))

RADF (double side (second side))

RADF (single side)

RADF (single side)

RADF (double side (first side))

RADF (double side (second side))

None

FNS alignment plate position adjustment (back)

FNS alignment plate position adjustment (front)


Grid pattern with 2 dots in width of line and

500 dots at intervals of lines.

Built-in font pattern (Those for Japan include

kanji characters.)

Print dump of data stored from the specified

address in Hex and ASCII formats.

Print the condition of the machine, counter

data information, and jam history.

Print only 25/36 mode adjustment value

from the machine management list.

Print dump of data stored from the specified

address in Hex and ASCII formats.

Outputs the necessary list prints all together if trouble occurs in the field. (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

Clears the drum counter and the drum drive

counter.

Clear fixing web counter





Make an adjustment of density by letting

the machine read white chart.


Note 1: The sub-menu No. of the [Log list (1)/(2)] [Analysing list] sub-menu is different for each model of main body.Note 2: The [Counter clear] menu is the same as [13. Counter clear] of the 25 mode.3

ADJUSTMENT

4-39

36

[1] Setting Method

A special operating mode called “36 Mode” has beenprovided with this machine. This mode enablesadjustment of the various parts.

1. Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF when the SW1(main power) remains ON.

2. Turn the SW2 (sub power) ON while pressing 3 and6 of the copy quantity setting buttons.

36 mode menu screen will appear on the LCD. Atthis time, normal copy operation is not possible.

36 mode menu screen

Note: In the case of machines other than the7020/25/30/35, [8. Counter Clear] in the 36mode is the same as [13. Counter Clear] inthe 25 mode.

3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.Each setting screen will appear.

4. Enter data in each setting screen.

5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data thathave been entered.

6. Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF to cancel the 36mode.

7. New data will be effective after re-starting.

Note: If RADF and FNS are not installed, the [9.RADF adj.] and [10. FNS adj.] keys arenetted and neither key can be selected.

[2] High Voltage Adjustment

1. Charging voltage value adjustment

Charging voltage value adjustment is inhibited in thefield.

2. Transfer current adjustment

Transfer current adjustment is inhibited in the field.

3. Separation (AC) voltage adjustment

Separation (AC) voltage adjustment is inhibited in thefield.

4. Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment

Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment is inhibitedin the field.

5. Charging grid voltage adjustment

Charging grid voltage adjustment is inhibited in thefield.

6. Developing bias adjustment

Developing bias adjustment is inhibited in the field.

7. L detection adjustment

This adjustment be made immediately afterreplacement of the developer (before any copies aremade with the new developer). Developing counter isautomatically reset.

Caution: After replacing the developer, do not makecopies until you have performed Ldetection adjustment.

3

ADJUSTMENT

4-40

36

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [1. HV adjustment] key.

[High voltage adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until the “L detection

adj.” appears in the message display area.

[High voltage adjustment --- L detection

adjustment screen]

Press the [START] key, then confirm that [OK]

is displayed at [RESULT] and the L detection

data value.

To make another adjustment, press the [NEXT]

or [BACK] key to select the desired

adjustment.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to

the 36 mode menu screen.

Caution: If an OK indication does not appear afterthe developer has been agitated, it meansthat an L detection adjustment error hasoccurred. In this case, an error code willappear in the “Result” display area. Forthe meaning of error codes, refer to the “Ldetection error code list” of “List of warning(error) codes”.

8. Automatic toner supply

Normally, high voltage adjustment and toner supplytake place automatically so there is no need to carryout these operations in the field.

[3] Timing Adjustment

This function adjusts each timing.When timing adjustment is performed, use A3 or 11 x 17size paper.

Timing adjustment menu

1. Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment

2. Restart timing adjustment

3. Paper feed loop amount adjustment

4. Leading edge original erasure amount adjustment

5. Centering adjustment

6. Image read point adjustment

7. Restoring standard data

(1) Select [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menu screen.The timing adjustment menu screen will appear.

(2) Press the item key to be adjusted. The selectedsetting screen will appear.

1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-41

36

1. Vertical/Horizontal magnification

adjustment

Adjust the vertical/horizontal magnification at thezoom mode.

(1) Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menu screen,then the timing adjustment menu screen will appear.Select the [1. Drum clock adj.] on this screen, then theDrum clock adjustment (vertical/horizontalmagnification adjustment) screen will appear.

This adjustment has the following items. These canbe selected by pressing the [NEXT] or [BACK] key:

• Vertical magnification adjustment --- Printer (Note 1)

• Vertical magnification adjustment --- Printer 2(Other than 7020/25/30)

• Vertical magnification adjustment --- Platen

• Horizontal magnification adjustment --- Platen

• Vertical magnification adjustment --- RADF (singleside, 50%)





• Vertical magnification adjustment --- RADF(double side, 100%)



If the RADF is not installed, the RADF adjustmentitem will not appear.

(2) Enter data from the numeric keys on the screen, thenpress the [SET] key to enter the data that have beenentered.

(3) Press the [COPY] key to return to the basic screen,then make a test copy.

(4) Press the # button while pressing the * button toreturn to the Vertical/Horizontal magnificationadjustment screen.

(5) If the output (test copy image) is different from thestandard value, enter setting value using the numerickeys and make a test copy.

If the output (test copy image) is within the standardvalue, adjust the next adjustment item.

Note 1: Vertical magnification adjustment --- Themethod of adjusting the 7020/25/30 printerdiffers from that of the 7022/7130/7035/7135.

a. Printer vertical magnification adjustment

(Exclusively for the 7020/25/30)

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.

[Timing adjustment menu screen]

Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.

[Magnification adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until “Printer”

appears in the message display area.

Press the [COPY] key.

[Basic screen]

Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the

Start print button to print the SGU pattern.

Measure the vertical magnification of the output paper.

Standard value: 0.5 % max (life size)

Within ±1 mm with respect to 206 mm

Press the # button while pressing the * button to

return to the vertical/horizontal magnification

(drum clock) adjustment screen.

[Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)

adjustment screen]

If the vertical magnification is different from the

standard value, enter a value from the numeric

keys, then press the [SET] key to store the

adjustment value.

Input range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlargement)

1 step = 0.1 %

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification

becomes the standard value.

To adjust another adjustment item, press the

[NEXT] or [BACK] key to select the desired

adjustment.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the timing

adjustment menu screen.

Standard value:0.5 % max. (life size)

Within ±1.0 mm with respect to 206 mm

2064

ADJUSTMENT

4-42

36

b-1. Printer vertical magnification adjustment

(Other than 7020/25/30)

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until “Printer”



[Basic screen]

Set the copy size to A3 or 11 x 17, and the copy

quantity to 5, then press the Start button and

output an SGU pattern (No. 9).

Output five sheets of paper, and check for transfer

jitter.

Check the transfer jitter at a point approx. 20 mm

from the trailing edge of the paper.





adjustment screen]

If a transfer jitter occurs, enter a value from the

numeric keys (change the value in 2 steps), then

press the [Set] key to finalize the adjustment value.


1 step = 0.1 %

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the transfer jitter in all

five output sheets disappears.

Once you have confirmed that there is no transfer

jitter, press the [NEXT] key, then select “Printer 2”

to adjust the vertical magnification of “printer 2”.

Approx. 20 mm

b-2. Printer 2 vertical magnification adjustment

(Other than 7020/25/30)

Note: Ensure that the printer's vertical magnification(Other than 7020/25/30) is adjusted beforegoing ahead with this adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until “Printer 2”



[Basic screen]










adjustment screen]

If the vertical magnification is different from the standard

value, enter a value from the numeric keys, then press

the [SET] key to store the adjustment value.


1 step = 0.1 %



To adjust another adjustment item, press the [NEXT]

or [BACK] key to select the desired adjustment.





206

3 3

ADJUSTMENT

4-43

36

c. Platen vertical magnification adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.





[Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)

adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until “Drum clock adj.

(platen)” appears in the message display area.


[Basic screen]

Set the new pyramid chart on the original glass

and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press

the Start print button to make a copy.




Press the # button while pressing the * button to return to

the vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment screen.


adjustment screen]

If the vertical magnification is different from the

standard value, enter a value from the numeric keys,

then press the [SET] key to store the adjustment value.


1 step = 0.05 %





adjustment.

Press the [RETURN] key to return

to the timing adjustment menu screen.



d. Platen horizontal magnification adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until “Horizontal adj. (platen)”



[Basic screen]


and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press

the Start print button to make a copy.



Within ± 1 mm with respect to 200 mm





adjustment screen]





1 step = 0.1 %

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the horizontal

magnification becomes the standard value.







Caution: The result of the platen horizontalmagnification will be reflected all theimages read by scanner (RADF, platen).

200Vertical

magnification

200

ADJUSTMENT

4-44

36

e. RADF vertical magnification adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until “RADF/100%” appears

in the message display area.


[Basic screen]

Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and

select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the

Start print button to make a copy.



Within ± 1.0 mm with respect to 190 mm

Press the # button while pressing the * button to return to the

vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock) adjustment screen.


adjustment screen]





1 step = 0.1 %









2. Restart timing adjustment

To adjust the restart timing.

Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menuscreen, then the timing adjustment menu screen willappear.

Select the [2. Restart timing] on this screen, then therestart timing adjustment screen will appear.

This adjustment has the following kinds of items.These can be selected by pressing the [NEXT] or[BACK] key:

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (All)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (Main bodyupper tray)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (Main bodylower tray)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (DB uppertray)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (DB lowertray)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (By-pass)

• Restart timing adjustment --- Engine (ADU)

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (single side)

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (double side(first side))

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (double side(second side))

Verticalmagnification

190

ADJUSTMENT

4-45

36

a. Engine restart timing adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [2. Restart timing] key.

[Restart timing adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until the desired

adjustment item appears in the message

display area.


[Basic screen]

Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper and press the


Check the restart (leading edge) timing of the

output paper.

Standard value: Within ± 2.0 mm

Press the # button while pressing the * button

to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.


If the restart timing is different from the standard

value, enter a value from the numeric keys,

then press the [SET] key to store the adjustment

value.

Input range: -127 (slow) ~ +127 (fast)

1 step = 0.1mm

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing




adjustment.



b. RADF restart timing adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [2. Restart timing] key.



RADF adjustment item appears in the message

display area.


[Basic screen]


select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the


* Adjustment the “RADF double side (second side)”,

then make a test copy in double side - single side

mode and check the restart timing of 2nd output paper.

Check the restart (leading edge) timing of the

output paper.

Standard value: Within ± 3.0 mm (life size)




If the restart timing is different from the standard

value, enter a value from the numeric keys,


value.

Input range: -50 (slow) ~ +50 (fast)

1 step = 0.1mm

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing




adjustment.



ADJUSTMENT

4-46

36

3. Paper feed loop amount adjustment

If a paper is skewed, adjust the amount of the loop foreach tray.


Select the [3. Paper loop adj.] on this screen, then thepaper feed loop amount adjustment screen willappear.

This adjustment has the following kinds of items.These can be selected by pressing the [NEXT] or[BACK] key.

• Paper feed loop adjustment (All)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Main body uppertray)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Main body lower tray(small size) ) (Note 1)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Main body lower tray(large size) ) (Note 2)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (DB upper tray (smallsize) ) (Note 3)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (DB upper tray (largesize) ) (Note 4)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (DB lower tray (smallsize) ) (Note 5)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (DB lower tray (largesize) ) (Note 6)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Bypass (ordinary paper) )

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Bypass (thick paper) )

• Paper feed loop adjustment (Bypass (post card) )

• Paper feed loop adjustment (ADU)

• Paper feed loop adjustment (RADF) (single side)

Note 1: B5 only

Note 2: Other than B5

Note 3: Other than A3, B4, 11x17 and 8.5x14.The loop value is set at -10 when DB is LCT.Further adjustments are required if thepaper is still skewed.Set the amount of the loop to -8 if the mainbody is other than 7020/25/30.

Note 4: A3, B4, 11x17 and 8.5x14

Note 5: Other than A3 and 11x17

Note 6: A3 and 11x17

a. Paper feed loop adjustment for engine

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.

[Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until the desired adjustment

item appears in the message display area.


[Basic screen]



Check the skewing condition.


to return to the paper feed loop amount

adjustment screen.


If the paper feed loop amount is not correct,

enter a value from the numeric keys, then press


<Input range>

Other than 7025/35/7135:

–127 (small) ~ 00 (standard) ~ +127 (large)

7025: –127 (small) ~ 00 (standard) ~ +20 (large)

7035/7135: –100 (small) ~ 00 (standard) ~ +15 (large)

1 step =0.18mm (7020/25/30/35/7135)

=0.14mm (Other than 7020/25/30/35/7135)

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the paper feed loop

amount becomes appropriate.



adjustment.



4

ADJUSTMENT

4-47

36

b. Paper feed loop adjustment for RADF

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.


Press the [NEXT] key until RADF appears in the

message display area.


[Basic screen]


select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the

Start print button to make a test copy.

Check the condition of skewing in the output copy.


to return to the paper feed loop amount

adjustment screen.


If the paper feed loop amount is not correct,



Input range: -10 (small) ~ 00 (standard) ~

+10 (large)

1 step = 0.5mm

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the skewing condition is

correct.



adjustment.



4. Leading edge original erasure adjustment

Adjust the leading edge original erasure (leadingedge blank cut) amount.


Select the [4. Lead edge timing] on this screen, thenthe leading edge original erasure amount adjustmentscreen will appear.

Caution: If you reduce the erasure width, a blackline may appear on the leading edge of thepaper when you make an enlarged copy.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [4. Lead edge timing] key.

[Leading edge original erasure adjustment screen]


[Basic screen]


and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press

the Start print button to make a test copy.

Measure the leading edge original erasure

amount of the output paper.

Standard value: Within 3.0 mm


return to the leading edge original erasure

amount adjustment screen.

[Leading edge original erasure adjustment screen]

If the leading edge original erasure amount is

not correct, enter a value from the numeric keys,


value.

Input range: -20 (small) ~ +20 (large)

1 step = 0.1mm

Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the leading edge

original erasure amount becomes the standard

value.



1

1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-48

36

a. Each tray centering adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.

[Centering adjustment screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until the desired tray



[Basic screen]

Set A3 or 11 x 17 size paper in the tray to be

adjusted and select this tray. Then press the

[START] button to print the SGU pattern .

Fold the output (SGU pattern) at the center in

the paper feed direction, and check that the left

and right lines overlap completely.

Standard value: Within ±2 mm


to return to the centering adjustment screen.


If the miscentering is more than standard value,



Input range: -53 (inward direction of the center line)

~ +53 (rear direction of the center line)

1 step = 0.09mm

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is

within standard value. (Note 1)



adjustment.



Note 1: If it can not be adjusted within the specifiedrange, refer to “Other Adjustments”.


Adjust the miscentering for paper feed direction.


Select the [5. Centring adj.] on this screen, then thecentering adjustment screen will appear.

This adjustment has the following kinds of items.These can be selected by pressing the [NEXT] or[BACK] key.

• Centering adjustment (All )

• Centering adjustment (Main body upper tray,common)

• Centering adjustment (Main body upper tray, small size)

• Centering adjustment (Main body upper tray, large size)

• Centering adjustment (Main body lower tray,common)

• Centering adjustment (Main body lower tray, small size)

• Centering adjustment (Main body lower tray, large size)

• Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, common)

• Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, small size)

• Centering adjustment (DB upper tray, large size)

• Centering adjustment (DB lower tray, common)

• Centering adjustment (DB lower tray, small size)

• Centering adjustment ( DB lower tray, large size)

• Centering adjustment (ADU, common)

• Centering adjustment (ADU, small size)

• Centering adjustment (ADU, large size)

• Centering adjustment (By-pass, common)

• Centering adjustment (By-pass, small size)

• Centering adjustment (By-pass, large size)

• Centering adjustment (Platen)

• Centering adjustment (RADF single side)

• Centering adjustment (RADF double side (first side))

• Centering adjustment (RADF double side (second side))

Note 1: ADU centering adjustment can betaking place for each paper size.

Large size: A3, B4Small size: A4R, B5R, 8 x 11R

Note 2: ADU centering adjustment for eachpaper is the offset adjustment from theADU (common).

1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-49

36

b. ADU centering adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until "ADU" appears in the



[Basic screen]

Select copy mode to single side - double side mode, then

press the Start print button to print the SGU pattern.

Fold the output (SGU pattern) at the center in

the paper feed direction, and check that the left

and right lines overlap completely.

Standard value: First side: Within ±3 mm

Second side: Within ±3 mm









1 step = 0.09mm


within standard value for each paper size.

(Note 1)



adjustment.



Standard value: Within 3.0 mm (life size)

Note 1: If it can not be adjusted within the specifiedrange, refer to “Other Adjustments”.

Lengthwisedirection

M i s c e n t e r i n gamount betweenfirst side andsecond side

c. Platen centering adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until "Platen" appears in

the message display area.


[Basic screen]




Check the miscentering by comparing the

original with the copy.










1 step = 0.04mm


within standard value.



adjustment.



2

ADJUSTMENT

4-50

36

d. RADF centering adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until "RADF" appears in

the message display area.


[Basic screen]


select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the


* Adjust the "RADF (double side (second side)) ", then

make a test copy in double side - single side mode

and check the loop amount of 2nd outputted paper.

Check the miscentering by comparing the

original with the copy.





If the miscentering is more than



adjustment value.


to +74 (rear direction of the center line)

1 step = 0.04mm


within standard value for each adjustment.



adjustment.



6. Image read point adjustment

Adjust the image read point.

Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menuscreen, then the timing adjustment screen willappear.

Select the [6. Read point adj.] on this screen, then thecentering adjustment screen will appear.

Note: If you shift this value by a large amount,the RADF read density may change.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [6. Read point adj.] key.

[Image read point adjustment screen]


[Basic screen]

Set the new pyramid chart on the platen glass



Make a comparison between original image and test

copy image. Then check the image read point.

Standard value: 1.0 mm


return to the image read point adjustment screen.

[Image read point adjustment screen]

If the image read point is different from the



adjustment value.

Input range: -20 (small) to +20 (large)

1 step = 0.1mm

Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the image read point

is within standard value.



1

1

ADJUSTMENT

4-51

36

7. Resetting standard data

Reset the adjusted set values of timing adjustment tothe standard values (factory default data).


Select the [7. Factory default] on this screen, then theresetting standard data screen will appear.

This adjustment can reset the following item adjustedset values to the standard values (factory defaultdata). These can be selected by pressing the [NEXT]or [BACK] key.

• Factory default --- Vertical/Horizontal magnifica-tion adjustment

• Factory default --- Restart timing adjustment

• Factory default --- Paper feed loop amount adjust-ment

• Factory default --- Leading edge original erasureadjustment

• Factory default --- Centering adjustment

• Factory default --- Original read point adjustment

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [7. Factory default] key.

[Resetting standard data screen]

Press the [NEXT] key until the desired item


Press the [YES] key to reset the set values

to the standard values that have been selected

and to return to timing adjustment menu screen.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the set

values are not reset and return to timing


To reset another adjustment item, repeat

steps 4 to 5.



[4] Running Test Mode

Select the [3. Running mode] in the 36 mode menuscreen, then the running test mode menu sreen willappear.

The following items can be selected:

1. Running mode 1 (Intermittent copy mode)

Running mode 1 is an intermittent copy mode. In thismode, after the set number of copy operations hasbeen completed, the machine goes into the copyready status, waits 0.5 sec., then starts the sameoperation again.

2. Running mode 2 (Paperless intermittent

copy mode)

Running mode 2 is a paperless intermittent copymode. It makes copies at roughly the same timing asfor a normal copy, without performing paper detectionor jam detection. Also, like running mode 1, after theset number of copy operations has been completed,the machine goes into the copy ready status, waits0.5 sec., then starts the same operation again.

3. Running mode 3 (Paperless mode)

Running mode 3 is a paperless mode. It makescopies at roughly the same timing as for a normalcopy, without performing paper detection or jamdection.

4. Running mode 4 (Paperless/endless mode)

Running mode 4 is a paperless/endless mode. Itautomatically sets the copy quantity to infinity. Also,like running mode 3, it makes copies at roughly thesame timing as for a normal copy, without performingpaper detection or jam detection.

5. Running mode 5

Running mode 5 is process running mode. It consistsof running mode 4 plus an operation consisting of anoptics each-time scan and an automatic paper feedtray change.

2

ADJUSTMENT

4-52

36

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [3. Running mode] key.

[Running test mode menu screen]

Press the key according to the desired running

mode. (Mode 1 to Mode 5)

[Basic screen]

Press the Start print button.

After checking the copy operation, press the

Stop/Clear button to stop copy operation.


return to the running mode menu screen.

To perform another running test mode, repeat

steps 3 to 6.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to 36 mode

menu screen.

[5] Test Pattern Output

Perform an output check of the various internal patterns.

Select the [4. Test pattern] in the 36 mode menuscreen, then the test pattern output screen willappear.

Note: Do not output patterns that are not particularlyspecified.

No.1

No.2

No.49

No.11

No.16

Overall halftone

Gray scale pattern

Writing system check

Linearity evaluation pattern

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [4. Test pattern] key.

[Test pattern output screen]

Enter a pattern number to be output from

numeric key.

Press the [SET] key.


[Basic screen]

Press the Start print button to output a test

pattern.


return to the test pattern output screen.

To output a different test pattern, repeat steps

3 to 6.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the 36 mode

menu screen.

1

1

4-53

ADJUSTMENT36

No. 1 Overall halftone

[Check Items]

• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)

If white stripes, black stripes, or uneven density can be seen, locate abnormality in either scanner system orprinter system.

• When the density is set to 0 (white)

If the test pattern is fogged, locate abnormality in either scanner system or printer system.

• When the density is set to 255 (black)

If the density is light, locate abnormality in either scanner system or printer system.

* For information about setting the density, refer to “[6] Test pattern density adjustment” below.

Test Pattern

4-54

ADJUSTMENT 36

No. 11 Beam misalignment check

[Check Items]

Check the writing system abnormality (condition of resolution, reproducibility of independence point and so on).

Test Pattern

4-55

ADJUSTMENT36

31mm 237mm

190mm

20m

m19

0mm

190m

m

280m

m

280mm

206m

m

Edge of pager

Edge of pager

No. 16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items]

Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal. Items that can bechecked include horizontal magnification, vartical magnification, tilt image, and leading edge timing of the printersystem. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scannersystem is defective.

Test Pattern

1

4-56

ADJUSTMENT 36

[6] Test Pattern Density Adjustment

Density of respective patterns is adjusted in the followingprocedure.

Select the [5. Density Adj.] in the 36 mode menu screen,then the print density adjustment menu screen will appear.

Density adjustment menu

1. Test pattern density adjustment

1. Test pattern density adjustment

Adjustment of the density of the test pattern.

Select the [5. Density Adj.] in the 36 mode menuscreen, then the print density adjustment menuscreen will appear.

Select the [1. Print density adj. (1)] in the print densityadjustment menu screen, then the print densityadjustment screen will appear.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [5. Density adj.] key.

[Print density adjustment menu screen]Press the [1. Print density adj. (1)] Key.

[Print density adjustment screen]Press the key according to the desired test pattern to be adjusted. (No.01, No.06, No.12 and No.17)

Enter a desired density by a numeric value from the numeric keys, then press the [SET] key.Input range : 000 (light) to +255 (dark).


[Basic screen]Press the start print button to output a test pattern.

Check the density of the output test pattern.

Press the # button while pressing the * button to return to the print density adjustment screen.

To adjust another test pattern, repeat steps 4 to 9.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to print density adjustment menu screen.

[7] Image Quality Adjustment

This function adjusts the image quality adjustment.

(1) Select the [6. Image quality adj] in the 36 modemenu screen, then the image quality adjustmentscreen will appear.

Image quality adjustment menu

1. RADF scan density adj.

2. Non-image area erase check.

1. RADF scanning density adjustment

When the slit glass is replaced, adjust the densitywhen reading the original with the RADF.

Note 1: The mechanical adjustment, opticaladjustment and electrical adjustment ofthe scanner are completed.

Note 2: Make sure that the slit glass is cleaned.

Note 3: Make sure that the white chart is not dirtyor folded.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.

[Image quality adjustment screen]

Press the [1. RADF Scan density adj.] key.

[RADF Scanning density adjustment screen]

Set the white chart on the RADF (Note 1).

Press the [START] key.

Check that "Completed" appears in the message

display area.

If "ERROR" appears in the message display area,

then repeat steps 4 and 5 (Note 2).

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the image

quality adjustment screen.

Note 1: Be sure to set the white chart in A4 direction.If it is set in A4R direction, appropriateadjustment is not available.

Note 2: If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, thereis a possibility of a defect in the adjustmentof the scanner machine, optics, or electric-related parts.

3

4-57

ADJUSTMENT36

2. Non-image area erase check

(Other than 7020/25/30)

Carry out a survey of the installation environmentafter the machine is newly installed or moved to adifferent location.

Be careful of the following points when performingthis adjustment.

∗ Be sure that the RADF is fully open.

∗ Do not place anything on the platen.

∗ The platen glass must not be dirty.

Step Operation procedure

1 Enter the 36 mode.

2 [36 mode menu screen]

Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.

3 [Image quality adjustment screen]

Press the [2. Non-image Area Erase check] key.

4 [Non-image area erase check screen]


5 Confirm that "Operation OK" appears on the

message display.

If "Operation NG" appears, carry out non-original

erasure installation survey once again while

referring to "Trouble and Remedy" below.

6 Press the [RETURN] key to return to the image

quality adjustment screen.

Trouble and Remedy

Remedy 1

If you use the non-original erasure function, or copy originals that have a dark background using the non-original erasure method, relatively infrequently, use the machine in its present installation environment.If, however, you copy originals that have a dark background fairly frequently, re-install the machine in a dark location and facing a direction such that external light does not get into it, then carry out the

Remedy 2

If you use the non-original erasure function relatively infrequently, you can use the machine in its present installation environment.If, however, you copy originals that have a dark background fairly frequently, re-install the machine in a dark location and facing a direction such that external light does not get into it, then carry out the installation survey once again. In this case, if there is a bright light source, such as a fluorescent light, directly above the machine, reconsider the installation location and direction, or take steps to block off the light from the light source (by using a cover, for example), then carry out the installation survey once again.

Warning-1

Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases, the Non-image-area-erase function will not operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 mode" columns of the Service Hand book.

Warning-2

A datum with potentioal not to function non-image-area-erase is found.Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 mode" colums of the Service Hand book.

3

4-58

ADJUSTMENT 36

[8] List Print

Select the [7. List Print] from the 36 mode menu screen todisplay the list print menu screen.

You can select following menu options from this screen.

1. Test pattern.

2. Font pattern.

3. Memory dump list.

4. Management list.

5. Adjustment list.

6. Log list. (1)

7. Log list. (2)

8. Analysing list (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

Note: Don't try to touch a mode not mentioned.

1. Test pattern

This option is used to output a grid pattern consistedof line width of 2 dots and line-to-line space of 500dots. From this pattern, you can check the writesystem for normal performance.

2. Font pattern

This option outputs the font list built in the engine.

3. Memory dump list

This option is used to dump out data (in HEX andASCII format) after the address specified in ERDHmemory (this list is referenced for troubleshooting).

4. Management list

This option outputs the machine status, counterinformation and history of jam and so on.

5. Adjustment list

This option outputs a list of current adjusting values inthe 25/36 mode.

6. Log list (1)

The data from the memory is dumped in the HEXformat and the ASCII format. (for analyzing trouble)Normally not used.

Note: In the case of 7020/25/30/35, the key No.of log list (1) is “7”.

7. Log list (2)

The data from the memory is dumped in the HEXformat and the ASCII format. (for analyzing trouble)Normally not used.

Note: In the case of 7020/25/30/35, the key No.of log list (2) is “8”.

8. Analysing list

Outputs the necessary list prints together if troubleoccurs in the field. (for analysing trouble) ...............Normally not used. (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [7. List print] key.

[List print menu screen]

Press the key corresponding to the desired

menu option.

[List print screen]

When outputting the memory dump list, specify

the start and end addresses (Note).

Press the [Copy] key.

[Basic screen]

Press the [START] button to output the list.

Press the # button while depressing the * button

to return to the list print screen.

When outputting another list, repeat above

steps 3 to 7.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the list

print menu screen.

Note: The memory dump list is dump output inboth the HEX and ASCII format.

3

3

3

3

4-59

ADJUSTMENT36

[9] Counter Clear

The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or fixingparts/unit is replaced.

Select the [8. Counter Clear] from the 36 mode menuscreen to display the counter clear screen.

Following menu options are available from this screen.

1. Drum unit related counter (Drum counter).Note: Reset the drum counter after the charge grid

data to the standard values (factory defaultdata).

2. Fixing counter (fixing web counter).

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [13. Counter clear] key.

[Counter clear screen]

Press the key corresponding to the item to be

cleared.

Message in the message display area will

confirm if you really want to clear the item.

Press the [YES] key. When the item is cleared,

the counter clear screen will be restored.

When clearing another counter, repeat above

steps 3 and 4.


mode menu screen.

The operation here is the same as [13. Counter clear] onthe 25 mode menu screen. (Other than 7020/25/30/35)

3

4-60

ADJUSTMENT 36

[10] Adjustment of RADF

Adjustments of RADF are performed in the followingprocedures. For the adjustment, A3 or 11 x 17 copy papershould be used.

(1) Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the 36 mode menuscreen to display the RADF adjustment menu.

RADF adjustment menu

1. Vertical/horizontal magnification (Drum clock)adjustment.

2. Restart timing adjustment.

3. Paper feed loop amount adjustment.

4. Centering adjustment.

5. RADF scanning density adjustment.

(2) Press the key corresponding to the desired item. Thescreen corresponding to the selected item willappear.

(3) Using the [Next] and [BACK] keys, select the item tobe adjusted. The selected item will be indicated inthe message display area on the screen.

(4) Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on thescreen, then press the [SET] key to validate yourentry.

(5) Turn on the basic screen by pressing the [COPY]key, then make a test copy from the basic screen.

(6) Press the # button while depressing the * button toreturn to the desired adjustment screen.

(7) If the output does not conform to the standard, entera desired value again from the numeric keys, thenmake a test copy. When the output satisfies thestandard, proceed to adjustment of the next item.

(8) When the adjustment is complete, press the[RETURN] key to return to the timing adjustmentscreen.

1. Adjustment of horizontal/vertical

magnification (Drum clock)

(1) Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the 36 mode menuscreen to display the RADF adjustment menu. Select[1. Drum clock adj.] from this screen and the magnifi-cation screen will appear.

Using the [NEXT] and [BACK] will allow you to selectthe following items.

• Vertical magnification adjustment --- RADF (singleside, 50%).




• Vertical magnification adjustment --- RADF (doubleside, 50%).




(2) Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on thescreen, then press the [SET] key to validate yourentry.

(3) Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the [COPY]key, then make a test copy from the basic screen.

(4) Press the # button while depressing the * button toreturn to the magnification adjustment screen.

(5) If the output does not conform to the standard, entera desired value again from the numeric keys, thenmake a test copy.

When the output satisfies the standard, proceed toadjustment of the next item.

4-61

ADJUSTMENT36

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.

[RADF adjustment menu screen]




adjustment item appears.


[Basic screen]

Set the ADF adjustment chart on RADF, then

select an A3 or 11 x 17 copy paper. Then press

the start button to make a copy.

Measure vertical magnification of the output.

Standard value: –0.5% maximum (with 1.0

magnification).

–1.0 mm maximum per 190 mm.


to return to the magnification adjustment screen.


If the vertical magnification does not comply with

the standard value, enter the value from the

numeric keys, then press the [SET] key to

validate your entry.

Input range: —20 (reduce the magnification) to

+20 (increase the magnification)

1 step = 0.1

Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the vertical

magnification meets the standard value.

You can proceed to adjustment of another item

using the [NEXT] and [BACK] keys.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the RADF


Standard value:±0.5% maximum (in 1.0 magnification)

±1 mm maximum per 200 mm

Verticalmagnification

190

2. Adjustment of restart timing

Use the following procedure to adjust the RADFrestart timing.

At the 36 mode menu screen, select [9. RADF adj.] toopen the RADF adjustment menu. At the RADFadjustment menu, select [2. Restart timing]. Thismoves you to the screen you use to adjust the restarttiming.

You can use the [NEXT] and [BACK] buttons to selectthe following adjustments.

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (single side)

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (double side(first side))

• Restart timing adjustment --- RADF (double side(second side))

4-62

ADJUSTMENT 36

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [2. Restart Timing] key.

[Re-start timing adjustment screen]


adjustment item appears.


[Basic screen]




* When RADF (double side (second side)) is selected,

make copies from double side - single side mode, and

use the second copy for the adjustment.

Check the output for the restart timing.

Standard value: –3.0 mm maximum (Life size).




When the restart timing does not comply with

the standard value, enter the value from the

numeric keys, then press the [SET] key

to validate it.

Input range: —50 (delays the timing) to

+50 (advances the timing)

1 step = 0.1 mm

Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the re-start

timing meets the standard value.

You can select another item for the adjustment

from the [NEXT] and [BACK] keys.


the RADF adjustment menu screen.

3. Paper feed loop adjustment

Adjustment of the RADF loop amount is done in thefollowing procedures.

Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the 36 mode menuscreen to display the RADF adjustment menu screen.Select the [3. Paper loop adj.] from this screen todisplay the paper feed loop adjustment screen.

Using the [NEXT] and [BACK] keys, you can selectthe following item from this screen.

• Paper loop adjustment --- RADF (single side)

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [3. Paper Loop adj.] key.

[Paper feed loop adjustment screen]


[Basic screen]




Check paper feed loop volume of the output.


to return to the Paper Feed Loop Volume

Adjustment Screen.

[Paper feed loop volume adjustment screen]

If the paper feed loop amount is inappropriate,

enter a desired value from the numeric keys,

then press the [SET] key to validate it.

Input range: —10 (decrease) through 00 (standard)

up to +10 (increase)

1 step = 0.5 mm

Repeat above steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate

paper feed loop volume is obtained.



Press the [RETURN] key to return to the RADF


1

1

4-63

ADJUSTMENT36


Centering adjustment on RADF in feed direction isdone in the following procedures.

Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the 36 mode menuscreen to display the timing adjustment menu screen.Select the [4. Centring adj.] from this screen todisplay the centering adjustment screen.

You can select the following adjustment from the[NEXT] and [BACK] keys.

• Centering adjustment --- RADF (single side).

• Centering adjustment --- RADF (double side (firstside)).

• Centering adjustment --- RADF (double side (secondside)).

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [NEXT] key until the desired item



[Basic screen]


select A3 or 11 x 17 for the copy paper. Then,

press the start button to make copies.

* When the RADF (double side (second side)) is

selected, make copies from double side - single side

mode, and use the second for the adjustment.

Compare skew of the copy against that of the original.

Standard value: –3 mm maximum.




If the skew volume does not conform to the standard

value, enter a desired value from the numeric keys,

then press the [SET] key to validate it.

Input range: —74 (in the front side direction of the

center line) through 00 (in the back

side direction of the center line) up

to +74 (increase)

1 step = 0.04 mm

Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the skew meets

the standard value.





1

4-64

ADJUSTMENT 36

5. RADF scanning density adjustment

Whenever the slit glass is replaced, its density inreading an original must be adjusted in the followingmanner.

Note 1: Before starting this operation, everyadjustment must be completed for thescanner's mechanical, optical and electricsystem.

Note 2: Make sure that the slit glass must becleaned.

Note 3: Make sure that the white chart is notstained or folded.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [5. RADF Scan density adj.] key.

[RADF scanner density adjustment screen]

Set the white chart on RADF (Note 1).


Make sure that the message Completed is

indicated in the message display area.

If the message Error appears in the message

display area, repeat above steps 4 and 5

(Note 2).



Note 1: Be sure to set the white chart in A4direction. If it is set in A4R direction,appropriate adjustment is not available.

Note 2: If “ERROR” is displayed repeatedly, thereis a possibility of a defect in the adjustmentof the scanner machine, optics, or electric-related parts.

[11] FNS Adjustment

Positional adjustment of the finisher alignment plate isdone in the following procedures. This adjustment isrequired when papers exited from the finisher are irregularin size.

1. FNS alignment plate position adjustment (back side)

2. FNS alignment plate position adjustment (front side)

Adjustment is done for each of the following papersizes.

• 11 x 17 (8.5 x 11)

• A3 (A4)

• B4 (B5)

• 8.5 x 14 (8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R)

• A4R (A5)

• B5R

• 5.5 x 8.5R

• A5R

• F4

• 8K

• 16K

• 16KR

1

1

4-65

ADJUSTMENT36

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation procedure

Enter the 36 mode.


Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.

[FNS adjustment menu screen]

Press the key corresponding to the matching

plate to be adjusted.

[FNS matching plate position adjustment screen]

Press the [SET] key until the target paper size

of the adjustment is displayed at top of the

numeric keys.

Enter desired value from the numeric keys

on the screen, then press the [SET] key to


Press the [COPY] key to display the Basic

Screen, then make test copies from this screen.


to return to the FNS adjustment screen.

[FNS adjustment screen]

When the output does not conform to the

standard value, enter an adjusting value from

the numeric keys, then press the [SET] key to


Input range: —10 to +10

1 step = 0.2 mm

When proceeding to adjustment of another paper

size, select it from the [NEXT] and [BACK] keys,

then implement necessary adjustment repeating

above steps 4 to 7.

When the adjustment is complete, press the

[RETURN] key to return to the FNS adjustment

menu screen.

4-66

ADJUSTMENT 36

Management list P.1

[Description Items]

• Serial number indication.

• ROM version indication.

Version of flash ROMs.

• Copy count (data collection 1).

Total count and count during the specified period by mode.

• Checking counters.

• Copy count by paper size (data collection 2).

Total count and count during the specified period by paper size.

Management list Number of page

Output date, main body

serial number, and total

copy count, ROM versionMachine name

Serial number

ROM version

Copy count

(Scanner system)

Copy count

(Printer system)

Copy count of each

paper size

Counter check

1

Machine information

Communication

count

4-67

ADJUSTMENT36

1

Management list P.2

[Description Items]

(Printed only when the FAX or printer option is installed.)

• Print count for each paper size

• FAX count for each paper size

✽ The machine management list page Nos. differ according to the option installation condition, and so on.

Management list

Print count for each

paper size

FAX count for each

paper size

Number of page (✽)

Output date, main

body serial number,

and total copy count,

ROM version

4-68

ADJUSTMENT 36

JAM code count

F code count

Number of page



copy count, ROM version

Management list P.3

[Description Items]

• F code count (data collection 4).

Total count and count during the specified periods.

• JAM code count (data collection 2).

Total count and count during the specified period.

Management list

1

4-69

ADJUSTMENT36

Latest SC history

Management list P.4

[Description Items]

• Latest SC (F/E code) history.

List information about the last 50 service calls (F/E codes). For each call, indicates the following: date andtime of occurrence, error code, total copy count, and ROM version.

Management listNumber of page




1

4-70

ADJUSTMENT 36

Latest JAM history

Management list P.5

[Description Items]

• Latest JAM history.

The latest 100 jams are listed with the information on the date occurred, respective JAM codes, total copycount, and tray and paper sizes.

Management list

Number of page




1

4-71

ADJUSTMENT36

Copy count of each

parts (parts to be

replaced (named

arbitrarily) )

Management list P.6

[Description Items]

• Copy count by arbitrarily replacement parts.

Part name, part number, copy count and limit count of each parts.

Management list

Number of page




1

4-72

ADJUSTMENT 36

Copy count by fixed

replacement part

Management list P.7

[Description Items]

• Copy count by fixed replacement part.

Part name, part number, copy count and limit count of each unit.





1

4-73

ADJUSTMENT36

Count by the copy

mode

Management list P.8

[Description Items]

• Count by the copy mode (data collection 3).





1

4-74

ADJUSTMENT 36

High voltage

adjustment

Horizontal/vertical

magnification

adjustment

Restart timing

adjustment

Paper feed loop

amount adjustment

Leading edge original

erasure adjustment


Image read point

adjustment

Management list P.9

[Description Items]

• Adjusting values (36 mode).

Default values and setting values of the High voltage adjustment, vertical/horizontal magnificationadjustment, restart adjustment, paper feed loop amount adjustment, leading edge original erasureadjustment, centering adjustment and image read point adjustment.

* Adjustment list Page1





1

4-75

ADJUSTMENT36

FNS alignment

plate adjustment

(back side)

FNS alignment

plate adjustment

(front side)

Management list P.10

[Description Items]

• FNS alignment plate adjustment (back side)

• FNS alignment plate adjustment (front side)

* Adjustment list page 2.





1

4-76

ADJUSTMENT 36

Adjusting values

(25 mode)

Software DIP

SW settings


[Description Items]

• Adjusting values. (25 mode)

Values to be selected for respective adjustment items.

• 25 mode software DIP SW setting.

Default values and current setting value of each DIP SW.






1

4-77

ADJUSTMENT36

KRDS software

DIP SW setting


[Description Items]

• KRDS software DIP SW setting.

Default values and current setting value of each DIP SW.






1

4-78

ADJUSTMENT 36


[Description Items]

(Printed only when the FAX option is installed.)

Various FAX-related setting values

The listed items are the same as the serviceman parameter settings.

For details of the listed contents, refer to the FK-101/102 service handbook.

Management list

3

4-79

ADJUSTMENT47

[1] 47 Mode Setting Method

1. 47 Mode

This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/output check function) to check and adjustment thevarious signals and loads.

Also, 47 mode has a multi mode — it is possible tocheck the multiple input/output using one input/output check code.

2. Operation method (to start 47 mode)

(1) 47 Mode startup

a. Turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF when the SW1(main power) remain ON.

b. Turn the SW2 (sub power) ON while holding down4 and 7 of the numeric keys. The 47 Mode MenuScreen will appear.

This is the 47 mode in which the normal copyoperation becomes disabled.

47 mode menu screen

47 mode message display area

I/O check mode

Multi code

< 000 - 00 > IN : 000 OUT : ----

Input check

Input/Output check code

Output check

47 MODE(2) Input check method

a. Using the numeric keys, enter the code input forthe desired signal (sensor, etc.) to check.

b. When using the multi mode, press the * buttonand enter the multi code according to the desiredinput check item (signal) with the numeric keys.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.


Using the numeric keys, enter the input check

code (Note 1).

When using the multi mode, press the * button.

Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code

(Note 1).

Input check result will appear in the input check

result display area.

To check other signal input check, repeat steps

2 to 5.

Note 1: Refer to “[5] Input check list”.

4-80

ADJUSTMENT 47

(3) Output check method

a. Using the numeric keys, enter the output checkcode for the desired output load to check.

b. When using the multi mode, press the * buttonand enter the multi code according to the desiredoutput check item (load).

c. Press the [START] button to perform the outputcheck.

d. To end the output check, press the [STOP/CLEAR] button.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.


Using the numeric keys, enter the output check

code (Note 2).

When using the multi mode, press the * button.

Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code

(Note 2).

Press the [START] button to perform the output

check.

To end the output check, press the [STOP/

CLEAR] button.

To make another output check, repeat steps

2 to 6.

Note 2: Refer to “[6] Output check list”.

(4) Exiting the 47 mode

Turn the SW2 (sub power) off to exit the 47 mode.

[2] Initial Setting in the Field

Each adjustment data is totally returned to the datavalue when the machine is shipped from the factory.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.


Press "93" by means of the numeric keys.

Check that "093-000" appears in the message

display area.

Press the [START] button.

Settings (adjustment) data is returned to the

data value when the machine is delivered

from the factory.

To end the setting, press the [STOP/CLEAR]

button.

To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 (sub power)

OFF.

[3] RADF Original Size Detection

Adjustment

This adjustment is done when RADF fails to correctlydetect size of an original.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.


Press [69] by means of the numeric keys.


display area.

Set the original guide plate to the minimum size

(width) position, then press the [START] button.

Press the [STOP/CLEAR] button to end the

operation.

Press the * button.

Enter [1] from the the numeric keys.

Make sure that "069-001" is indicated in the


Set the original guide plate to the maximum size

(width) position, then press the [START] button.

To end the adjustment, press the [STOP/CLEAR]

button.

To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 (sub power) OFF.

3

4-81

ADJUSTMENT47

[4] ERDH Memory Check

Perform this adjustment when memory is expanded.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.




display area.


The "OUT:" entry in the message display area

indicates the total size of the E-RDH memory

(inclusive of the 32MB provided as standard).

• 32MB (standard) : 0032

• 32MB + 64MB : 0096

• 32MB + 64MB + 64MB : 0160

• 32MB + 128MB : 0160

• 32MB + 128MB + 128MB : 0288

Press the [STOP/CLEAR] button.

[47 mode screen]

Enter a value of [198] using the numeric keys.

Be sure that "198-000" appears in the message

display area.


The system begins executing a memory check.

The "OUT:" entry in the message area displays

"NOW": while checking is in progress, then

displays "OK" if all memory is operating correctly.

To end the check, press the [STOP/CLEAR]

button.


[4-1] Bypass Size Detection Adjustment

Perform this adjustment if paper size detection atthe by-press feed tray does not function correctly.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Operation procedure

Enter the 47 mode.




display area.

Set a sheet of A4R paper in the by-pass feed tray.

Press the * button.



display area.


Press the [STOP/CLEAR] button.

Set a sheet of A4 paper in the by-pass feed tray.

Press the * button.

Press [0, 0, 2] by means of the numeric keys.


display area.


To end the check, press the [STOP/CLEAR] button.


3

4-82

ADJUSTMENT 47

[5] Input Check List

Drum temperature signal

Toner control data 0

Toner control data 1

Fixing temperature sensor 0

Fixing temperature sensor 1

L detection signal

Humidity sensor signal

No paper detection signal

Tray upper limit detection signal

Tray detection

Paper size signal

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

10

12

13

16

TSCB

TSCB

TSCB

TH1

TH2

TDS

HUM1

PS8

PS11

PS103

PS108

PS13

PS7

PS10

PS102

PS107

PS9

PS12

PS101

PS106

PFDB (upper)

PFDB (lower)

SDB1

SDB2

1: Main body upper tray

2: Main body lower tray

3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray

5: By-pass



3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray



3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray



3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray

No paper

Upper limit

not reached

Tray is not

provided

Paper

Upper limit

Tray is

provided

Classifi-cation

Name Code Multi code Symbol Display

Analog

signal

Paper

feed

OFF ON

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 255

0 to 9

(Note)

Note:

Display1

1

2, 3, 4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

B5R

A5R

B4

A4

A5R

A4R

A4

A3

A4R

F4

F4

5.5 x 8.5

5.5 x 8.5

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 14

8.5 x 14

11 x 17

Tray

For Inch

Display1

1

2, 3, 4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

B5

B5

B4

B4

A5R

A5R

A4

A4

A4R

A4R

F4

A3

5.5 x 8.5

F4

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 11R

8.5 x 14

11 x 17

Tray

For Metric

Display1

LCT (3)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A4 A4R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R B5R B5 A4 A4R 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R

Tray

Common

3

3

4-83

ADJUSTMENT47

Paper feed sensor signal

Paper exit sensor signal

Interlock

Measured LD alarm value (7035 only)

Optics sensor signal

Check of serial communications

Toner supply periphery

RADF input

FNS input

20

22

23

38

40

50

57

60

70

1: Registration sensor

3: Jam detect sensor (DB upper tray)

4: Jam detect sensor (DB lower tray)

5: Intermediate conveyance PS/upper (Note)

6: Intermediate conveyance PS/lower (Note)

1: Fixing exit PS

2: Paper exit PS (7020/25/30/35)

1: ADU door

1: Optics home position PS

2: APS timing PS

3: APS sensor 1 (7020/25/30/35)

4: APS sensor 2

1: RADF control board

2: Finisher control board

3: Scanner drive board

4: Printer drive board

1: Toner level detector signal

2: Toner bottle PS signal

00: No original detect PS

01: RADF open/close detect PS

02: Cover open/close detect PS

03: Original resistration PS

04: Original feed PS

05: Original exit PS

06: Original detect PS 1

07: Original detect PS 2

09: Original size VR A/D data

1: Fan motor lock detection

2: Paper exit detect PS

3: Paper pressure PS

4: Tray full-stack detect PS

5: Tray count PS

6: Conveyance cover open/close detect PS

7: Shutter PS

8: Tray upper limit detect PS

9: Paper entrance detect PS

10: Stapler H.P. detect PS

12: No-staple detect PS.

14: Stapler ready detect PS

15: Front door switch

PS1

PS104

PS105

PS21

PS22

PS2

PS3

SW3

–

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS18

DFCB

FSCB

SCDB

PRDB

TLD

PS5

PS301

PS304

PS305

PS311

PS312

PS303

PS306

PS307

VR301

–

PS703

PS701

PS704

PS716

PS717

PS705

PS711

PS702

PS712

PS713

PS714

MS701

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

Close

0 to 255

In home position

Close

No original

No original

0000 ( )

0000 ( )

0000 ( )

0000 ( )

No toner

No bottle

No paper

Closed

Closed

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

No paper

0 to 255

Fan rotation

Paper loaded

Pressure applied

Full

Tray detected

Cover open

Open

Not at upper limit

No paper

H.P.

Staples loaded

Stapler ready

Door closed

Paper

Paper

Paper

Paper

Paper

Paper

Paper

Open

Not in home position

Open

Original is provided

Original is provided

0001 (Normal)

0001 (Normal)

0001 (Normal)

0001 (Normal)

Toner is provided

Bottle is provided

Paper is provided

Open

Open

Paper is provided

Paper is provided

Paper is provided

Paper is provided

Paper is provided

Fan stop or motor lock

No paper

No pressure

Normal

Tray not detected

Cover closed

Closed

Upper limit

Paper exists

Other than H.P.

No staples

Stapler not ready

Door open

Classifi-cation

Optics

RADF

FNS

Intrinsic

functions


OFF ON

Paper

feed/con-

veyance

Abnormal ornot connectedAbnormal ornot connected

Abnormal ornot connected

Abnormal ornot connected

Note: Exclusively for 7030/7130/7035/71354

4-84

ADJUSTMENT 47

2

FNS

Classifi-cation


OFF ON

FNS input

ITU input

ADU PS

70

75

80

16: 24 V detect

18: Tray lower limit detect PS

19: No paper detect PS

20: Stapler unit H.P. detect PS

21: Alignment plate HP detect PS (rear)

22: Alignment plate HP detect PS (front)

1: ITU set detect

2: IT door PS

3: IT exit PS (upper/lower)

ITU

ADU

–

PS25

PS23,24

PS4

Connected

Closed

No paper

Closed

Not connected

Open

Paper is detected

Open

–

PS706

PS707

PS708

PS709

PS710

24 V

Other than lower limit

No paper

Other than H.P.

Other than H.P.

Other than H.P.

0 V

Lower limit

Paper exists

H.P.

H.P.

H.P.

4-85

ADJUSTMENT47

[6] Output Check List

Exposure lamp

Charging

Transfer

Separation (AC)

Transfer + Separation (AC + DC)

Separation (DC)

Grid

Dmax/γ LED

Guide plate

Bias

Service counter clear

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

10

11

15

L1

M1, M3M4, SD6, M10

HV

HV

HV

HV

HV

HV

HV

HV

HV

1: Service counter clear(Clears service related counter values.)

2: Reuse counter clear

10: EKC data block clear

11: Job memory data block clear

12: Arbitrary replacement parts data block clear

13: Coded dialing data block clear

14: One touch data block clear

15: Group data block clear

99: Initialize KRDS non volatile area

Classifi-cation

Counterclear

High

voltage

/image

Name Code Multi code Symbol Remarks

Paper feed

1st paper feed SD

Paper feed motor

Tray up motor

Registration clutch

Loop clutch

Tray select (paper size signal)

By-pass size detection adjustment

Separation claw SD

20

21

23

25

26

27

28

29



3: By-pass

4: DB upper tray

5: DB lower tray

1: Paper feed motor

2: DB paper feed motor



3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray



3: DB upper tray

4: DB lower tray

1: A4R detection

2: A4 detection

SD1

SD2

SD3

SD101

SD102

M9

M100

M7

M8

M101

M102

MC1

MC2

PFDB (UPPER)

PFDB (LOWER)

SDB (UPPER)

SDB (LOWER)

VR1

SD7

Toner supply motor 1/2, developing sleeve, main motor, toner bottle SD

SD6: Toner bottle SD (7020/25/30 only)M10: Toner supply motor 2

(Other than 7020/25/30)

For development

For fax

For fax

For fax

Press the Start button after A4R/A4 has been set.

4

4-86

ADJUSTMENT 47

Optical motor

Polygon motor

Shading correction operation

Laser PWM

Conpel to laser ON

Platen still APS operation

Main motor

Fan motor

Total counter

Fixing heater

All LED ON

Operation panel check

Developing motor

PCL

TSL

Cleaning web solenoid

Toner auto supply

Toner supply motor

Toner bottle operation

TLD power

31

32

34

36

37

39

41

42

43

45

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

1: Pre-rotation does not take place.

2: Pre-rotation

0 to 255

1: Internal dehumidifying fan

2: Internal cooling fan

3: Fixing cooling fan

4: DCPS cooling fan

5: Developing suction fan

6: Internal dehumidifying fan (Low)

7: Internal dehumidifying fan (High)

1: Main heater lamp 1

2: Sub heater lamp 2

1: Forward rotation

2: Reverse rotation

M2

M5

M2, L1

LD

LD, M5

L1

M1

FM3

FM4

FM2

FM1

FM5

FM3

T(C)

L2

L3

OB

OB, LCD

M3

PCL

TSL

SD4

M1, M4, M10,

SD6

M4

SD6

M10

TLD

Classifi-cation Name Code Multi code Symbol

After HP search, execute A3 size

scanning at life size.


7035 only

Checking for LCD, keys, and buzzer

Toner bottle rotation control operation

also takes place.

Target level is detected continuously for

10 seconds. Also, toner supply stops

automatically 3 minutes after the start

of control.

SD6: Toner bottle SD (7020/25/30 only)

M10: Toner supply motor 2

(Other than 7020/25/30)

1 count

Remarks

Optics

system

Main

body

Operation

panel

Intrinsic

functions

7020/25/30 only


3

3

3

4-87

ADJUSTMENT47

Each load on FNS

Others

Toner bottle rotation

24V power source remote

Load output

RADF

FNS

70

69

58

59

60

1: For scanner

2: For printer

0: Original feed motor CW

1: Original feed motor CCW

2: Original reversal motor CW

3: Original reversal motor CCW

4: Original conveyance motor CCW



7: Rollar pressure SD

8: Exit SD

0: Original size adjustment (small size)

1: Original size adjustment (large size)

01: Paper conveyance motor

03: Alignment motor shift position move

(A4 position, close)

05: Tray up/down motor up

06: Tray up/ down motor down

07: Tray up/down motor fewer

quantity up move in the staple mode

08: Alignment plate H.P search

11: Motor pressure operation

12: Motor release operation

14: Stapler unit in stapling operation

17: Stapler shift motor H.P search

18: Stapler shift motor at rear side A4

1-position stapling position

M301

M301

M303

M303

M302

M302

M302

SD302

SD303

VR301

VR301

M701

M704, 703

M706

M706

M706

M704, 703

M707

M707

M708

M705

M705

Classifi-cation Name Code Multi code Symbol Remarks

33: Alignment motor at open A4 position

34: Alignment motor at close A4 position

35: Alignment motor in aligning operation

42: Exit motor in exit direction rotation

46: Tray up/down motor in tray

scan operation

47: Tray up/down motor changeover

to tray 1

M704, 703

M704, 703

M704, 703

M702

M706

M706

Motor speed when copy magnification is 50%



Intrinsic

functions

SD6, M4 Toner supply M and bottle SD both ON

to rotate bottle half turn; then stop.

For machines other than 7020/25/30,

only when the toner supply motor is ON.3

4-88

ADJUSTMENT 47

Each load on FNS

ITU load

ADU motor

ADU gate SD

PM counter clear

Various counter clear

(For assembly line)

Process initial set

Initial settings

(Restore factory defaults

For assembly line)

Display 36 mode adjustment values

and factory data

Automatic adjustment of L detection

reference value (For assembly line)

Process delivery completing

setting

(For assembly line)


70

75

80

83

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

Others

Initialize developing counter.

Perform L detection automatic

adjustment in the 36 mode.

Parenthesized values are for the

7022/7130/7035

1. Read current date.

• Set shipping date

• Set periodic collection start date

2. Enable incrementing of

mechanical counter (In 25 mode,

reset DIPSW21 – 6 to "0".)


to optional tray 1


to optional tray 2


to tray 2

51: Stapler shift motor H.P search

52: Stapler shift motor at front side

A4 1-position stapling position

53: Exit motor in rewind direction

rotation

54: Cooling fan motor rotation

99: Running mode

1: ITU gate SD

1: 140 (180) mm/sec forward rotation

2: 350 (450) mm/sec forward rotation

3: 210 (180) mm/sec reverse rotation

4: 350 (450) mm/sec reverse rotation

0: Process counter clear

1: Drum counter clear

ADU

FNS

ITU

SD5

SD8

M6

M709

M706

M706

M706

M705

M705

M702

1. Initialize file for default settings

(values saved by 47-096).

2. Set initial vertical magnification

adjustment (for RADF).

3. Set initial restart timing adjustment

(for RADF).

4. Set initial original feed loop

adjustment (for RADF).

5. Initial setting of mis-centering

adjustment write data (for RADF)

Cannot be rewritten in the field.

3

3

3

3

4-89

ADJUSTMENT47

Process delivery completing

setting

(For assembly line)

Light distribution check

Messages display

Initialize fax-related nonvolatile

memory

(For assembly line)

Display total E-RDH memory size

E-RDH memory check

Various board checks

(For assembly line)

96

97

101

121

197

198

999


Others

3. Set to suppress display of jam codes.

(In 25 mode, reset DIPSW10 – 7 to "0".)

4. Return test pattern density to

initial value (255).

5. Return solid pattern density to

initial value (255).

6. Save settings into factory settings file.

For message checking.

Initialize FAX related non-volatile

data using the “FAX Serviceman

Setting” menu. For details, refer to

the FK-101/102 service handbook.

A jig intended for factory use is

necessary.

2

4-90

ADJUSTMENT 47

OTHER ADJUSTMENTSCaution: Be sure that the power cord has

been unplugged from the socket.

[1] RADF Mounting Position

Adjustment

Adjust the DF-314 mounting position in the followingprocedures.

(1) Close the DF-314.

(2) Open the open/close cover, then turn the RADFheight adjustment screw until the RADF height adjustpointer comes to center of the scale divisions.

[2] RADF Distortion Adjustment

Adjust the amount of distortion of a copy in the followingprocedures.

(1) Set a A3 paper on the tray of the main body.

(2) Set the ADF adjustment chart on the DF-314, thenmake a copy.

(3) Check the amount of distortion in the copy.

Standard value: ±0.3% less.

Distortion pattern A

Feed direction

Distortion pattern B

(4) When the distortion is larger than the tolerance,adjust it using the distortion adjustment set screw.

Distortion pattern A:

Turn the distortion adjustment set screw clockwise.

Distortion pattern B:

Turn the distortion adjustment set screwcounterclockwise.

(5) Repeat above steps 2 to 4 until the standard value fordistortion is met.

Adjusting screw

Open/close cover

RADF height

adjustment pointer

Distortion adjustment

set screw

2

OTHER

4-91

ADJUSTMENT47

[3] RADF Original Skew Adjustment

When originals are fed being skewed, adjust theregistration pully bracket.

(1) Turn on the 1 −> 1 mode, then set the ADF chart onthe DF-314 and make a copy.

(2) Check pattern of the skewed original feed.

Standard value: ±0.5% less.

Skew pattern A

Paper feed direction

Paper

Image

Skew pattern B

(3) When the standard value for skew is not fit, open theopen/close cover, then adjust position of theregistration pully bracket.

Skew pattern A:

Move the registration pully bracket down.

Skew pattern B:

Move the registration pully bracket up.

(4) Repeat above steps 1 to 3 until the standard value forthe skewed original is within standard value.

[4] DB-409/410 Paper Centering Adjustment

Make a copy of the test chart, then performnecessary adjustment until the standard value for thepaper centering is fit.

(1) Loosen a set screw on the side guide situated at bottomof the tray. And also loosen the two set screws on thereinforcing plates (front/back) situated at top of the tray.

(2) Move the side guide back and forth by turning to theadjusting cam until the paper centering is withinstandard value.

(3) When the adjustment is complete, tighten the set screwsprovided for the side guide and reinforcing plates.

Note: If paper miscentering occurs, move the sideguide forwards and backwards, and adjustthe gap for the paper in use to between 1.0and 1.5mm. (The gap must be set so thatthe paper lifting plate meets both the lowerlimit position and the upper limit position.

Set screw

Open/close

cover

Up wards

Down wards

Registration

pully

Set screw

Reinforcing plates

Adjusting cam

Set screws

Measuredvalue

Center of image

Center of paper

2

OTHER

4-92

ADJUSTMENT 47

Set screw

Wire adjustment part

Set screw

Wire adjustment

part

Top face of tray

Metal scales

[5] DB-409/410 Tray Tilt Adjustment

Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray istilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feedroller shaft so that they may be parallel in each other.Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjustment mustbe implemented.

(1) Remove the front cover of the tray.

(2) Loosen a set screw of the wire adjustment partsituated in front side of the tray.

(3) Move the wire adjustment part until the distance fromtop of the side plate to the tray top face is equal inboth the front and back sides.

(4) When the adjustment is complete, tighten the setscrew for the wire adjustment part.

2

OTHER

ISW

5

ISW

5-1

ISW[1] Description of the ISW

ISW (In-System Writer) is an operation rewriting controlprograms stored in the flash ROM included in the diversecontrol board of a Konica digital copier with the board stillinstalled in the copier main body.

By implementing ISW you can update versions of controlprograms without changing the board or carry outmaintenance of the control board when changing theboard.

Two ISW execution tools are prepared. One is the “ISWTrns” (PC software) that implements rewriting byconnecting a personal computer (PC) and a digital copier.And, the other is the specialized “ISW Tool” featuringEPROM. These tools allow direct rewriting of the controlprogram in the flash ROM included in the copier main bodyby connecting the ISW connector of the copier main body.

The method of carrying out the necessary setup work onthe main body for executing ISW is described here. Forthe operation of the “ISW Trns” and “ISW Tool,” refer tothe “Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Service Handbook.”

Caution: The “Konica ISW (In-System Writer) Ser-vice Handbook” describes three differentdata rewriting approaches to beexecuted by the ISW Tool. Applicable ap-proach depends on the given model of thecopier. As for this copier, reference the“Type B Re-write Operation.”

[2] Operating Method

1. ISW connector

The ISW connector is provided on the right side faceof the copier. Of the two connectors situated in theside face, the lower one is the ISW connector.

The cap or seal that covers each connector must beremoved before the connector can be used.

2. Preparing the printer for re-writing

Before operating the ISW, maintain the copier in ISWmode.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [11. ISW] key.

[ISW menu screen]

Select the ROM where the ROM data to be

rewritten.

[Program rewrite screen]

Pressing [START] key after [START] key is

displayed, cause the machine to be data waiting

condition.

Execute the operation according to the

procedures specified in the "Konica ISW

(In-System Writer) Service Handbook."

ISW connector

KRDS connector

3

3

ISW

5-2

3. Types and quantity of re-write ROM

When rewriting the copier flash ROM data using the“ISW Tool,” rewriting EPROM must be prepared.

The following table lists rewriting EPROM preparedfor this machine.

Note: Quantity of the rewriting EPROM andtransfer file size are subject to changewithout previous notice.

System control

Image control

RADF control

FNS control

FAX control

17

2

1

1

2

Approx. 5.5 MB

Approx. 0.6 MB

Approx. 0.1 MB

Approx. 0.2 MB

Approx. 0.6 MB

ISW trns file size (. bin file)

Quantity of ROM

Target control program

4. Re-write precautions using the “ISW Tool”

System control ROM re-write

The re-write operation must be performed to divide theEPROM of the system control ROM into two groups,because of its number of “EPROM” is more tham 12. Thetiming (first time data transfer end timing) for the secondtime the re-write operations is performed is as follows.

The data LED (green) of the operation part changesfrom flashing to lighting.

The remaining EPROM is transferred to the “ISWTool” and the ROM data is transferred.

The LCD goes off during data transfer.

When data transfer is ended, the 25 mode menuscreen is displayed.

If an error occurs in the second ROM data transfer,perform the operation again from the beginning (firsttime).

5. Data transfer error

The FAX LED (amber) lamp lights if a transfer erroroccurs. If an error occurs, refer to the section "Errorhandling" in the separate “ISW Service Handbook” andperform the appropriate countermeasures. After thecountermeasures are completed, perform the re-writeoperation again from the beginning.1

1

1

KRDS

6

KRDS

6-1

KRDS

[1] Outline

If a FAX option is installed in this machine, it is notnecessary to connect a modem for KRDS. If a FAX optionis not installed, please connect a data modem for KRDS.

[2] Specifications

1. Type: Overall control board built-in type.

2. KRDS (Overall control board) Interface betweenmodem

: RS-232C Compatible

: Baud Rate: Max : 115.2 kbps

Default : 38.4 kbps

3. Basic Functions

Auto trouble notification

Operation count auto acquisition

Remote control (machine adjustment data,rewriting of the counter limit, etc.)

Notification of frequent JAM occurrence

Replenish toner notification

Repair and other call buttons

4. FAX-KRDS*

Communications Speed : Max. 14.4 kbps (V.17)

Modulation Method : (V.17, V.29, V.27ter,V.27 fallback mode,V.34)

* This specification is valid for KRDS hostapplication version 5.0 or higher versions.

[3] KRDS Setting

KRDS allows the copy machine to call up the hostcomputer periodically and also when there is anabnormality. Also data in the copier can be changed fromthe host computer.

KRDS can execute the above functions for the followingdata:a. Data on the copier's status such as total and PM

count.

b. Data on the frequency of the partial copier such asRADF paper feed count.

c. Data on the copier's error status such as SC (F) /JAMoccurrence code and count.

d. Data on the various adjustments

To use KRDS, set up as follows:

1. Set the KRDS connection recognition.

2. Initialize KRDS memory.

3. Set the type of modem and line.(If FAX-KRDS is used, this setting is unnecessary.)

4. Enter host password.

5. Set phone number.

KRDS setting menu

1. Calling time set

2. Host password set

3. KRDS TEL No. setting

4. KRDS software SW set

5. KRDS setup calling

3

3

KRDS

6-2

[4] KRDS Set Up1. KRDS set up itemKRDS set up procedure

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

12

1314

15

Operation procedure

In case of a modem using, turn off the modem and connect to the copier using a modem cable (RS-232C, 25P-25P straight cable) and wall jack using a modular cable to the modem.If the FAX KRDS is used, connect the FAX board to the wall jack using the modular cable.

Setting the KRDS connection recognition(25 mode → [1. Software SW])Set copier software DIPSW 12-6 (KRDS connection recognition) to “1”.

Initialize KRDS memory. (47 mode → [1] [5] [*] [9] [8] [*] → Start button ON)

Set KRDS software SW.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [4. KRDS software SW set] (Select type of modem and dial mode))Select the type of modem from the bit pattern 0 to 6 of the KRDS software SW No.1 and dial mode from the bit pattern 7.

Host password setting.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [2. Host password set]) (Refer to *1 and *2)

KRDS phone number setting.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [3. KRDS TEL No. setting]) (Refer to *3)

Turn off the SW1 (main power) and SW2 (sub power) of the copier.

Turn on the power switch of the modem.

Turn on the SW1 (main power) of the copier.

Check the set up flag setting condition.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [4. KRDS software SW set] → check that the data on the switch No.33 and bit No.0 indicates “0” (not yet).)

Check the KRDS communication mode.(25 mode → [9] KRDS Setting → [4] KRDS software SW setting → Check the data in bit No. 2 of switch No. 38.)It should be set on “1” if communications are via FAX-KRDS, and on “0” if communications are via a modem. If the setting is different, change the setting.

Preform KRDS set up calling.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [5. KRDS Setup calling])

Press the [START] key to start set up.

Check the finishing of set up.(25 mode → [9. KRDS setting] → [4. KRDS software SW set] → Completes if the data on the switch No.33 and bit No.0 indicates “1” (finished).)

Turn off the SW1 (main power) and SW2 (sub power) of the copier.

*1: Host password must be 5-digit.

*2: Host password 1 must be specified.

*3: For both the copier and the host side, copierphone number and host phone number 1 must bespecified.

*4: Refer to the manual of the modem aboutspecifications for connecting with the modularcable.

LINETEL

Note: In the case of FAX KRDS, connect to theLINE terminal on the FAX board.

Wall jack

Modular cable

Modem

3

KRDS

6-3

2. Setting the KRDS connection recognition

(1) Plug the power cord of the copier to the outlet.(When the SW1 (main power) and SW2 (subpower) of the copier remain off.)

(2) Turn on the SW1 (main power) when the SW2 (subpower) remains off.

(3) Turn on the SW2 (sub power) while pressing [2]and [5] of the copy quantity setting buttonssimultaneously.

(4) Select the [1. Software SW] key on the 25 modemenu screen.

(5) Select the bit No.6 of the switch No.12, and thenpress the [ON] key.

ON: KRDS recognize

OFF: KRDS not recognized

Note: If the copier software DIPSW 12-6 (KRDSrecognition) is not selected to “1”, themenu of the KRDS can not be selected.

3. Initializing KRDS memory

(1) Turn off the SW2 (sub power) when the SW1 (mainpower) remains on.

(2) Turn on the SW2 (sub power) while holding down[4] and [7] of the copy quantity setting buttonssimultaneously.

(3) Press the start print button after pressing the copyquantity setting button [1], [5] and [*] button, then[9], [8], finally [*] button again.

I/O check mode< 15 - 98 > IN: – – OUT: NOW

(4) “NOW” indication will be changed to “FIN” on themessage display.

(5) Turn off the SW2 (sub power).

4. Setting KRDS software SW

This function allows adjustment of the KRDS softwareswitches.

Note: Adjust the software switch while checkingthe switch and bit number since thememory is rewritten every time the bit data(1 or 0) is changed.

Any bit data that has been incorrectlychanged must be returned to the originaldata.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [9. KRDS setting ] key.

[KRDS setting menu screen]

Press the [4. KRDS software SW set] key.

[KRDS software SW set screen]

Use the [▲] or [▼] keys to set the switch number.

(Refer to *1)

Use the [▲] or [▼] keys to set the bit number.

(Refer to *1)

Press the [ON] of [OFF] key to set the bit data.

Press the [RETURN] key to end the setting.

*1:• The bit of the switch is written in the non-volatile

memory every time it is changed.

• The numbers shown in the message area aredefined as follows:

For each switch function, refer to “List of KRDSSoftware DIP SW”.

3

KRDS

6-4

5. Setting type of modem and line

(1) Using the switch No. 01, enter the modem and linedata into the bits 0 to 7, referring to the followingtable.

<If telephone line type is “Pulse”>

Modemintialization command

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0&D2&C1

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0%E0

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0&D2

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0&M5

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0\N5

Bit No.0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

*

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

2

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

7

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

<If telephone line type is “Tone”>

Modemintialization command

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0





AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1


Bit No.0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

*

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

2

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

7

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Example:

If the initialization command for the modem you areusing is AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0 and you have apulse-dial telephone line, enter the data for bits 7 to 0as 00000001:

In hexadecimal <*>, the value is expressed as 01.Be sure to verify with the above charts whether or notthe hexadecimal <*> output corresponds with themodel being used.

Reference:

This machine has a telephone (modem) line typeautomatic recognition setting function.

KRDS Software DIP SW:

Switch No.38 and bit No.0

Data 0: off (manual setting)

1: on (line type automatic recognition) (default)

As a result, if this switch is at “1”, Bit No. 7 of Switch No. 1 canbe either “0” or “1”.

KRDS

6-5

(2) List of KRDS Software DIP SW: Default value

No.Function Description

No setting (No data is sent to modem.)

AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1&S0





AT&FE0Q0V1X0S0=1


Manual setting (3 to 24 byte data is sent to modem.)

Pulse dial

Tone dial

8 bit (fixed)

No parity, stop bit 1 (fixed)

Even number of parity, stop bit 1

Odd number of parity, stop bit 1

No parity, stop bit 2

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

38400 bps

57600 bps

115200 bps

No setting

E0: When modem can receive commands, it does not echo back data sent from PC’s (Copiers)

No setting

Q0: Exist (Returns result code.)

No setting

V1: Word (Returns result code in English.)

No setting

&C1: ON only when the carrier is detected.

No setting

&S0: Always ON (Modem can send and receive.)

&S1: ON during online

&S2

81

(*)

81

(*)

57

(*)

1

2

3

0-6

7

0

1-2

3

4-7

0

1

2

3

4-5

Select modem

Dial mode

Data character length

Parity and stop bit

Reserved

Baud rate

Local echo

Result code

Result code form

(displayed result)

Set DCD signal operation

(carrier detect)

Set DSR signal operation

Default value

(Hexadecimal)

FunctionMSB LSB

7

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

5

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

3

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

byte

Don’tcare

bit

Note: In FAX-KRDS, items with the * mark aredisregarded (invalid).

3

3

3

3

KRDS

6-6


off

on

off (fixed)

on

No setting

&D0

&D1

&D2

No setting

M0: Always OFF

M1: ON until communication starts

M2: Always ON

No setting

X0: No indication of communication speed

X1: Indication of communication speed; Detect no dial/busy tone

X2: Indication of communication speed; Detect dial tone

X3: Indication of communication speed; Detect busy tone

X4: Indication of communication speed; Detect dial and busy tone

No setting

No setting

No setting

&F: This is set prior to shipping.

Send ASCII data specified in this area to modem

No setting

S0=: Effective data

No setting

S6=: Effective data

No setting

S7=: Effective data

57

(*)

10

(*)

00

(*)

01

(*)

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

6

7

0-1

2-3

4-6

7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0-7

0

1

2

Check DSR signal

Check DCD signal

Set DTR signal operation

Speaker control

Display speed when

connection is completed

and dial/busy tone is

detected.

Reset modem (This is set

prior to shipping.)

Arbitrary command regist-

ration area 1 (ASCII data)






ration area 4

Command free setting

Set S register (bit 0 - 7)

S0: Automatic receive ring count

S6: Wait time from off hook

to dial start

S7: Off hook limit timer

Default value

(Hexadecimal)

FunctionMSB LSB

7

0

1

0

1

6

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

5

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

4

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

3

0

0

1

1

2

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

byte bit

3

3

3

3

KRDS

6-7


No setting

S8=: Effective data

No setting

S9=: Effective data

No setting

S10=: Effective data

No setting

S11=: Effective data

01H (1)

03H (3)

1EH (30)

03H (3)

06H (6)

0EH (14)

5FH(95)

20H (32) x 1sec

40H (64) x 1sec

0AH (10) x 100ms

20H (32) x 100ms

1EH (30) x 1sec

FFH (255) x 5ms

disable

enable

disable

enable

disable

enable

disable

enable

disable

enable

01

(*)

01 (*)

03 (*)

1E (*)

03 (*)

06 (*)

0E (*)

5F (*)

20 (*)

40 (*)

0A (*)

20 (*)

1E (*)

FF (*)

99

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

3

4

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

S8: Pause time (Dial stop

time (sec.))

S9: Carrier recognize time

S10: Allowable carrier

stop time

S11

Reserved

S0 data (No. of times data

was received automatically)

S6 data (Wait time until

dialing starts.)

S7 data (Wait time until

carrier detect)

S8 data (Pause time)

S9 data (Carrier detection

time)

S10 data (Carrier dis-

connection detection time)

S11 data

Timer 1 (Ring reception→

Connect reception)

Timer 2 (Dial call end

→ Connect reception)

Timer 3

Timer 4 (Line Connect → Send

Start-up message request)

Timer 5 (Opposite Party

Signal answer wait time)

Retry data; Timer 6

(Initialization OK →Dial call)

Call when SC error occurs

Call specify date

Call parts replace date

Call drum replace date

Call regular service date

Reserved

Default value

(Hexadecimal)

FunctionMSB LSB

7 6

0

1

5

0

1

4

0

1

0

1

3

0

1

0

1

2

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

byte bit

Don’tcare

Don’tcare

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

00 - FFH

3

3

KRDS

6-8


disable

enable

disable

enable

disable

enable

not yet

finished

1 min.

3 min.

5 min.

7 min.

0

5

10

No limit

CR/LF: LF exist

CR: No LF

Copy quantity: level 1




Original feed quantity: level 1




MCBJ: level 1

MCBJ: level 2

MCBJ: level 3

MCBJ: level 4

MOBJ: level 1

MOBJ: level 2

MOBJ: level 3

MOBJ: level 4

00

0A

(*)

(*)

(*)

55

00

32

33

34

35

36

37

0

1

2

3-7

0

1-2

3-4

5-6

7

0-1

2-3

4-5

6-7

Call when optional configu-

ration is changed

Report of toner

replenishment

Report of JAM occur

frequently

Reserved

Set up flag

Redial interval

Redial count

Reserved

Line feed control

(when initializing modem)

Call JAM date (main body)

Valid copy quantity

Call ADF JAM date

Valid original feed quantity

Call JAM date

MCBJ setting

Call JAM date

MOBJ setting

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Default value

(Hexadecimal)

FunctionMSB LSB

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

byte bit

Don’t care

Don’t care

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

6

7

Call regular transmit date

Select regular transmit

(Time and count)

0

1

0

131 disable

enable

time

counter

99

3

KRDS

6-9


off

on

not connect

connect

DATA (Using a modem)

FAX

Upper 2-digit fixed (for host)

All 6-digit (for host)

Call back communication

No call back communication

copy enable

copy disable

copy enable

copy disable

disable

enable

disable

enable

disable

enable

Prohibition

Permission

88

00

00

38

39

40

0

1

2

3-5

6

7

0-1

2

3

4

5

6-7

0

1

2-5

6

7

Line type automatic

recognition

MSAD connection

KRDS communication

mode (Note 1)

Reserved

PM limit data length

Regular transmit communication

Sequence control

Reserved

RS-232 line error

K01_XX (Note 2)

Modem AT command error

K02_XX (Note 2)

Reserved

Force copy stop

(at host side) (Note 3)

Reserved

Force copy stop (Note 3)

(at terminal equipment side)

Jam history data clear

Reserved

User data access setting

(local) (Note 4)

Reserved

Default value

(Hexadecimal)

Bit patternMSB LSB

7

0

1

0

6

0

1

0

1

5

0

1

4 3

0

1

2

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

byte bit

Don’t care

Don’t care

Don’t care

Don’t care

Don’tcare

(*)

Note 1: KRDS Communications Mode (38 Byte, 2 bit) : This bit is set on “1” when the FAX option is connected andwhen the KRDS memory initialization operation is performed.

Note 2: For details of errors, refer to [10] Error code table.

Note 3: Copy prohibition: If DIP SWs 39-5 and 40-0 are both set to 1, then it becomes impossible to copy.

Note 4: There are three types of user data, speed dial data, programmed dial data and group dial data. Normally, dueto maintenance of the confidentiality of user data, access to these data by service personnel is, as a rule,prohibited. If for any reason, access is necessary using KRDS, this switch can be changed to ‘1’, then accesswill be enabled. In this case, change the settings after obtaining the agreement of the customer.

3

KRDS

6-10

6. Setting host password

This function sets the host password.

(1) Screen selection

Select the [9. KRDS setting] key in the 25 modemenu screen to display the KRDS setting menuscreen as an initial screen.

Then select the [2. Host password set] key todisplay the host password setting screen.

(2) Setting method

a. Three patterns can be used to set KRDS hostpassword. The entry screen, screen contents andsetting method for each pattern are all the same.Each message, however, is different.

(There are only 2 patterns for a usable password.)

b. Press the [NEXT] or [BACK] key to 2change thescreen.

c. Enter the host password, 5-digit number oralphabet, with the numeric keys on the screen andpress the [SET] key.

d. The firstly entered number or alphabet will beshifted to the left end.

e. After inputting the password, it the [NEXT], [BACK]or [RETURN] key is pressed before pressing thekey, the data that has been entered is canceled.

f. Press the [SET] key, and then press the[RETURN] key to set the entered password. Thescreen will return to the KRDS setting menuscreen.

* As the host password is set to “00000” in factorysetting, ensure to change it to the password whichwas set by the KRDS host application forcommunication.Confirm the password of host side with KRDS hostapplication administrator.

* Note that the host password setting (Host 1) mustbe performed.

* See the [5] Calling time set menu mode (Arbitrary)concerning “Host 2” settings.

* Do not care “Host 3.”

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [2. Host password set] key.

[Host password setting screen]

Enter password consisting of number and

alphabet.

Press the [NEXT] or [BACK] key to change the

screen, then enter password (up to 2 patterns).



3

KRDS

6-11

7. Setting the KRDS telephone number

This function sets copier for KRDS and host telephonenumber.


Select the [9. KRDS setting] key in the 25 mode menuscreen to display the KRDS setting menu screen asan initial screen.

Then select the [3. KRDS TEL No. Setting] key todisplay the KRDS TEL NO setting screen.

(2) Setting method

a. Three patterns can be used to set KRDS phonenumber. The entry screen, screen contents andsetting method for each pattern are all the same.Each screen, however, is different.

b. Press the [NEXT] or [BACK] key to change thescreen.

c. Enter the telephone number, 15-digit or lessnumber, with the numeric keys on the screen andpress the [SET] key.

d. The entered number is displayed in the cursorsection displayed in the line 2 of the messagedisplay area. The cursor shifts from left to rightaccording to the entered.

If more than 15 digit is entered, the number of the15 digit is rewritten.

e. To reenter the telephone number, press the Stop/clear button to clear the data then enter the correctnumber.

f. If you wish to change the number of an arbitraryposition, press the [<<] or [>>] key to move thecursor to the desired position and reenter.

g. No data has been set for the second row of themessage area prior to shipping.

h. The keys except the numeric keys are defined asfollows:

[,] Pause:

Wait temporarily for self-dial feed. (2-3 sec.)

[W] Wait:

Wait for dial tone such as asynchronous,etc. (excluding sound guidance).

[T] Tone Dial:

Indicate tone dial after this symbol

[P] Pulse Dial:

Indicate pulse dial after this symbol

[- ] Symbol to divide numbers:

(This symbol is ignored when dialing.)

[ . ], [#], [*]:

Use these keys as required such extensionnumber.

i. After inputting the password, it the [NEXT], [BACK]or [RETURN] key is pressed before pressing the[SET] key, the data that has been entered iscanceled.

j. Press the [SET] key, and then press the [BACK]key to set the entered number. The screen willreturn to the KRDS setting menu screen.

* • Note that the telephone number setting (copier)and telephone number setting (Host1) must beperformed.

• Refer to [5] Calling time set menu mode(Arbitrary) for the (Host 2).

• Do not care "Host 3."

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [3. KRDS TEL No. setting] key.

[KRDS TEL No. setting screen]

Enter telephone number (15-digit or less) consisting

of number and alphabet with numeric keys.

Press the [NEXT] or [BACK] key to change the

screen, then telephone number (up to 3 patterns).



1

KRDS

6-12

8. Calling KRDS set up

<Auto set up>

In the host call setting, call the designated host computerin the set date and time, and transmit each data of thecopier. Refer to the separate KRDS Host ApplicationManual for details of the data being handled.


Select the [9. KRDS setting] in the 25 mode menuscreen to display the KRDS setting menu screen.

Then select the [4. KRDS software SW set] to displaythe KRDS software SW set screen.

Check that the software DIP SW 33-0 is set to “0”.After checking, press the [RETURN] key to return tothe KRDS setting menu screen.

On the KRDS setting menu screen, select the [5.KRDS Setup calling] to display the calling host forsetup screen.

Note: If the KRDS software DIPSW 33-0 (Set upflag) is not selected to “0” (not yet). TheKRDS setup calling screen can not beselected.

(2) Setting method

a. Press the [Start] key in the screen.

(a) Communication message

Calling the host for setupCommunicating

Note: Do not turn OFF the power duringcommunication.

(b) Completion message

Calling the host for setupCommunication completed

b. Turn off the power if no completion message isdisplayed in ten minutes.

Check that the host computer starting up correct,host phone number, cable connection, etc. thenopen to calling the host for setup screen again topress the [Start] key.

c. Turn off the power to end the operation.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [4. KRDS software SW set] key.

[KRDS software SW set screen]

Use the [ ▲ ] , [ ▼ ] key to select the switch number

to “33” and bit number “0”.

Check that bit data indicates “0”. If not, set to “0”

to press the [OFF] key.

Press the [RETURN] key to return to the KRDS

setting menu screen.


Press the [5. KRDS Setup calling] key.

[Calling the host for setup screen]

Press the [Start] key.

Check the message on the screen.

Turn off the power to end the operation.

• How to confirm the completion of setup

Confirm the data at bit No. 0 of address 33 inreference to "4. Setting KRDS software DIP SW."

If "0", setup is not completed.If "1", setup is completed.

<Manual set up>

This copier machine can be set up manually, otherthan the automatical setup as explained above. (Thesetup is effective when both the copier and the hosthave completed the setup action.)

• Operation for the copier machine

1. Switch on the power of modem.

2. Set the address No. 33 as referring to "4. SettingKRDS software DIP SW."

3. Change the data of bit No. 0 from 0 to 1.

0: Set up not completed1: Set up completed

4. Establish the changed data by pressing the copybutton.

5. Switch off the power of main body.

• Operation for the host computer

For the operation of the host compouter, refer to theKRDS Host Application Administrator's Manual.

KRDS

6-13

[5] Calling Time Set Menu Mode (Arbitrary)

Select the [9. KRDS setting] key in the 25 mode menuscreen to display the KRDS setting menu screen as aninitial screen.

Then select the [1. Calling time set] key to display thecalling time set menu screen.

Calling time set menu

1. Calling mode-1

2. Calling mode-2

3. Calling mode-3

Press the [RETURN] key to exit the calling time set menuscreen and return to the KRDS setting screen.

* This host calling setting calls everything to the “Host2”.Therefore, it is necessary first to set the “Host 2”telephone No. and host password.

1. Setting calling time setting mode

This function sets designated date calling.


Select the [1. Calling mode-1] (Setting designateddate calling setting) in the calling time set menuscreen to display the calling mode-1 (designated datecalling) setting screen.

Press the [RETURN] key to exit the calling mode-1(designed date calling) setting screen and return tothe calling time set menu screen.

(2) Entering method

a. Enter year, month, day and time using the numerickeys.

b. The cursor that indicates entering position will beappeared in the message indication area at line 2.

c. Using the [<<], [>>] key and move the cursor todesired position.

d. If reenter the entered data, press the Stop/clearbutton to clear the entered data then enter the dataagain.

e. Enter year, month, day and time using the numerickeys, then press the [SET] key.

f. Enter year, month, day and time as follows.

• The year is entered by inputting 4-digit in theChristian era.

• The month and day are entered by inputting 2-digitnumber. (Example: 1 is entered as 01.)

• The time is entered using 24 hour clock.

(Example: 1:00p.m. is entered as 13.)

• The minute is entered by inputting 2-digit number.(Example: 1 is entered as 01.)

• Example:

at 1:00 p.m. of January 15, 1998 −>

1998/01/15 13:00

g. Press the [SET] key every time data for one itemis entered and check the entered data.

h. The screen will return to the calling time settingmenu screen if the [RETURN] key is pressedwithout pressing the [SET] key. In this case, noentered data will be changed.

KRDS

6-14

i. Press the [SET] key, and then the [RETURN] keyto end setting. The screen will return to the callingtime set menu screen.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.




Press the [1. Calling time set] key.

[Calling time set menu screen]

Use the [1. Calling mode-1] (Setting designated

date calling setting).

[Calling mode-1 (Designed date calling)

setting screen]

Enter year, month and day using the numeric

key on the screen, then press the [<<], [>>] key

to move the cursor to entering position of time.

Enter time and minute using the numeric keys on

the screen, then press the [SET] key.

Press the [RETURN] to end the setting.

2. Setting regular date & time calling

The copier will call the host at the regular timespecified.


Select the [2. Calling mode-2] (regular data & timecalling setting) in the calling time set menu screen todisplay the calling mode-2 (regular data & timecalling) setting screen.

Press the [RETURN] key to exit the calling mode-2(regular data & time calling) setting screen and returnto the calling time set menu screen.

(2) Mode selecting method

a. Select and press the desired mode in the[monthly], [weekly], [daily] keys.

There are three mode type (month, week, day)that can be set.

b. The current selected mode is high lightedaccording to the mode key.

At this time, the setting contents will be appearedin the message indication area at line 2.

KRDS

6-15

(3) Mode setting method

Perform the operation in each mode as follows:

a. Monthly mode

(a) Using the numeric keys, enter the day, hourand minute.

(b) Press the [SET] key to enter the input data.

b. If you wish to change the number of an arbitraryposition, press the [<<] or [>>] key to move thecursor to the desired position and reenter.

c. If reenter the entered data, press the Stop/clearbutton to clear the entered data then enter the dataagain.

d. Weekly mode

(a) Using the numeric keys, enter the day of theweek, hour and minute.

(b) The day of the week is entered using thenumeric keys according to the followingdefinitions.

1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday

4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday

7: Sunday

(c) Press the [SET] key to enter the input data.

e. Daily mode

(a) Using the numeric keys, enter the hour andminute.

(b) Press the [SET] key to enter the input data.

f. Common operation

(a) The screen will return to the calling time setmenu screen if the [RETURN] key is pressedwithout pressing the [SET] key. In this case, noentered data will be changed.

(b) Press the [SET] key, and then the [RETURN]key to end setting. The screen will return tocalling time set menu screen.

(c) Enter the number with the numeric keys asfollows:

• The month and day are entered by inputting 2-digitnumber. (Example: 1 is entered as 01.)

• The time is entered using 24 hour clock.

(Example: 1:00p.m. is entered as 13.)

• Example:

Monthly mode: 10 17:10

Weekly mode: day 17:10

Daily mode: 17:10

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Use the [2. Calling mode-2] (regular time calling

setting).

[Calling mode-2 (regular time calling) setting

screen]

Press the any key in [monthly], [weekly], [daily]

keys.

Using the numeric keys on the screen, enter the

day, hour and minute.

(Item that can be input differs from depend on

the mode.)



KRDS

6-16

3. Setting regular count calling

The copier will call the host at the regular countspecified.


Select the [3. Calling mode-3] (regular count) in thecalling time set menu screen to display the Callingmode-3 (regular count call) setting screen.

Press the [RETURN] key to exit the Calling mode-3(Regular count call) setting screen and return to thecalling time set menu screen.

(2) Setting method

a. Using the numeric keys on the screen, enter 6-digit number, regular count value, then press the[SET] key.

b. To reenter the entered data, press the Stop/clearbutton to clear the entered data then enter the dataagain.

c. The entered numerical value is entered from thenumber of 4 digit. The number is displayed whileshifting from right to left.

d. The screen will return to the calling time set menuscreen if the [RETURN] key is pressed withoutpressing the [SET] key. In this case, no entereddata will be changed.

e. Press the [SET] key then the [RETURN] key toend the setting. The screen will return to the callingtime set menu screen.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Operation procedure

Enter the 25 mode.






Use the [3. Calling mode-3] (regular count).

[Calling mode-3 (regular count call) setting

screen]

Using the numeric keys on the screen, enter

number, regular count value, then press the

[SET] key.


[6] KRDS Host Call

If the machine is connected to a KRDS, it can call the hostat the service center.

a. Select the [JAM history] (JAM-related trouble call),[SC history] (SC-related trouble call), [No TONER],[No PAPER], [COPY QUALITY] (Copy quality-related trouble call) or [OTHER REASON] (Othercall), depending upon the particular circumstances.

KRDS host menu

1.JAM history

2.SC history

3.NO TONER

4.NO PAPER

5.COPY QUALITY

6.OTHER REASON

b. When the [Start] key is pressed, the machine startscalling the host.

Caution: Do not turn OFF the power duringcommunication.

KRDS

6-17

[7] Data to be Processed

• For the data that KRDS can process, refer tothe Service HandBook for the copier, [4] DataCollection in the 25 mode “Adjustment.”

• You can refer to the data that KRDS canprocess. For detailed procedure, refer to theService HandBook for the copier, [4] DataCollection in the 25 mode “Adjustment.”

[8] FAX KRDS Auto On Function

If the FAX option is installed, the FAX-KRDS modeautomatically becomes effective when the main power isturned ON.

(Mode 25 ∅ Software DIP SW12–6:1 (connected)

KRDS software DIP SW 38-2: Set on 1 (FAX).)

Even if the FAX option is installed, if the FAX KRDSfunction is not used, (if a modem is used), the above FAXKRDS auto on function is deactivated by changing thesettings below.

However, in [8] “Setting the Serial number” in 25 Mode, ifthe “Destination” setting is DE: German, FAX KRDS modedoes not become valid even if the FAX option is installed.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Operation procedure

Enter the key operator mode.

[Key operator mode menu screen]

Press the FAX setting key and display the FAX

setting menu.

[FAX setting menu screen]

Press the special setting key and display the

password input screen.

Input the password [9] [2] [7] [2], then press the

[OK] key.

[FAX setting menu screen]

Press the nonvolatile parameters key.

[Nonvolatile parameter setting screen]

Press the function parameters setting key.

Turn address 0E0138: bit 0 (Auto On/Off function

for FAX KRDS) OFF.

Refer to FK-101 Service Handbook for more detail.

[9] A Point to Notice for Operation

Be sure to turn ON the main power of the copier if themodem power is turned OFF and ON with the main powerOFF.Reason: To initialize the modem.(When the KRDS circuit is powered, it automaticallyinitialized the modem following the modem power ON andOFF operations.When the main power of the copier is OFF, however, theKRDS circuit is not powered and does not initialize themodem after the modem power ON and OFF operations.Some types of modem cannot start communication withKRDS unless they are initialized by the KRDS.)

3

3

3

KRDS

6-18

[10] ASCII Code Table

ASCII is 1 byte code specified by ANSI.

It enables indication of control code, alphabet and number.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

SH

SX

EX

ET

EQ

AK

BL

BS

HT

LF

HM

CL

CR

S0

S1

DE

D1

D2

D3

D4

NK

SN

EB

CN

EM

SB

EC

→

←

↑

↓

0000 0000

0000 0001

0000 0010

0000 0011

0000 0100

0000 0101

0000 0110

0000 0111

0000 1000

0000 1001

0000 1010

0000 1011

0000 1100

0000 1101

0000 1110

0000 1111

0001 0000

0001 0001

0001 0010

0001 0011

0001 0100

0001 0101

0001 0110

0001 0111

0001 1000

0001 1001

0001 1010

0001 1011

0001 1100

0001 1101

0001 1110

0001 1111

hexa-decimal

character binary hexa-decimal



character binary

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

!

"

#

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

0010 0000

0010 0001

0010 0010

0010 0011

0010 0100

0010 0101

0010 0110

0010 0111

0010 1000

0010 1001

0010 1010

0010 1011

0010 1100

0010 1101

0010 1110

0010 1111

0011 0000

0011 0001

0011 0010

0011 0011

0011 0100

0011 0101

0011 0110

0011 0111

0011 1000

0011 1001

0011 1010

0011 1011

0011 1100

0011 1101

0011 1110

0011 1111

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

O

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

¥

]

^

_

0100 0000

0100 0001

0100 0010

0100 0011

0100 0100

0100 0101

0100 0110

0100 0111

0100 1000

0100 1001

0100 1010

0100 1011

0100 1100

0100 1101

0100 1110

0100 1111

0101 0000

0101 0001

0101 0010

0101 0011

0101 0100

0101 0101

0101 0110

0101 0111

0101 1000

0101 1001

0101 1010

0101 1011

0101 1100

0101 1101

0101 1110

0101 1111

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

‘

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

}

~

0110 0000

0110 0001

0110 0010

0110 0011

0110 0100

0110 0101

0110 0110

0110 0111

0110 1000

0110 1001

0110 1010

0110 1011

0110 1100

0110 1101

0110 1110

0110 1111

0111 0000

0111 0001

0111 0010

0111 0011

0111 0100

0111 0101

0111 0110

0111 0111

0111 1000

0111 1001

0111 1010

0111 1011

0111 1100

0111 1101

0111 1110

0111 1111

3

KRDS

6-19

[11] Error Code Table

K00_00K00_01

K00_02

K00_03K00_04K00_05K00_06K00_07K00_08

K00_09K00_10

K00_11

K00_12K00_13K01_00

K01_01K01_02K01_03

K02_00

K02_01

Connection NG. (NO CONNECT from modem, Time out.)No response from other party.(No detection of start text from host after establishing connection.)Because copying is taking place, it is impossible to write to thenon-volatile memory and the line is cut.Password does not match.Serial number does not match.Syntactical error. (When undefined commands or parameters come.)Write-in indication on an item for which write-in is impossible.Unread item error.Signal reception time-out after detection other party response.(After communications of start text have ended.)Serial number registration completed.Communications error due to generation of carrier OFF.(NO CARRIER detected from the modem.)Dial tone is not detected within 5 seconds after setting of x2 and x4 commands.Busy signal detected.No tone detected for 5 seconds after input of @ command.DTR went to OFF or in OFF state.

Cannot open RS-232C.Cannot close RS-232C.Response time-out from RS-232C task.

AT command error.

Initializing NG (MODEM).Example: Modem initializing command no good.

Redial, repeat reception standby.Redial, repeat reception standby.

Temporarily stop copying.

Check password.Check serial number.Redial.Re-operation on host side.Re-operation on host side.Redial.

Check serial number.Redial.

Check connection of telephone line.Redial.Redial.Check modem power source.Check RS-232C cable connection.Turn power on copier OFF and ON.Turn power on copier OFF and ON.Check modem power source.Check RS-232C cable connection.Turn power on copier OFF and ON.Possibility of modem malfunction or software bug.Check modem power source.Check RS-232C cable connection.

Error code CountermeasureContents

3

3

3

3

3

3

KRDS

6-20

B blBblank

SERVICE

7

Main Precautions for Maintenance

1. Points to be confirmed before maintenanceBefore starting maintenance, ask a userand collect information about troubles oc-curred on the machine before the mainte-nance and the conditions of the machine tograsp key points for the maintenance.

2. Copy sampleBe sure to make copy samples at the startand the end of maintenance for checkingimages.

3. Drum1) Never expose the drum to the sunlight.

Be also careful not to expose a drum toindoor light as far as possible.When a drum unit or a drum is out of themachine, never fail to cover it with adrum cover.

2) When replacing a drum or a cleaningblade, refer to item of mounting/dis-mounting of a cleaning blade for doing areplacement work.

4. After replacing a drum, be sure to reset adrum counter before image adjustment. Af-ter replacing developer, L detection adjust-ment must be conducted also.

5. When maintenance is completed, be sureto reset the PM counter. Incidentally, a de-velopment counter is reset automatically inthe course of L detection adjustment.

6. When replacing a toner bottle, wait until thetoner supply LED on the operation panelflashes before the replacement.

Caution: Turn the main switch off andpull out the power plug with-out fail before the work ofmaintenance.

SERVICE

7-1

4 S

ER

VIC

E

SERVICE SCHEDULE[1] Service Schedule

1. 7020/7025/7030/7035/7022/7130/7135

Maintenance

(Every 100,000 copies or prints)

Periodic check (I)


Periodic check (II)


Periodic check (III)


Periodic check (IV)


Maintenance


Periodic check

(Every 1,000,000 copies or prints)

Maintenance


Periodic check


Maintenance


Periodic check


Maintenance


Periodic check


11 times

5 times

3 times

2 times

1 time

11 times

1 time

11 times

5 times

11 times

2 times

11 times

1 time

Main body

DF-314

DB-409*/410

(LCT)

DB-209*/210

(2 Tray)

FS-107

Guarantee period (5 years or 1,200,000 copies) ×10,000 copiesService item (cycles)

10 20 30 40 50 60 90 100 11070 80

* DB-209/DB-409 do not yet support 7035/7022/7130/7135.

4

4

SERVICE

7-2

[2] Maintenance Items

1. Main body (Every 100,000 copies or prints)

(1) Image check

(2) Exterior check

(1) Removal of fixing unit

(1) Original glass

(2) Original glass/1 (slit glass)

(3) Optics mirror/1 (lamp unit

mirror)

(4) Optics mirror/2 (V-mirror)

(1) Double feed prevention

roller (upper)

(2) Feed roller

(3) Double feed prevention roller (lower)

(4) Paper dust removing brush

(1) By-pass reverse roller

(2) By-pass pickup roller

(3) By-pass conveyance roller

(1) Fixing claw

(2) Fixing sensor

(3) Fixing thermostat

(4) Fixing heat roller

26NA5303* (Other than 7035/7135)

26TA5303* (7035)

26YF5303* (7135)

(5) Fixing press roller

26NA5304* (Other than 7035/7135)

26TA5304* (7035/7135)

(6) Fixing web (Note 1)

26NA5343*(7020/25/30/35)

(7) Heat insulating sleeve/A

26NA5372*(8) Heat insulating sleeve/B

26NA5373*(9) Fixing cleaning roller (Note 1)

26NA5383*(7020/25/30/35)

(10) Install of fixing unit

1 Preparations

Drum cleaner/cleaning pad







Blower brush/cleaning pad







7020/25/30/35

2 Fixing unit

3 Reading

section

4 Paper feed

unit

1

1

1

2

1

1

5 Bypass feed

unit

6 Fixing unit

ClassificationNo.Material used Tools used, etc.

Service itemImplementation classificationNumber

of partsreplaced Cleaning Check Lubri-

cationReplace-ment Supply

Note 1: For the 7022/7130/7135, these parts shall be replaced at the time of 200,000 copy counting.It is recommended that you replace the entire cleaner assembly (26NA-540*) as a unit instead of replacingindividual parts.

SERVICE

7-3

4 S

ER

VIC

E

(1) Suction filter/A

40LA-318* (7135)

(2) Filter cover assembly (Note 2)

40LA-314* (7135)

(3) Internal cooling fan

(FM4) Suction filter

(1) Toner bottle

(2) Check of W.U.T measurement

(3) Check of image adjustment

(4) Check of copy samples

(5) Fixing counter reset (Note 3)

(7020/25/30/35)

(6) Reset of PM counter

(7) Check of leakage breaker

(8) Peripheral and exterior of

the machine

7

8

Main body

Final check


Blower brush

No.Cleaning Check Replace-

ment SupplyClassificationMaterial used Tools used, etc.


of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

Note 2: For the 7022/7130/7135, these parts shall be replaced at the time of 600,000 copy counting.Note 3: For the 7022/7130/7135, the counter is reset at 200,000 copies.

Remarks: and in the maintenance category denote the following.Maintenance items with marking are compulsory. And, as for those with , maintenance personnel is to

decide whether or not replacement is necessary be checking the actual durable count.

SERVICE

7-4

2. DF-314 (Every 100,000 copies or prints)

(1) Registration sensor

(2) Read sensor

(3) Size detection sensors

(at two locations)

(4) Feeding roller

(5) Duble feed prevention roller

(6) Read roller

(7) Paper dust removing brush

1 Inside the

machine

Blower brush

Blower brush

Blower brush



Water/cleaning pad

Caution: Do not use alcohol.

Blower brush




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

3. DB (DB-209/210/409/410) (Every 100,000 copies or prints)

(1) Double feed prevention

roller (upper)

(2) Feed roller

(3) Duble feed prevention roller (lower)

1 Paper feed

section







of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

4. FS-107 (Every 100,000 copies or prints)

(1) Conveyance drive roller/A

(2) Papaer exit drive roller

1 Conveyance

section






of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

SERVICE

7-5

4 S

ER

VIC

E

[3] Periodic Check Items (Main Body)

1. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies or prints)

(1) Drum

(2) Cleaning blade assembly

26NA-209* (7020/25/30)

26TA-209* (Other than 7020/25/35)

(3) Drum counter reset

(1) Charging wire

(2) Charging control plate

(1) Corona wire

(1) Developer

(include the developing unit installing)

(2) L-detection adjustment

(1) Ozone filter

26NA1017* (7020/25/30)

20WA1017* (7022/7130)

26TA1017* (7035/7135)

(2) Suction filter/A

26TA3111*(Other than 7020/25/35/7135)

(1) Separation claw

26NA5427*(2) Fixing roller holder/Upper

26NA5371*(3) Fixing roller holder/Lower

26NA5359*(4) Fixing Web (Note 1)

26NA5343* (7022/7130/7135)

(5) Fixing cleaning roller (Note 1)

26NA5383* (7022/7130/7135)

(1) Fixing counter reset

(7022/7130/7135)

(2) Check of image adjustment

1 Drum unit Setting powder

Cotton swab

Cleaning pad

Cotton swab

(Transfer/separation)

7022/7130/7135

7022/7130/7135

2 Charging

corona unit

3 Transfer/separation

corona unit

1

1

1

1

1

6

2

2

1

1

4 Developing

section

5

6

7

Main body

Fixing unit

Final check




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

Note 1: It is recommended that you replace the entire cleaner assembly (26NA-540*) as a unit instead of replacingindividual parts.

SERVICE

7-6

2. Periodic check (II) (Every 300,000 copies or prints)

(1) By pass reverse roller

40AA-406*(2) By pass pickup roller

26NA-428*(3) By pass conveyance roller

40AA-425*

1 Bypass feed 1

1

1



Actual durable count :

100,000


100,000


100,000


of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

3. Periodic check (III) (Every 400,000 copies or prints)

(1) Feed rubber

26NA4009*(2) Double feed prevention

rubber/Upper


rubber/Lower 26NA4012*(1) Transfer/separation corona

unit 26NA-260*(1) Fixing sensor

26NA8801*(2) Fuse mounting plate

assembly 26NA-535*(3) Fixing heater /1

26N*8302* (Other than 7135)

(4) Fixing heater /2

26N*8303* (Other than 7135)

1 Main body

paper feed

unit

3 Fixing unit

2 Transfer/separation

corona unit

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation


200,000


200,000


200,000

4. Periodic check (IV) (Every 600,000 copies or prints)

(1) Developing unit

(Unit without developer)

26NA-300* (7020/25/30)

26TA-300* (Other than 7020/25/30)

(2) Drum unit (Unit without drum)

26NA-990* (7020/25/30)

26WA-990* (Other than 7020/25/30)

(3) Filter cover assembly

26TA-314* (7022/7130/7035)

1 Developing

unit

Drum unit

Main unit

2

3

1

1

1




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

SERVICE

7-7

4 S

ER

VIC

E

[4] Periodic Check Items (Options)

1. RADF (DF-314) (Every 1,000,000 copies or prints)

(1) Paper feed roller/A

13GL4011*(2) Double feed prevention roller/A

assembly 13GL-405*

1 Paper feed

section

1

1




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation


250,000


250,000

• Above replacement standard estimating DF usage ratio is 25%.

2. DB (DB-409/410) (Every 200,000 copies or prints)

(1) Feed rubber


rubber/Upper 26NA4011*(3) Double feed prevention

rubber/Lower 26NA4012*

1 Paper feed

section

1

1

1




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

3. DB (DB-209/210) (Every 400,000 copies or prints)

(1) Feed rubber


rubber/Upper 26NA4011*(3) Double feed prevention

rubber/Lower 26NA4012*

1 Paper feed

section

2

2

2




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation


200,000


200,000


200,000

4. FNS (FS-107) (Every 600,000 copies or prints)

(1) Exit roller/A

13GQ4519*1 Paper exit

section

1




of partsreplaced

Lubri-cation

SERVICE

7-8

[5] List of Actual Durable Counters for Replacement Parts

Drum

Cleaning blade assembly

Drum unit


Developer

Developing unit

Ozone filter

Suction filter/A (7035 only)

Filter cover assembly (7035 only)

(Tray1) Feed rubber

(Tray1) Double feed prevention rubber/Upper

(Tray1) Double feed prevention rubber/Lower

(Tray2) Feed rubber

(Tray2) Double feed prevention rubber/Upper

(Tray2) Double feed prevention rubber/Lower

(Tray3 or LCT) DB feed rubber

(Tray3 or LCT) DB double feed prevention rubber/Upper

(Tray3 or LCT) DB double feed prevention rubber/Lower

(Tray4) DB feed rubber

(Tray4) DB double feed prevention rubber/Upper

(Tray4) DB double feed prevention rubber/Lower

By-pass reverse roller

By-pass pick up roller

By-pass conveyance roller

Fixing heat roller

Fixing pressure roller

Fixing web

Heat insulating sleeve/A



(Cleaner assembly) Note 3

Fixing claw

Fixing roller holder/Upper

Fixing roller holder/Lower

Fixing sensor

Fuse mounting plate assembly

Fixing heater/1

Fixing heater/2

Paper feed roller/A

Double feed prevention roller/A assembly

Paper exit roller/A

Ñ

26NA-209*26NA-990*26NA-260*

Ñ

26NA-300*26NA1017*

Ñ

Ñ

26NA4009*26NA4011*26NA4012*26NA4009*26NA4011*26NA4012*26NA4009*26NA4011*26NA4012*26NA4009*26NA4011*26NA4012*40AA-406*26NA-428*40AA-425*26NA5303*26NA5304*26NA5343*26NA5372*26NA5373*26NA5383*(26NA-540*)

26AA5427*26NA5371*26NA5359*26NA8801*26NA-535*26**8302*26**8303*13GL4011*13GL-405*13GQ4519*

Ñ

26TA-209*26WA-990*

←

Ñ

26TA-300*26TA1017*26TA3111*26TA-314*

←←←←←←←←←←←←←←←

26TA5303*26TA5304*

←←←←

(26TA-540*)

←←←←←←←←←←

Ñ

←←←

Ñ

← 26WA1017*

←←←←←←←←←←←←←←←←←

26NA5303*26NA5304*

←←←←

(26NA-540*)

←←←←←←←←←←

200,000

200,000

600,000

400,000

200,000

600,000

200,000

200,000 Note4

600,000 Note4

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

200,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000

100,000 Note2

100,000

100,000

100,000 Note2

100,000 Note2

200,000

200,000

200,000

400,000

400,000

400,000

400,000

250,000

250,000

600,000

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

DC(including changing corona unit)


Developing unit

Main body

Main body paper feed unit

DB (Tray3 or LCT) paper feed unit

DB (Tray4) paper feed unit

By-pass feed unit

Fixing unit

DF-314

FS-107

Unit7020/25/30

Otherthan

7020/25/30

Parts nameParts No. Actual

durable count7020/25/30 7035

Ñ

←←←

Ñ

←26TA1017*40LA-318*40LA-314*

←←←←←←←←←←←←←←←

26YF5303*26TA5304*

←←←←

(26TA-540*)

←←←←←

26N*8302*26N*8303*

←←←

7135Other than7020/25/30/35/7135

Note 1: * Parts varies depending on the spec. (destination), and the 9th digit will be changed in accordance with thedesign chang of the parts.

Note 2: Becomes 200,000 for machines other than 7020/25/30/35/7135.Note 3: It is recommended that you replace the "cleaner assembly" instead of the "fixing web" and the "fixing cleaning roller".Note 4: Becomes 100,000 for 7135.

SERVICE

7-9

4 S

ER

VIC

E

[6] Important Maintenance Parts

• The important parts specified by Konica in orderto maintain safety of the products are referred toas “important maintenance parts”.

The important maintenance parts for this machineare as described below:

No.Unit

Parts name Parts No Qtyclassification

1 Fixing unit Fuse mounting SP00-0110 1plate assembly

• “SP” is indicated in front of the parts number of theimportant maintenance part. Exercise care wheninstalling the parts according to precautions in “3.DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY”.

SERVICE

7-10

COPY MATERIALS

[1] PM Parts Kit

1. 7020/25/30/35 (100,000 copies/kit)

1

Name

Fixing heat roller

1Fixing pressure roller

1Fixing web

2Heat insulating sleeve/A

1Heat insulating sleeve/B

Quantity

1

Name


Quantity

SERVICE

7-11

4 S

ER

VIC

E

2. 7022/7130/7135 (100,000 copies/kit)

1

Name

Fixing heat roller

1Fixing pressure roller

2Heat insulating sleeve/A

1

1

1


Suction filter /A (7135 only)

Filter cover assembly (7135 only)

Quantity

(Note)

Note: Check the installing directions referring to"Assembly/Disassembly - External Section".

[2] Consumables (Single Unit Supply)

1. 7020/25/30/35

Toner bottle

Developer

Drum

26,000

200,000

200,000

Name Durability/copies

2. 7022/7130/7135

Toner bottle

Developer

Drum

29,391

200,000

200,000

Name Durability/copies

SERVICE

7-12

SERVICE MATERIALS LIST

[1] Maintenance Kit Composition

000V-19-0

00GR00210

Setting powder

Solvest 240

Material No. Description

25 g

Shape Remark

SERVICE

7-13

4 S

ER

VIC

E

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

26NA21340

26NAJG011

00VD-5000

120A97110

120A97120

00VC-2-00

00VD-1000

00VE-1004

Drum rotation material

New pyramid chart

ADJ chart

White chart

Drum cover

Blower brush

Tester

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

Tool No. Description Shape Quantity Remark

Mirror positioning jig

Mounted on the drumunit.

SERVICE

7-14

Blank

DIAGRAMS

8

8-1

DIAGRAMS

MAIN BODY ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING[1] Switches and sensors

PS9 Tray detect PS (upper)

TLD Toner level detector

PS13 Bypass no paper detect PS VR1 Bypass tray paper size VR

PS20 Bypass tray paper size detect PS

TDS Toner density sensor

PS12 Tray detect PS (lower)

1

1

8-2

DIAGRAMS

PS2 Fixing exit PS

TS Thermostat

TH1 Fixing temperature sensor 1

TH2 Fixing temperature sensor 2

PS14 Optics home position PS

PS17 APS sensor 1

* Exclusivery for the 7020/25/30/35

PS18 APS sensor 2

* Exclusivery for machines other than 7020/25/30/35

PS18 APS sensor 2* Exclusivery for the 7020/25/30/35

PS15 APS timing PS

3

3

8-3

DIAGRAMS

PS7 Upper limit

detect PS (upper)

PS4 ADU PS

PS10 Upper

limit detect PS

(lower) PS1 Registration PSPS8 No paper

detect PS (upper)

PS11 No paper detect PS (lower)

PS19 Exit limit detect PS

* Installed only on old type

7020/25/30/35

PS3 Paper exit PS* Exclusivery for the

7020/25/30/35

SW1 Main power switch

HUM1 Humidity sensor

PS5 Toner bottle PS

SW3 Interlock switch

SW2 Sub power switch

PS22 Intermediate conveyance PS

(lower)

* Exclusively for the 7030/7130/7035

PS21 Intermediate conveyance

PS (upper)


33

3

3

8-4

DIAGRAMS

SD5 ADU gate SD

M1 Main motor

MC1 Registration clutch

MC2 Loop clutch

M9 Paper feed motor

SD2 1st paper feed SD (lower)

M6 ADU motor

M8 Tray motor (lower)

M7 Tray motor (upper)

FM1 DCPS cooling fan

SD1 1st paper feed SD (upper)

M3 Developing motor

SD6 Toner bottle SD


M4 Toner supply motor 1

TSL Transfer synchronisation lamp

SD3 Bypass paper feed SD

SD4 Cleaning web SD

FM3 Internal dehumidifying fan

[2] Loads

M10 Toner supply motor 2

* Exclusivery for machines

other than 7020/25/303

8-5

DIAGRAMS

M5 Polygon motor

SD7 Separation claw SD

PCL Pre-charging lamp

L2 Fixing heater lamp1

L3 Fixing heater lamp2

8-6

DIAGRAMS

L1 Exposure lamp

M2 Optical drive motor

FM2 Fixing cooling fan

PTC PTC heater

* Treated as spare parts

in the case of a

machine other than the

7020/25/30/35.

FM4 Internal cooling fan

FM5 Developing suction fan

* Exclusively for machines


3

8-7

DIAGRAMS

PFDB (UPPER)

Paper feed detection

board (upper)

PFDB (LOWER)

Paper feed detection

board (lower)

HV High voltage unit

PRMB Parameter memory board

CB Overall control board

INV1 Exposure lamp inverter

PRDB Printer drive board

DCPS DC power supply unit

CBR2 Circuit breaker 2

CBR1 Circuit breaker 1

PSWB Power SW board

PAKB Panel key board

LCD display board

INV2 display inverter

OB operation board

L1INVB Exposure lamp

power supply board

SCDB scanner drive board

ADB A/D conversion

board

[3] PCBs and Others

1

8-8

DIAGRAMS

LDB LD drive board

INDEX Index sensor board

TCSB Toner control sensor board

1

8-9

DIAGRAMS

PS303 Original exit PS

VR301 Size detect VR

PS307 Original detect PS2

PS306 Original detect PS1

PS312 Original feed PS PS311 Original registration PS

PS305 Cover open/close detect PS

PS301 No original detect PS

PS304 RADF open/close detect PS SD303 Exit SD

SD302 Rollar pressure SD

M301 Original feed motor

M302 Original conveyance motor

M303 Original reversal motor

DFCB RADF control board

DF-314 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING1

8-10

DIAGRAMS

M705 Stapler shift motor

M706 Tray up/down motor

PS708 Stapler unit HP detect PS

PS709 Alignment plate

detect PS (rear)

PS710 Alignment plate

detect PS (front)

M704 Alignment motor (front)

PS707 No paper detect PS

PS711 Tray upper limit detect PS

PS704 Tray full-stack detect PS

PS716 Tray count PS

PS703 Paper exit detect PS

PS706 Tray lower limit detect PS

MS701 Front door switchFSCB FS control board

M703 Alignment motor (rear)

FS-107 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

M706 Tray up/down motor

8-11

DIAGRAMS

PS712 Stapler HP detect PS

M701 Paper conveyance motor

M702 Paper exit motor

M709 Cooling fan motor

PS717 Conveyance cover open/close detect PS

M707 Paper pressure motor

MS702 Shutter switch

PS705 Shutter PS

PS701 Paper pressure PS

PS702 Paper entrance detect PS

PS714 Stapler ready detect PS

M708 Stapler motorPS713 No-staple PS

8-12

DIAGRAMS

PS108 No paper detect PS (lower)

PS105 Jam detect PS2

SD102 1st paper feed SD (lower)

PS103 No paper detect PS (upper)

PS102 Upper limit detect PS (upper)


PS101 Tray detect PS (upper)

PS107 Upper limit detect PS (lower)

DB-209/210 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

PTC heater

* Treated as a spare parts inthe case of new type DB

SDB1 Size detection board 1

SDB1 Size detection board 2

SD101 1st paper feed SD (upper)

M100 Paper feed motor

PS106 Tray detect PS (lower)

PFUDB PFU drive boardM101 Tray motor1

M102 Tray motor2

3

8-13

DIAGRAMS



PS103 No paper detect PSPS102 Paper level detect PS1

DB-409/410 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

PTC Heater

* Treated as a spare parts inthe case of new type DB

SDB 1 Size detection board 1

M101 Tray motor

M100 Paper feed motor

SD101 1st paper feed SDLCTDB LCT drive board

PS101 Tray detect PS

PS109 Paper level detect PS2

3

8-14

DIAGRAMS

IT-101 ELECTRICAL PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

CN972 (W:3pin)

CN973 (W:3pin)J43 (W:8pin)

J42 (BK:12pin)

CN292 (W:2pin) CN974 (W:3pin)

PS24 IT exit PS (lower)

PS23 IT exit PS (upper)

SD8 IT gate SD

PS25 IT door PS

8-15

DIAGRAMS

MAIN BODY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

J28 (B:3pin)

J23 (W:4pin)

CN903 (W:8pin)

J06 (W:3pin)

J14 (W:6pin)

J32 (W:3pin)

J03 (W:11pin)

CN930 (W:2pin)

CN921 (B:2pin)

J30 (W:3pin)

J04 (W:11pin)

CN905 (W:6pin)

J02 (W:7pin)

CN923 (W:2pin)

CN922 (W:2pin)

J31 (W:3pin)

CN9 (W:3pin)

J21 (W:3pin)

J42 (BK:12pin)

J915 (W:6pin)* Exclusively for machines


J 903 (W:6pin)

J12 (W:9pin)

CN927 (W:2pin)* Exclusively for the 7020/25/30

J05 (W:3pin)

3

3

8-16

DIAGRAMS

J50 (W:12pin)

J51 (W:5pin)

J52 (W:5pin)

CN904 (5pin)

8-17

DIAGRAMS

J16 (BK:18pin)

J17 (BK:10pin)

J13 (BK:8pin)

J13 (W:4pin)

J928 (W:2pin)

J11 (W:7pin)

1

8-18

DIAGRAMS

Overall control board

High voltage unit Printer drive board

CN29(36 pin)

CN38(4 pin)

CN37(8 pin)

CN35(5 pin)

CN36(10 pin)

CN27(8 pin)

CN21(6 pin)

CN22(5 pin)

CN23(22 pin)

CN79(6 pin) * Exclusively for the

7030/7130/7035

CN20(4 pin)

CN28(38 pin)

CN19(24 pin)

CN25(34 pin)

CN26(26 pin)

CN24(40 pin)

CN601(10 pin) * Exclusively for the machines


CN46(50pin)

CN48(20pin)

CN801(68pin)

CN431(5pin)

CN32(20pin)

CN33(24pin) CN47

(22pin)

CN803(6pin)

CN34(24pin)

CN800(68pin)

CN500(4pin)

CN37(120pin)

CN30(6pin)

CN39(25pin)

CN40(36pin)

CN432(12pin)CN45(11pin)CN44(19pin)

CN42(9pin)

CN38(100pin)

CN31(8pin)

CN71(12pin)

CN70(9pin)

CN72(3pin)

3

3

3

8-19

DIAGRAMS

CN60(10 pin)

CN66(7 pin)

CN65(8 pin)

CN62(3 pin)

CN64(15 pin)

CN61(11 pin)

CN63(4 pin)

CN68(8 pin)

*Exclusively for the

DC power supply unit A/D conversion board

Scanner drive board Operation board

CN1(5pin)

CN2(14pin)

CN3(5pin)

CN7(26pin)

CN8(4pin)CN5

(4pin)

CN6(20pin)CN10(3pin)

CN84(18pin)

CN83(4pin)

CN82(5pin)

CN86(14pin)

CN81(13pin)

CN80(12pin)

CN60(50pin)

<Other than 7035>

<7035>

CN60(10 pin)

CN66(7 pin)

CN65(8 pin)

CN62(3 pin)

CN64(7 pin)

CN67(6 pin)

CN61(11 pin)

CN63(4 pin)

3

CN87(2pin)

<Other than 7020/25/30/35>

<7020/25/30/35>

CN84(18pin)

CN83(4pin)

CN82(5pin)

CN86(14pin)

CN81(13pin)

CN80(12pin)

3

8-20

DIAGRAMS

LD drive board Index senser board

Toner control sensor board Power SW board

Paper feed detection board (upper, lower) Parameter memory board

CN50(12pin)

CN51(5pin)

CN1(3pin)

CN1(7pin)

CN1(5pin)

CN2(24pin)

CN1(20pin)

8-21

DIAGRAMS

Exposure lamp power supply board

Display inverter

Exposure lamp inverter

CN97 (2pin) CN96 (2pin)

CN77(4pin)

CN71(3pin)

CN931(4pin)

CN930(3pin)

8-22

DIAGRAMS

CN130 (W:6pin)

CN132 (W:6pin)

CN131 (W:6pin)

CN5 (8pin)CN1 (18pin)

CN2 (22pin)

CN3 (7pin)

CN200 (GY:18pin)

CN123 (W:3pin)

CN113 (W:3pin)

CN117 (W:3pin)

CN116 (W:3pin)

CN121 (W:3pin)CN122 (W:3pin)

CN136 (BK:2pin)CN115 (W:3pin)

CN111 (W:3pin)

CN105 (W:3pin)

CN137 (W:2pin)CN114 (W:3pin)

DFCB

CN6 (15pin)

CN4 (9pin)

CN7 (30pin)

DF-314 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING1

8-23

DIAGRAMS

CN736 (B:3pin)

CN735 (W:3pin)

CN734 (W:3pin)

CN744 (W:3pin)

CN737 (B:3pin)

CN756 (W:15pin)


CN738 (W:3pin)

CN741 (W:3pin)

CN740 (B:3pin)

CN723 (B:6pin)CN756 (W:15pin)

CN739 (W:3pin)

CN726 (BK:2pin)

CN724 (W:6pin)

CN751 (W:1pin)

FS-107 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

8-24

DIAGRAMS


CN300 (BK:24pin)CN708 (8pin)

CN705 (W:6pin)

CN703 (12pin)

CN709 (12pin)CN706 (2pin)

CN707 (30pin)

CN710 (2pin)

CN713 (3pin)

CN702 (11pin)

CN704 (12pin)

CN711 (2pin)

CN712 (2pin)

CN701 (10pin)

CN732 (W:3pin)

CN733 (W:3pin)

CN734 (W:3pin)

CN730 (BK:2pin)

CN745 (W:3pin)

CN721 (W:6pin)

CN722 (W:6pin)

CN731 (W:3pin)

CN714 (15pin)

CN715 (30pin)

FS CB

8-25

DIAGRAMS

PFU drive board

J69 (W:6pin)J70 (W:6pin)

J66 (W:3pin)

J68 (W:7pin)

CN113 (W:12pin)

J64 (W:8pin)

J67 (W:3pin)

J63 (W:6pin)

J65 (W:11pin)

DB-209/210 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

Size detection board 2Size detection board 1

CN100(6pin)

CN101(26pin)

CN103(24pin)

CN104(19pin)

CN102(DB-209:6pin)(DB-210:11pin)

CN1(5pin)

CN1(5pin)

2

2

8-26

DIAGRAMS

LCT drive board

J68 (W:3pin)

J69 (W:6pin)

CN113 (W:2pin)

J64 (W:8pin)

J66 (W:3pin)

J63 (W:6pin)

DB-409/410 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

Size detection board 1

CN1(5pin)

CN100(6pin)

CN101(26pin)

CN103(24pin)

CN105(DB-409:3pin)

CN102(DB-409:6pin)(DB-410:11pin)

2

CN105(DB-410:3pin)

2

LIST OF JAM CODES

8-27

LIST OF JAM CODES

During operation

Classification

By-pass

Upper tray

Lower tray

DB tray

Conveyance

Fixing/exit

ADU conveyance

FS-107

J10

J11

J12

J13

J14

J16

J30

J31

J32

J32-2

J33

J92

J97-1

J97-2

J72-16

J72-17

J72-19

Code CausesResulting operation Correction

PS1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of by-pass feed (after SD3 (by-pass) ON).PS1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of upper-tray feed (after SD1 (first paper-feed (upper)) ON).PS1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of upper-tray feed (after SD2 (first paper-feed (lower)) ON).PS104 (jam detect 1) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of feed from DB upper tray (after SD101 (first paper-feed (upper)) ON).PS104 (jam detect 1) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of feed from DB lower tray.PS1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after paper passed PS104 (jam detect 1).• DB upper tray feed• DB lower tray feed

PS1 (registration) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after MC1 (registration) ON.PS2 (fixing exit) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after MC1 (registration) ON.PS3 (paper exit) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (fixing exit) ON. (At the single side copy mode)PS2 (fixing exit) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON.PS3 (paper exit) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON.PS1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of ADU reversal.PS4 (ADU) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS2 (fixing exit) ON. PS4 (ADU) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON. PS702 (paper entrance detect) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS3 (paper exit) ON. PS702 (paper entrance detect) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after PS707 (no paper detect) ON. (Straight, sort/group mode for other than small size)PS702 (paper entrance detect) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON. (Staple, sort/group, and small size straight modes)

If copying is in progress at time of jam, the copier completes ejection and then stops.

The main body stops immediately.

The FS-107 and main body stop immediately.

Take out the paper from the bypass tray, and remove any jammed paper.Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper, and close the door.Pull out the tray, and remove any jammed paper.

Open the DB conveyance door, remove any jammed paper, and close the door.Pull out the tray, and remove any jammed paper.

Open the ADU door and/or DB conveyance door, remove any jammed paper, and close the door.

Open the ADU door, remove any jammed paper, and close the door.

Open the finisher front door, and conveyance cover remove any jammed paper, and close the door.

7020/25/30/35 only

7020/25/30/35 only

3

3

LIST OF JAM CODES

8-28

J72-21

J72-23

J72-81

J75-10

J75-11

J75-12

J75-13

J61-0

J61-1J62-0J62-2

J62-3

J62-4

J62-5

J63-0

J63-2

J63-4

J63-5

FS-107

IT-101

DF-314

PS707 (No paper detect) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after M702 (Paper exit) turning ON. (Staple, sort/group, and small size straight modes)PS707 (No paper detect) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON. (Straight, sort/group mode for other than small size)Staple jam: M708 (stapler) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after turning ON. (Forward operation not completed.) (Staple mode)PS23 (IT paper exit (upper)) does not go ON within a predetermined time after PS3 (paper exit) (in the case of a machine other than 7020/25/30/35, PS2 (fixing exit)) goes ON.PS24 (IT exit (lower)) is not turned ON within a predetermined time after PS3 (paper exit) (in the case of the 7020/25/30/35, PS2 (fixing exit)) is turned ON.PS3 (paper exit) (in the case of machines other than the 7020/25/30/35, PS2 (fixing exit)) does not go OFF within a predetermined time after PS23 (IT paper exit (upper)) or PS24 (IT paper exit (lower)) goes ON.The IT door of the IT-101 opened while the main body was operating.PS305 (cover open/close detect) turned ON. (The paper feed cover is opened.)PS304 (RADF open/close detect) turned ON.Original did not feed.PS312 (original feed) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of refeed for single sided original.PS312 (original feed) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of reverse exit for double sided original.

PS312 (original feed) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during paper exit.PS312 (original feed) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during reversal.PS303 (original exit) did not go ON during paper exit.PS303 (original exit) did not go OFF within the specified period after it went ON, during paper exit.PS311 (original registration) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after start of refeed of single sided original.PS311 (original registration) failed to turn OFF within a predetermined time after start of reverse feed.

The FS-107 and main body stop immediately.

The main bodystops immediately.

The DF-314 stops immediately.

Open the finisher front door, and conveyance cover remove any jammed paper, and close the door.

Remove the jammed staple.

Open the IT door, and remove the jammed paper, then close the door.

Open the RADF, remove any jammed paper, and then close.Remove any jammed paper from the main body's conveyance section.

Classification Code CausesResulting operation Correction

3

LIST OF JAM CODES

8-29

Others J20-2

J20-3

J20-4J20-5

J20-6

J50-1

J50-2

J50-3

ADU door open jamSW3 (Interlock switch) went OFF during printing.FNS front door open jamMS701 (front door) went OFF during printing.System emergency stop jamFNS conveyance door open jamPS717 (conveyance cover open/close detect) went OFF during printing.FNS shutter switch operation jamMS702 (shutter) went ON during printing.Failed to receive print request from system within a predetermined time after PS1 (registration) ON.“Valid” signal failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of printing.MC1 (registration) failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after start of printing.

Printer section stops immediately.

Machine stops immediately.

Remove jammed paper according to message.

Opne the ADU door, remove any jammed paper, and close the door.

Classification Code CausesResulting operation Correction

3

LIST OF JAM CODES

8-30

When idling

Paper feed

Exit

ADU

FS-107

DF-314

IT-101

J81

J82

J90J91

J100

J72-1

J72-2

J65-1

J65-2J65-3

J65-8J65-9

J65-10

J65-11

J75-10

PS1 (registration) ON during idling state.

PS105 (Jam detect 2) ON during idling state.

PS2 (fixing exit) ON during idling state.PS3 (paper exit) ON during idling state. (7020/25/30/35 only)PS4 (ADU) ON during idling state.

PS702 (paper entrance detect) ON during idling state.PS707 (no paper detect) ON during idling state.PS311 (original registration) ON during idling state.PS312 (original feed) ON during idling state.PS311 (original registration), PS312 (original feed) ON during idling state.PS303 (original exit) ON during idling state.PS311 (original registration), PS303 (original exit) ON during idling state.PS312 (original feed), PS303 (original exit) ON during idling state.PS311 (original registration), PS312 (original feed), PS303 (original exit) ON during idling state.PS23 (IT exit (upper)) or PS24 (IT exit (lower)) went ON during idling.

Open the ADU door, remove jammed paper, and close the door.Open the DB feed door, remove jammed paper, and close the door.If paper is jammed in the main body: open the ADU door, remove the jammed paper, and close the door.Open the ADU door, remove jammed paper, and close the door.

Open the ADU door, remove jammed paper, and close the door.Open the finisher door, remove jammed paper, and close the door.

Open the RADF, remove jammed paper, and then close.

Open the IT door, remove jammed paper, then close the door.

Classification Code Causes Correction

3

LIST OF WARNING (ERROR) CODES

8-31


Classification

Communication abnormalities

Feed-tray and drum-area abnormalities

F10-1

F10-2

F10-9

F18-1

F18-2

F18-3

F18-4

F22-1

F23-1

Warningcode

CausesResultingoperation Correction Estimated abnormal parts

Failure in serial communication between the PRDB (printer drive board) and CB (overall control board).Two consecutive failures to respond to PRDB (printer drive board) A/D conversion request.Communication error at PRDB (printer drive board) SRGA (serial gate array) error. (Error in protocol for receive control signals SREC, SACK.)Error in main body upper trayPS7 (tray upper limit detect (upper)) failed to turn ON within 26 seconds after M7 (tray (upper)) ON.Error in main body lower trayPS10 (tray upper limit detect (lower)) failed to turn ON within 26 seconds after M8 (tray (lower)) ON.Error in DB upper trayPS102 (upper limit detect (upper)) failed to turn ON within 26 seconds after M101 (tray 1) ON.Error in DB lower trayPS107 (upper limit detect (lower)) failed to turn ON within 26 seconds after M102 (tray 2) ON.Internal overheatingThe temperature at the outside of the drum reached or exceeded 47˚C. PCL connector detachedWith 24V ON and PCL OFF, the PCL EM signal (pcl_em) was detected as "H" (software logic).

If copying is in progress, the main body stops immediately, and the main relay and 24V power turn OFF.

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON.

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF, connect the PCL connector, and then set SW2 ON.

PRDB (printer drive board) CB (overall control board)

PRDB (printer drive board)

PRDB (printer drive board) CB (overall control board)

PRDB (printer drive board) M7 (tray (upper))PS7 (tray upper limit detect (upper))

PRDB (printer drive board), M8 (tray (lower)) PS10 (tray upper limit detect (lower))

PFU DB (PFU drive board) or LCT DB (LCT drive board) M101 (tray 1)PS102 (upper limit detect (upper))PFU DB (PFU drive board) M102 (tray 2)PS107 (upper limit detect (lower))

TCSB (toner-control sensor board)FM4 (internal cooling)

PCL connectorPRDB (printer drive board)

1


8-32

4High voltage unit abnormalities

Fixing high temperature abnormalities

F26-1

F26-2

F26-3

F28-1

F28-2

F28-3

F34-1

F34-2

L detection output errorL detection exceeds 3.0V.Toner density abnormalityIf L detection power exceeds 26V prior to toner out detection by the TLD (toner level detect), the automatic toner supply feature should restore the toner density. This error occurs if this feature fails to restore the density.Abnormal output from TDS (toner density sensor)Maximum TDS output voltage failed to exceed 1.0V.Abnormal output from TDS (toner density sensor)TDS output ripple voltage failed to reach 0.5V

Charging errorEM detect signal (charge_em1) was read 3 times at 100msec intervals.Abnormal transfer spark (trans_em) detected 3 times at 20msec intervals, 5 times in succession for the same job.Abnormal separation spark (separate_em) detected 5 times at 20msec intervals, 5 times in succession for the same job.

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) detected abnormally high temperature.Temperature detected by TH1 remained at or above 231˚C for 0.4 seconds.

TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) detected abnormally high temperature.Temperature detected by TH2remained at or above 231˚C for 0.4 seconds.


Main relay and 24 V power supply go OFF at the end of the job.If copying is in progress, the main body stops immediately, and the main relay and 24V power turn OFF.

Main relay turns OFF and acceptance of all keys is disabled.

Set SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON.

Set SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON after set to "0" the bit 1 in DIP SW3 in 25 mode. (If you switch power back on without releasing the latch, the error will recur.)

TDS (tonner density sensor)PRDB (printer drive board)Toner bottle (reinstall)TDS (toner density sensor) TLD (toner level detect sensor)PRDB (printer drive board)Toner supply unit

TDS (toner density sensor) PRDB (printer drive board)Developer

TDS (toner density sensor) PRDB (printer drive board)M1 (main)Developer agitating screwDeveloping unit connectorCharging corona unit HV (high voltage unit) PRDB (printer drive board)

Transfer corona unit HV (high voltage unit) PRDB (printer drive board)

Separation corona unit HV (high voltage unit) PRDB (printer drive board)

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) L2 (fixing heater lamp 1) L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) PRDB (printer drive board) DCPS (DC power supply)

Classification Warningcode

Causes Correction Estimated abnormal partsResultingoperation


8-33

1

Fixing low temperature abnormalities

F35-1

F35-2

F35-3

F35-4

F35-5

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) detected abnormally low temperature.Occurs if main motor remains energized for longer than 10 seconds during idling state.TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) detected abnormally low temperature.During idling or copying, TH1 detected that temperature remained at or below 165˚C for 10 seconds.TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) detected abnormally low temperature (during warmup)If TH1 detects that temperature is below 170˚C at the time that L2 (fixing heater lamp 1) is started, it records the temperature reading and compares this with the temperature reading obtained 10 seconds later. This error occurs if the difference between these temperature readings is less than a predetermined level. If TH1 detects that temperature is at or above 170˚C at the time that L2 starts, this error occurs if TH1 fails to detect warm-up completion temperature within 10 seconds thereafter.TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) detected abnormally low temperature.Occurs if L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) remains energized for longer than 10 seconds during idling state.TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) detected abnormally low temperature.During idling or copying, TH2 detected that temperature remained at or below 165˚C for 10 seconds.


Set SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON, after set to "0" the bit 1 in DIP SW3 in 25 mode. (If you switch power back on without releasing the latch, the error will recur.)

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1)TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) L2 (fixing heater lamp 1) L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) PRDB (printer drive board) DCPS (DC power supply)


Causes Correction Estimated abnormal partsResultingoperation


8-34


F35-6

F35-7

F35-8

TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) detected abnormally low temperature.At warm-up, if TH2 detects that temperature is less than 170˚C at the time when L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) is first energized, it stores the temperature reading, then compares it with the temperature reading obtained 10 seconds later. This error occurs if the difference between the two reads is less than a predetermined value. If TH2 detects that temperature is 170˚C or higher at the time when power is first supplied to L3, this error occurs if the TH2 fails to detect warm-up completion temperature within 10 seconds.Fixing heat roller wrapping jam failureThis error occurs during print state if the temperature detected by TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) is more than 10 data readings above the temperature data reading obtained 1 second earlier (i.e., temperature is low), and this condition continues for 0.2 seconds.Fixing heat roller wrapping jam failureThis error occurs during print state if the temperature detected by TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) is more than 10 data readings above the temperature data reading obtained 1 second earlier (i.e., temperature is low), and this condition continues for 0.2 seconds.


Set SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON. Set to "0" the bit 1 in DIP SW3 in 25 mode. (If you switch power back on without releasing the latch, the error will recur.)

TH1 (fixing temp detector 1) TH2 (fixing temp detector 2) L2 (fixing heater lamp 1) L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) PRDB (printer drive board) DCPS (DC power supply)


Correction Estimated abnormal partsCausesResultingoperation


8-35

1

1

1

1

1


Broken fixing sensor (open circuit)

F35-9

F35-10

F36-1

F36-2

F36-3

F36-4

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) bad contactThis error occurs during warm-up if TH1 fails to make its first detection of "Ready" temperature within 11 seconds after TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) first makes this detection.

TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) bad contactThis error occurs during warm-up if TH2 fails to make its first detection of "Ready" temperature within 11 seconds after TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) first makes this detection.

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) high temperature errorThis error occurs if TH1 high temperature error signal is detected continuously for at least 1 second.TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) open errorOccurs if TH1 open signal is detected.TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 1) high temperature errorThis error occurs if TH2 high temp error signal is detected continuously for at least 1 seconds.

"TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) open" error"TH2 open" signal is detected.


Set SW2 (sub power switch) OFF and then back ON. Set to "0" the bit 1 in DIP SW3 in 25 mode. (If you switch power back on without releasing the latch, the error will recur.)

TH1 (fixing temperature sensor 1) TH2 (fixing temperature sensor 2) L2 (fixing heater lamp 1) L3 (fixing heater lamp 2) PRDB (printer drive board) DCPS (DC power supply)




8-36

1

Scanner abnormalities

Image processing abnormalities

F40-1

F40-9

F41-1

F43-1

F46-1

F46-8

F46-10

Communication error at optics CPUSRGA error (bad parity, overrun, or framing error in received data) or by transmission timeout [100ms].

Communication error at optics CPUSRGA error (protocol error in receive control signal [SREQ, SACK]).M2 (optical drive) drive errorOccurs at exposure unit initial search or at exposure unit return scan if PS14 (optics home-position) fails to turn ON within a predetermined time.L1 (exposure lamp) errorOccurs if L1 error signal is detected continuously for 500msec (excluding first 500msec after L1 ON).Laser-driver errorCaused by overcurrent in laser output.Laser index errorOccurs if index period is different from expected value.

AOC error AOC counter overflow


Scanner stops immediately.

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON.

SCDB (scanner drive board)

M2 (optical drive)SCDB (scanner drive board)

L1 (exposure lamp)

Laser diodeLDB (laser drive board)CB (overall control board)INDEX (index sensor board) M5 (polygon) Laser route CB (overall control board)ADB (A/D conversion board) L1 (exposure lamp)INV1 (exposure lamp inverter) Exposure unit stop position CB (overall control board)




8-37

3

3

Image processing abnormalities

Motor speed abnormalities

Fan lock abnormalities

F46-11

F49-2

F49-4

F49-6

F51-4

F51-5

F51-6

F52-1

F52-2

F52-3

F52-4(Otherthan 7020/25/30)F52-6

AGC error AGC counter overflow

LDB (laser drive board) connection errorINDEX (index sensor board) connection error

ADB (A/D conversion board) connection error

M3 (developing) speed errorEM detect signal (developing_motor_em) detected 5 times at 100msec intervals.M1 (main) speed errorEM detect signal (drum_motor_em) detected 5 times at 100msec intervals.M5 (polygon) speed errorM5 was not locked 5 sec. after starting to run.

FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan) errorEM detect signal detected 5 times at 100msec intervals.FM2 (fixing cooling fan) errorEM detect signal detected 5 times at 100msec intervals. (Clear if detection counter is not EM).FM4 (internal cooling) errorEM detect signal detected 5 times at 100msec intervals. (Clear if detection counter is not EM).FM5 (developing suction) errorEM detection signal detected 5 times at 100 msec intervals. (Clear if detection counter is not EM.)IP CPU fan abnormal

Scanner stops immediately.

If copying is in progress, the main body stops immediately, and the main relay and 24V power turn OFF.Scanner stops immediately.



ADB (A/D conversion board) L1 (exposure lamp) INV1 (exposure lamp inverter) exposure unit stop position CB (overall control board)LDB (laser drive board) CB (overall control board)INDEX (index sensor board) CB (overall control board)

ADB (A/D conversion board) CB (overall control board) flex wire bundleM3 (developing) PRDB (printer drive board)

M1 (main) PRDB (printer drive board)

M5 (polygon) PRDB (printer drive board)

FM3 (internal dehumidifying)PRDB (printer drive board)

FM2 (fixing cooling) PRDB (printer drive board)

FM4 (internal cooling) PRDB (printer drive board)

FM5 (developing suction)PRDB (printer drive board)

Printer controller (IP-421/422)




8-38

2

Image control communication abnormalities

Operations unit control abnormalities

Main bodyabnormalities

E56-1

E56-2

E56-3

E56-4

E56-5

E56-6

E56-7E56-8

E56-9

E56-10

F56-11

Communication error between system-control and engine-control sections of the CB (overall control board).Occurs if CB fails to responds when SW2 (sub power) turns ON. (10sec.)Communication error between system-control and engine-control sections of the CB (overall control board).Process READY signal not detected for 30sec. during standby.Communication error between system-control and engine-control sections of the CB (overall control board).Scanner READY signal is not detected for 30sec. during standby.Communication error between system-control and engine-control sections of the CB (overall control board).Finisher READY signal is not detected for 30sec. during standby.Communication error between system-control and engine-control sections of the CB (overall control board).Platen-original size notification timeout (5sec.).Operation status errorMemory access error at copy insertion.Control error at panel managerOperation drawing errorScreen-data drawing mismatchOperation drawing errorDrawing-component data errorOperation panel communication errorMain-body identification errorDetected CB (overall control board) (ROM) for different machine.

Engine power supply OFF

Machine cannot be used.

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON. (CB reset)

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON, then overwrite the overall control ROM-ISW.

CB (overall control board)



CB (overall control board) FSCB (FS control board)



CB (overall control board) OB (operation board)CB (overall control board)




8-39

3

DF-314

FS-107

F60-1

F60-11

F67-3

F70-1

F70-9

F70-11

F77-2

RADF communication error• Caused by SRGA error detection (bad parity, overrun, or framing error in received data) or by transmission timeout [100ms]).• Caused by SRGA error detection (protocol error in receive control signal [SREQ, SACK]).RADF flash-ROM errorDetected checksum error in RADF flash ROM.

Error in RADF nonvolatile memoryError in reading or writing the nonvolatile memory.FNS communication errorCaused by SRGA error detection (bad parity, overrun, or framing error in received data) or by transmission timeout [100ms]).FNS communication errorCaused by SRGA error detection (protocol error in receive control signal [SREQ, SACK]).FNS flash-ROM errorDetected checksum error in FNS flash ROM.

M706 (tray up/down) drive error1. Following removal of paper, tray failed to reach PS711 (tray upper limit detect) or PS706 (tray lower limit detect) within 10 sec. after start of tray up.2. During copying, tray failed to reach PS711 (tray upper limit detect) or PS706 (tray lower limit detect) within 10 sec. after start of tray up.

RADF cannot be used.


FNS cannot be used.



Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON, then overwrite the RADF ROM-ISW.Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON.

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON, then overwrite the FNS ROM-ISW.


DFCB (RADF control board) CB (overall control board)

DFCB (RADF control board)

DFCB (RADF control board) CB (overall control board)

CB (overall control board) FSCB (FS control board)

FSCB (FS control board)

M706 (tray up/down), FSCB (FS control board) PS711 (tray upper limit detect)PS706 (tray lower limit detect)




8-40

2

FS-107

Nonvolatile memory

F77-3

F77-5

F77-6

F77-11

F77-16

F77-18

F80-1

F80-2

F80-3

F80-4

F80-5

M704 (alignment (front)) drive error1. Failed to reach HP within 1 second after start of alignment-plate HP search.2. PS710 (alignment-plate HP detect (front)) failed to turn OFF within 1 seconds after start of alignment-plate size position shift.M707 (paper-pressure) drive errorM707 failed to complete 1 rotation within 500msec after starting to run.M705 (stapler shift) drive error1. Stapler unit failed to reach PS708 (stapler unit HP detect) within 1 seconds after the commencement of a stapler home search.2. PS708 (stapler unit HP detect) failed to turn OFF within 1 second after start of double stapling standby position shifting.Stapler reversal errorStapler failed to read PS712 (stapler HP detect) within 500msec after start of M708 (stapler) reverse drive.M703 (alignment (rear)) drive error1. Failed to reach HP within 1 second after start of alignment-plate HP search.2. PS709 (alignment-plate detect (rear)) failed to turn OFF within 1 seconds after start of alignment-plate size position shift.M709 (cooling fan) drive errorLock condition (lasting more than 10 seconds) was detected any time from 10 seconds after operation start following operation stop.Error in main body's nonvolatile memoryDetected abnormal function parameter.Error in main body's nonvolatile memoryDetected error in stored factory data.

Error in main body's nonvolatile memoryDetected abnormal function parameter, error in stored factory data.Error in main body's nonvolatile memoryUnable to access function parameter.Error in main body's nonvolatile memoryUnable to access stored factory data.


Factory settings are copied.

–


Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON. (CB reset)

M704 (alignment (front)) PS710 (alignment-plate HP detect (front)) FSCB (FS control board)

M707 (paper-pressure) FSCB (FS control board)

FSCB (FS control board) M705 (stapler shift) PS708 (stapler-unit HP detect)

FSCB (FS control board) M708 (stapler)

M703 (alignment (rear)) PS709 (alignment-plate detect (rear)) FSCB (FS control board)

M709 (cooling fan) FSCB (FS control board)

PRMB (Parameter memory board)




8-41

3

3

Flash ROM

Printer board

Image processing

CB (overall control board) communication abnormalities

F81-1

F81-2

F81-3

E87-1

F87-2

F87-3

E88-1

E89-1

E89-2

E89-3

E89-4

E89-5

Error in image-control flash ROMDetected checksum error in CB's image-control ROM.

Software errorOverall control and image control have non-matching software device types.

OEM compatibility error

Printer controller not identified.Printer controller did not respond. (But copier and fax can be used.)Printer-controller errorError F87-1 occurred 3 times in succession.Printer board HDD errorHDD cannot be accessed.Image errorError detected in image processing at overall control side.

Copy sequence errorError in job object pointer. (Could not get page-control object for some reason.)Copy sequence errorError in memory copy sequence. (Cause unknown)Copy sequence errorError in through copy sequence (FCOT). (Cause unknown)

Copy sequence errorMemory scanner did not complete stop. (Notification of stop completion not received from engine.)Copy sequence errorMemory printer did not complete stop. (Notification of stop completion not received from engine.)


Only the printer cannot be used.


Main relay and 24 V power supply go OFF at the end of copying.Engine power supply OFF

Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON, then overwrite the image-processing flash ROM.Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON, then overwrite the flash ROM.

Switch SW1 (main power switch) OFF/ON.Switch SW2 (sub power switch) OFF/ON. (CB reset)


Optional printer controller





8-42

3

3

3

Error code

18-1

18-2

18-3

18-4

60-1, -9, 67-1, -3

70-1, -9, -11

77-2

77-3, -16

77-5

77-6, -11

77-18

86-2, -3

87-2, -3

Error in main body upper tray

Error in main body lower tray

Error in DB upper tray

Error in DB lower tray (LCT)

RADF error

FNS error (Note)

Error in FNS tray up/down drive (Note)

Error in FNS alignment-plate,

pressure motor

Error in FNS paper-pressure motor

FNS stapler error

Error in FNS cooling fan motor

Fax-board error

Printer-board error

Main body upper tray

Main body lower tray

DB upper tray

DB lower tray, LCT

RADF

FNS

FNS

FNS alignment unit

FNS

FNS alignment unit

FNS

Fax

Printer

Tray can not be selected.




RADF can not be used.

FNS can not be used; FNS must be removed.


Only straight exit remains available.


Only straight exit remains available.


Copying and printing remain enabled.

Copying and faxing remain enabled.

Error Unit to be cut off Remarks


Correction Estimated abnormal partsCauses Resultingoperation

CB (overall control board)communicationabnormalities

E89-6 Main relay and 24 Vpower supply goOFF at the end of copying.All indicators on theoperation panel light.

Switch SW2 (subpower switch)OFF/ON. (CBreset)

CB (overall control board) Sub power switch OFF processingwait timeout

Note: For details of E86-xx and other FAX-related error codes, refer to the FK service handbook.

About abnormal units isolation

The following table shows how defective units are cut off (by software) in accordance with the error type.

Unit isolation Method

Upon the occurrence of any of the error codes shown above, the defective unit will be cut off from the system (bysoftware) when you press the [AUTO RESET] key and then switching SW2 (sub power) OFF/ON. Other functions willremain available. Note that if you don't clear the problem in the defective unit, the error will be detected again (and theerror code displayed again) the next time you turn SW2 OFF/ON. (This cutoff feature is effective one time only.)

Note: If F70-1, -9, -11 or 77-2, -5, -18 occurs, you cannot separate the unit concerned using the above procedure. In thiscase, you must either remove the cause of the error code or remove the FNS, otherwise printing will not take place.


8-43

L detection error code list

Code Cause Clearance method Suspected defective part

• Developing unit connector• TDS (toner density sensor)• PRDB (printer drive board)• M1 (main motor)• Developing agitator screw• Developing unit connector• TDS (toner density sensor)• PRDB (printer drive board)• Developer• TDS (toner density sensor)• PRDB (printer drive board)• PRDB (printer drive board)• TCSB (toner control sensor

board)

SW2 (sub power switch)OFF/ON




The TDS (toner density sensor) output ripple at the end of L detection was 0.5 V or less.

The TDS (toner density sensor) output ripple while the developer is being agitated during L detection adjustment was 0.02 V or less (there is almost no change in output).

TDS (toner density sensor) control voltage cannot be adjusted to within the range 5.76~7.46 V.

TCSB (toner control sensor board) output signal D/A conversion error

0003

0004

0005

0006

DIAGRAMS

8-44

7020 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1)

Symbol

ItemTim

e (sec )

Registration clutch

MC

2Loop clutch

MC

1

1st paper feed SD (upper)

SD1

Registration PS

PS1

V-Valid

Paper feed motor

PS3

Fixing exit PSPS2

Exit PS

Main m

otor

M9

Developing m

otor

M1

Separation claw SD

M3

Cleaning w

eb SD

SD7

Charge

SD4

Developing bias

HV

Transfer

HV

Separation

HV

HV

Transfer synchronization lamp

Guide-plate voltage

TSL

GTP

Pre-charging lamp

PCL

01

23

45

67

89

10

Start ON

: Does not com

e ON

for some copy counts.

100ms

100ms

100ms

100ms

2880ms

1

DIAGRAMS

8-45

7030 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1)1

Symbol

ItemTim

e (sec )

Registration clutch

MC

2Loop clutch

MC

1


SD1

Registration PS

PS1

Intermediate conveyance sensor/upper

PS21

V-Valid

Paper feed motor

PS3

Fixing exit PSPS2

Exit PS

Main m

otor

M9

Developing m

otor

M1

Separation claw SD

M3

Cleaning w

eb SD

SD7

Charge

SD4

Developing bias

HV

Transfer

HV

Separation

HV

HV


Guide-plate voltage

TSL

GTP

Pre-charging lamp

PCL

01

23

45

67

89

10

Start ON

: Does not com

e ON


: If the intermediate conveyance sensor O

N (paper leading edge detection)

timing is early, the loop clutch stops m

omentarily.

100ms

100ms

100ms

100ms

1980ms

DIAGRAMS

8-46

7035 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 2 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1)2

Sym

bolItem

Tim

e (sec)

Registration M

C

MC

2Loop clutch

MC

1

1st paper feed SD

(upper)SD

1

Registration P

S

Intermediate conveyance

sensor / upper

PS1

PS21

V-V

alid

paper feed motor

PS3

Fixing exit P

SPS2

Paper exit P

S

Main m

otor

M9

Developing m

otor

M1

Separation claw

SD

M3

Cleaning w

eb SD

SD7

Charge

SD4

Developing bias

HV

Transfer

HV

Separation

HV

HV


Guide-plate voltage

TSL

GTP

Pre-charging lam

pPC

L

01

23

45

67

89

10

PS23IT

exit PS

(upper)

Start ON

: Does not com

e ON


: If the intermediate conveyance sensor O

N (paper leading edge detection)

timing is early, the loop clutch stops m

omentarily.

100ms

1695ms

340ms

100ms

100ms

100ms

DIAGRAMS

8-47

7020ADU TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1)

100ms

12

34

56

79

1011

1213

1415

1617

188

182ms

125ms

1543ms 20m

s20m

s

20ms

1543ms

1543ms

20ms

131ms

2800ms

2800ms

75ms

182ms

243ms

125ms

75ms

182ms

200ms

182ms

293ms

75ms

1614ms

1543ms

20ms

243ms

125ms

243ms

125ms

182ms

182ms

293ms

75ms1543m

s

243ms

125ms

125ms

293ms

75ms1543m

s

243ms

293ms

293ms

Symbol

ItemTim

e (sec )

Registration clutch

MC

1

Loop clutchM

C2


SD1

Registration PS

PS1

V-Valid

Fixing exit PSPS2

Main m

otorM

1

Exit PSPS3

ADU

motor

M6

FR

140mm

/s

350mm

/s

140mm

/s

Start ON

ADU

gate SD

ADU

PS

SD5

PS4

0

DIAGRAMS

8-48

7035ADU TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 1)

Sym

bolItem

Tim

e (sec)

Registration M

CM

C1

PS21

Loop clutchM

C2

1st paper feed SD

(upper)SD

1

Registration P

SPS1

V-V

alid

Fixing exit P

SPS2

Main m

otorM

1

Paper exit P

SPS3

AD

U m

otorM

6

FR

450mm

/s

180mm

/s

180mm

/s

Start ON

Gate S

D

AD

U P

S

SD5

PS4

01

23

45

67

910

1112

1314

1516

1718

8

IT exit P

S (low

er)PS24

Intermediate conveyance

sensor / upper

100ms

2150ms

2150ms

154ms

154ms

154ms

154ms

154ms

154ms

110ms

130ms

377ms

340ms

100ms

100ms

110ms

110ms

110ms

446ms

980ms

980ms

980ms

980ms

980ms

980ms

110ms

110ms

377ms

377ms

340ms

340ms

130ms

130ms

2

DIAGRAMS

8-49

DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SINGLE SIDE ORIGINAL, 3 SHEETS)0

12

34

56

7S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Valid (S

can)

Original feed

motor

M301

Original

reversal motor

M303

Original

conveyance m

otorM

302

Roller pressure S

DS

D302

Original exit P

SP

S303

F140m

m/s

F260m

m/s

R140m

m/s

R260m

m/s

F250m

m/s

No original detect P

SP

S301

Original registration P

SP

S311

PS

312O

riginal feed PS

Exit S

DS

D303

R F

DIAGRAMS

8-50

7035/DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SINGLE SIDE ORIGINAL, 3 SHEETS)

Sym

bolItem

Tim

e (sec)

Valid (S

can)

Original feed

motor

M301

Original reversal

motor

M303

Original

conveyancem

otorM

302

Roller pressure S

DS

D302

Original exit P

SP

S303

F180m

m/s

F277m

m/s

R180m

m/s

R277m

m/s

F250m

m/s


SP

S301


SP

S311

PS

312O

riginal feed PS

Exit S

DS

D303

01

23

45

67

F180m

m/s

R180m

m/s

2

DIAGRAMS

8-51

DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, DOUBLE SIDE ORIGINALS, 2 SHEETS)

01

23

45

67

89

1011

1213

14S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Valid (S

can)

Original feed

motor

M301

Original

reversal m

otorM

303

Original

conveyance m

otorM

302

Roller pressure S

DS

D302

Original exit P

SP

S303

F140m

m/s

F260m

m/s

R140m

m/s

R260m

m/s

F250m

m/s


SP

S301


SP

S311

PS

312O

riginal feed PS

Exit S

DS

D303

R F

DIAGRAMS

8-52

7035/DF-314 TIME CHART (8.5X11, DOUBLE SIDE ORIGINALS, 2 SHEETS)

Sym

bolItem

Tim

e (sec)

Valid (S

can)

Original feed

motor

M301

Original

reversal motor

M303

Original

conveyance m

otorM

302

Roller pressure S

DS

D302

Original exit P

SP

S303

F180m

m/s

F180m

m/s

R180m

m/s

F277m

m/s

R180m

m/s

R277m

m/s

F250m

m/s


SP

S301


SP

S311

PS

312O

riginal feed PS

Exit S

DS

D303

01

23

45

67

89

1011

1213

14

2

DIAGRAMS

8-53

FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SORT MODE, 2 SHEETS, 2 SETS)

01

23

45

67

910

8S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Paper

conveyance m

otorM

701

Paper exit

motor

M702

140mm

/s

600mm

/s

Alignm

ent m

otorM

703,704

Stapler shift

motor

M705

Paper

pressure PS

Open

Pressure

Lower

Raise

PS

701

140mm

/s

Stop

Reverse

Alignm

ent

Shift

600mm

/s

Exit P

SP

S3

Paper entrance detect P

SP

S702

PS

707N

o paper detect PS

Tray up/down

motor

M706

R F

DIAGRAMS

8-54

7035/FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, SORT MODE, 2 SHEETS, 2 SETS)

01

23

45

67

910

8S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Paper

conveyance m

otorM

701

Paper exit

motor

M702

180mm

/s

600mm

/s

Alignm

ent m

otorM

703,704

Stapler shift

motor

M705

Paper

pressure PS

Open

Pressure

Lower

Raise

PS

701

180mm

/s

Stop

Reverse

Alignm

ent

Shift

600mm

/s

Exit P

SP

S3


SP

S702

PS

707N

o paper detect PS

Tray up/down

motor

M706

R F

2

DIAGRAMS

8-55

FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, STAPLE MODE, 2 SHEETS, 1 POSITION)

01

23

45

67

910

8S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Paper

conveyance m

otorM

701

Paper exit

motor

M702

140mm

/s

600mm

/s

Alignm

ent m

otorM

703,704

Stapler shift

motor

M705

Stapler m

otorM

708

Paper

pressure PS

Open

Pressure

Lower

Raise

PS

701

140mm

/s

Stop

Reverse

Alignm

ent

Shift

600mm

/s

Exit P

SP

S3


SP

S702

PS

707N

o paper detect PS

Tray up/down

motor

M706

R F

DIAGRAMS

8-56

7035/FS-107 TIME CHART (8.5X11, STAPLE MODE, 2 SHEETS, 1 POSITION)

01

23

45

67

910

8S

ymbol

ItemT

ime (sec )

Paper

conveyance m

otorM

701

Paper exit

motor

M702

180mm

/s

600mm

/s

Alignm

ent m

otorM

703,704

Stapler shift

motor

M705

Stapler m

otorM

708

Paper

pressure PS

Open

Pressure

Lower

Raise

PS

701

180mm

/s

Stop

Reverse

Alignm

ent

Shift

600mm

/s

Exit P

SP

S3


SP

S702

PS

707N

o paper detect PS

Tray up/down

motor

M706

R F

2

DIAGRAMS

8-57

DB-209/DB409 TIME CHART (8.5X11, LIFE SIZE, 3 COPIES, FEED FROM TRAY 3)

01

23

45

67

910

118

3000ms

3000ms

1543ms

75ms

293ms

243ms

125ms

182ms

1543ms

75ms

293ms

243ms

125ms

182ms

1543ms

75ms

293ms

243ms

125ms

182ms

Symbol

ItemTim

e (sec )

Registration clutchM

C1

Loop clutchM

C2

1st paper feed SD (upper)SD101

Registration PSPS1

V-Valid

Fixing exit PSPS2

Copy ON

Exit PS

DB Paper feed motor

PS3

M100

DIAGRAMS

8-58

Blank

8-59

7020 SERIES WIRING DIAGRAM (1/4)

-5V

S. G

ND

INV.

ON

(P

WM

)

S. G

ND

S. G

ND

SU

B_S

W

84 -

14

84 -

15

84 -

16

84 -

17

84 -

18

84 -

19

Optional with all except 7020/25/30/35

SE

L

S. G

ND

514 : 1 - 2

514 : 2 - 1

8-60


FM

3 D

RIV

E (

DO

/200

mA

)

LOC

K S

IG (

DI/H

)

P. G

ND

H/L

SIG

601

- 7

601

- 10

601

- 8

601

- 9

J36:

1 -

4

J36:

4 -

1

J36:

2 -

3

J36:

3 -

2

J18

: 1 -

3

J18

: 2 -

2

J18

: 3 -

1

4

4

8-61


4

8-62


[How to see the diagram]1.The signals shown reflect levels present under normal idling conditions with the main switch turned ON.2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. (1) [Symbol]

(2)

50-1

CrimpConnector Faston

Signal types are as follows:

High levelLow level

Analog signalPulse signal

HL

P

Relay connector

(3) RC is the flat cable. (4) Signal flow The solid black circle ( ) among the connector symbols ( ) indicates the direction of signal flow. Example)

CB5VDC

PS1SGND

PS1

Direction ofsignal flow

8-63

DF-314 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

[HOW to see the diagram]

1. The signals shown reflect levels present

under normal idling

conditions with the main switch turned ON.

2. Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.

1) is Connector

2) is ribbon cable

3. Signal symbols in the figure are as follows .RC

H

L

*P

High active

Low active

Analog signal

Pulse signal

8-64

FS107 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

[HOW to see the diagram]

1. The signals shown reflect levels present

under normal idling

conditions with the main switch turned ON.

2. Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows.

1) is Connector

2) is ribbon cable

3. Signal symbols in the figure are as follows .RC

H

L

*P

High active

Low active

Analog signal

Pulse signal

8-65

DB-209/210/DB-409/410 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM2

[How to see the diagram]1.The signals shown reflect levels present under normal idling conditions with the main switch turned ON.2.Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows. (1) [Symbol]

(2)

50-1

CrimpConnector Faston

(3) RC is the flat cable. (4) Signal flow The solid black circle ( ) among the connector symbols ( ) indicates the direction of signal flow. Example)

CB5VDC

PS1SGND

PS1

Direction ofsignal flow

Signal types are as follows:

High levelLow level

Analog signalPulse signal

HL

P

Relay connector

8-66

Blank